tour tent tent

• Meet the Team
• Work with Us
• Czech Republic
• Netherlands
• Switzerland
• Scandinavia
• Philippines
• South Korea
• New Zealand
• South Africa
• Budget Travel
• Work & Travel
• The Broke Backpacker Manifesto
• Travel Resources
• How to Travel on $10/day

Home » Gear » best bikepacking tents

7 BEST Bikepacking Tents of 2024 | Options For ALL Trips and Budgets!

The allure of bike-packing lies in the seamless blend of freedom, speed, and the raw, unfiltered embrace of nature. It’s an odyssey on two wheels, a journey defined by the path less traveled, the pumping of legs and the tent you choose to carry.

A bike packers tent becomes their home and their place of refuge after a long days riding. As you know, the nature of bikepacking trips can mean having to pitch up miles from civilisation and sleeping out in all conditions. But, like tortoises, bikepackers also need to carry these homes with them wherever they go.

As such, the best bikepacking tent needs to be comfortable, durable, easy to pitch and as light as possible in order to facilitate riding. Well the good news that If you’re looking for the best bikepacking tents right now, this list will answer all your questions. We have tried and tested Solo tents, ultralight tents, two and three man tents – whatever you’re after, we got you covered.

On my list of the top bikepacking tents of 2024, I’ve taken into consideration a bunch of different factors to make sure that only the best of the best has made it onto this list — how easy they are to put up, water resistance, price, durability, and more — all to make it easy to find the right bikepacking tent for your travel needs.

I tried a LOT of Bikepacking tents so rest assures that the ones featured here are the very best.

Quick Answer: These are the Bikepacking Tents of 2024

Best bikepacking tents of 2024, #1 – overall best quality bikepacking tent, #2 – best (solo) ultralight tent for bikepacking, #3 – best (solo) budget bikepacking tent, #4 – best 2 person bikepacking tent, #5 – best 3 person bikepacking tent, #6 – best bikepacking tent for the tropics, #7 – best bikepacking tent for europe, buyer guide – how to choose the best bikepacking tent for you, faq about the best bikepacking tents, final thoughts on the best bikepacking tents.

The Broke Backpacker is supported by you . Clicking through our links may earn us a small affiliate commission, and that's what allows us to keep producing free content 🙂 Learn more .

#1 Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL1 Ultralight Bikepacking Tent – Overall Best Quality Bikepacking Tent

#2 nemo dragonfly osmo 2p bikepack tent – best (solo) ultralight tent for bikepacking, #3 coleman sundome tent – best (solo) budget bikepacking tent, #4 msr hubba hubba 2-person lightweight backpacking tent – best 2 person bikepacking tent, #5 msr hubba tour 3 – best 3 person bikepacking tent, #6 nemo hornet osmo ultralight backpacking tent – best bikepacking tent for the tropics, #7   lone rider mototent – best bikepacking tent for europe.

Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL1 Bikepack Tent

• Price > $499.95
• > Full coverage rainfly
• > Dry entry vestibule

NEMO Dragonfly OSMO 2P Bikepack Tent

• Price > $579.95
• > High arching poles
• > Easy set up

Coleman Sundome Tent

• Price > $89.30
• > It has large door
• > Best for mild conditions

MSR Hubba Hubba 2-Person Lightweight Backpacking Tent

• Price > $549.95
• > 3 year warranty
• > Three-season backpacking tent

MSR Hubba Hubba 3

• Price > $629.95
• > Plenty of room for three people
• > Massive ceiling pocket & 7 other pockets inside

Nemo Hornet OSMO Ultralight Backpacking Tent

• Price > $429.95
• > Designed to be weathertight and rugged
• > Lifetime warranty

Lone Rider MotoTent

• Price > $599
• > Lightweight
• > 2-year guarantee

Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL1 Ultralight Bikepacking Tent

Want a cool bikepacking tent for a European bikepacking adventure ? The Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL1 Ultralight Backpacking Tent is definitely one that you should be considering, especially if you’re looking for a lightweight tent.

While 2 and 3 person versions are available, for now we’re going to focus on the one-person Big Agnes Fly Creek as we believe it makes the perfect solo bikepacking tent. Though the Big Agnes Fly Creek looks like a simple tent, there are actually a lot of features to this bikepacking tent that we want to shout about so here goes! The tent poles here create an architecture that provides high volume and increases the interior space. The featherlight pole system creates a floor area of 20 square feet, with a head height of 38 inches. For one of the lighter tents on the market, it offers epic storage space.

The tent fabric materials are designed to hold up in adverse weather conditions, with a full-coverage rainfly that means you should be sheltered from a storm wherever you happen to set up camp – even in the mountains. There’s also a dry entry vestibule space , which does what it sounds like it might do, keeping your tent dry as you come in and out, but also providing space for you to stash your camping gear.

The packed weight of this top bikepacking tent is a very light 2 pounds 1 ounce, with a super light 1 pound 11 ounces once pitched. It’s the lightest tent on our list, and it’s easy to set up, too. An all-around awesome tent that will provide you with all the protection and comfort you need on your Europe adventure. In short, it’s simply one of the best ultralight backpacking tents there is.

Need more info? Have a look at our more in-depth Big Agnes Fly Creek tent review.

REI is one of America’s biggest and most-loved outdoor gear retailers.

Now, for just $30, get a lifetime membership that entitles you to 10% OFF on most items, access to their trade-in scheme and discount rentals .

When you’re out on a ride, the last thing you want is to be carrying weight than you absolutely need to and the fact is that tent can really add weight to your load. For this reason we love ultra-lightweight tents for bikepacking trips!

We have tried a lot of differ ultralight tents over the years and consider the NEMO Dragonfly OSMO 2P Bikepack Tent to be amongst the absolute best. It offers a heady combo of lightweight packability along with high comfort levels. This awesome bikepacking tent weighs in at just 2 pounds 1 ounces so you will barely feel it on your bike.

This lightweight model is made from pre-bent DAC featherlight poles making it super easy to pack down to its modest 19.5 x 4 inches. As well as being light, this epic camping tent will fit easily into your frame bag.

Ultralight tents are usually less resilient and durable than other tents as the lighter materials are more sensitive to strains. However, the Nemo Dragonfly is as hard wearing an ultralight tent as there is. This top bikepacking tent is constructed from integrated 20D nylon and 15D nylon ripstop , with waterproof protection and the integrated groundsheet Is also very tough. The canopy is 1200mm waterproof nylon ripstop. The protected strut vents mean humidity can be easily released, too.

It’s actually a very liveable tent ideal for long trips. It’s got high arching poles, for an expansive interior, making it feel quite roomy. You can actually sit up inside the tent (it’s 36″ in height).

There’s also enough room to store your gear and sleeping bag inside, too, as the tent is covered by a large trapezoidal cover – ample room to keep your precious stuff safe, dry and out of the way. It doesn’t block entry to the tent, which is a plus.

The Nemo Dragonfly boasts an easy set-up , which is a godsend. Colour-coded poles make it easy to set up (around 12 minutes) with a rainfly that snaps into place.

Bikepacking tents generally don’t come cheap. However the Coleman Sundome Tent halves (and then halves again, and then maybe again) the price of most bikepacking tents making it the super budget-friendly bike touring tent option.

You may be thinking, ‘Ok, so it’s cheap, that must mean it’s rubbish.’ And while it is does not perform as well as some other tents in this round up, it’s still a decent piece of travel gear.

Best for mild conditions, this offering from Coleman – depending on which size variation you go for (yes, you have options) weighs in at 7.2 lbs at its lightest and is relatively spacious regardless of which size you go for. It comes in two, three, four and six-man versions.

The tent has a large door, which is nice because no one likes getting tangled up as they try to get settled into their sleeping bag for the night. There’s also a rear hooded window and a hooded fly for extra ventilation. The integrated groundsheet is made of 1000D polythene with welded seams to guard against any leaks; the fly and walls of the tent are coated polyester, meaning they’re durable and shouldn’t let any water in. If you do have to weather a storm in this tent, there are external guy points to keep you stable in high winds.

Not only is this budget bikepacking tent great value for money , but it’s also easy to set up – you should be ready to jump in for some well-deserved rest after around 15 minutes, thanks to the pin and ring pole to body connections. You won’t even have to look at the instructions.

Looking for other reasonably priced tents? Check out our guide to the best budget backpacking tents .

Not all biking tours and cycling excursions are done solo, of course. You may want to hit the road with your mate, or your partner, and if you do that, you’ll want a two-person tent that ensures that you’re as comfortable as can be.

So for the best two-person bikepacking tent out there, we would definitely recommend the MSR Hubba Hubba 2-Person Lightweight Backpacking Tent. This three-season backpacking tent is one of the top tents out there whether for bikepacking or straight up camping.

There is plenty of space for you and whoever to sit inside and share a cup of tea or coffee. The MSR Hubba Hubba is cosy and convenient addition . Size-wise it’s 2.13 metres (84″) in length by 1.27 metres (50″) wide, with room to sleep side by side; the peak of the tent is 1 metre (39″) high. Ample crouching room.

When it comes to rolling up the tent and slinging it on the bike, the dimensions of this awesome bikepacking tent all packed up is 18 x 6 inches – its weight of 3 pounds 14 ounces. You can leave the flysheet or the bottom half of the tent at home for even lighter weight.

The freestanding design of the Hubba Hubba is interesting. This means you get a whole 29 square feet of floor area with no tapering sides stealing away your precious space. There are also two doors on the tent (one for each of you, right?) and an additional 8.75 square feet on either side for storing your all-important gear away from the elements.

On top of all that goodness, the set-up is straightforward (under 5 minutes!) and there’s a three-year warranty , even though this super lightweight tent will no doubt last you for years. You’ll be thankful you got this one!

Do You Want to Travel FOREVER??

Pop your email in below to get a FREE copy of ‘How to Travel the World on $10 a Day!’.

Maybe a two-person tent isn’t enough for you. If you love extra space when bikepacking, or you’re travelling in a group of three, this tent is the one for you!

The MSR Hubba Hubba 3 Backpacking Tent really is our top choice for the best 3 person bikepacking tent you’re likely to find at the moment. It’s awesome. Made by the good people at MRS, this tent has been specifically designed for three people in mind – it’s not just a larger version of a two-man tent.

Made for high volume to increase living space without adding weight, the dimensions of this baby are 70 inches by 90 inches, with a floor area that covers 43 square feet –  lots of room for everyone in your group to have a good night’s sleep.

This bikepacking tent has one thing we like a lot: steep walls that create a decent amount of living space. Not only that but there’s also room for your gear storage with dual vestibules for keeping your gear nice and dry. There’s also a massive ceiling pocket and seven other pockets inside . We love pockets.

In terms of weight, adding room for one more doesn’t add much to the weight of this tent: it’s a mere 3lbs 7oz. Packed, that’s 6.4lbs with a size of 7″ x 17″. As a fun bonus, it comes in two colourways : a punchy orange and grey combo, and a more muted olive green. Yay.

If you’re thinking of a bikepacking tour around Vietnam or Thailand then you’ll want something suited to the hot and humid climate of the region. Less is more when it comes to camping somewhere like this, so the Nemo Hornet Ultralight Backpacking Tent is a bloody good option.

Packing down to a very light (and pretty small) 2 pounds, 19.5 (50cm) inches by 4.5 inches (12cm), it really won’t add much to your kit weight.

This top bikepacking tent for the tropics comes in both one and two-person sizes although we’re focusing on the one-man version for now. It’s got a single vestibule with enough space to keep your precious belongings safe from the elements, be it a downpour or the blazing sun.

Designed to be weathertight and rugged , the Nemo Hornet has a 10D nylon ripstop fly , which makes it durable, water repellent and very light; the canopy, constructed of 10D nylon ripstop as well, has no-see-um mesh to keep those pesky bugs out, but to allow a breeze in (privacy, too). It’s super quick to set up. You won’t have to fiddle around with confusing details and will be lounging inside your tent within minutes.

There are a few nice little added features that we want to talk about – the kinds of things that make your life a little more easy on the road. We like the Diffusing Light Pocket s – slot a torch in here and it becomes a lantern for the tent. There are also guys and struts that pull out the corners, so you and your stuff don’t get covered in condensation. Add to that a lifetime warranty for defects and you have yourself a winner.

Want some more info? Check out our dedicated and more in-depth review of the Nemo Hornet tent .

The overall best quality bikepacking tent out there at the moment has to be the Lone Rider MotoTent , for a lot of reasons. Made by bikers, for bikers, the Lone Rider MotoTent is cool because there’s a dedicated space to park your ride inside the tent itself. This means it’s not only kept away from prying eyes, but also from the elements, meaning rain, snow or the sun won’t affect your bike in any way.

There’s enough space for two riders and their gear inside (the porch is 2 metres high – 6’7″ – so you can stand up inside it), with room for panniers as well. The length is 4.15 metres. We love that you can stretch out and keep your stuff dry in this tent!

Though built specifically as a motorcycle tent , it’s definitely possible to use this is if you’re a cyclist, too. Bicycles can be expensive too!

It’s well-built , with a high-quality groundsheet that will keep you dry, and a pretty amazing 7-minute set-up time thanks to colour coded, easy-use pole sleeves amongst other things. It’s also pretty lightweight, weighing in at 5.54kg (12lb), with a bold claim that it’s the lightest tent (with a motorcycle canopy) around.

The lightweight structure doesn’t take away from its durability : it’s got a strong tunnel design that’s constructed of high-quality material, with fly fabric that’s ultralight and UV-resistant with waterproof coating. Even the poles and pegs are made from aircraft-grade aluminium . It’s definitely reliable.

When you want to hit the road again and start the next leg of your adventure, the Lone Rider MotoTent rolls up to a very portable 60 (24″) x 20 (8″) centimetres, so it’ll easily fit on your bike. Last but not least is the 2-year guarantee, which means if your tent should become faulty, Lone Rider will replace it free of charge. Can’t argue with that!

Now, you  could spend a fat chunk of $$$ on the WRONG present for someone. Wrong size hiking boots, wrong fit backpack, wrong shape sleeping bag… As any adventurer will tell you, gear is a personal choice.

So give the adventurer in your life the gift of convenience: buy them an REI Co-op gift card!  REI is The Broke Backpacker’s retailer of choice for ALL things outdoors, and an REI gift card is the perfect present you can buy from them. And then you won’t have to keep the receipt. 😉

Those were the seven best bikepacking tents going right now, the best you’re likely to find anywhere. But though our handy list puts all these heavy hitters in once place to make it easy for you to make a decision, it’s not always easy to pick the right tent for you. There are a lot of factors to think about.

Don’t worry: as usual, we’re here to help. We’ve put together a handy guide of things to consider when you’re thinking about purchasing a brand new bikepacking tent.

1. Packability

If you’re heading out on the road, not only are you going to be looking for a tent that will keep you dry and safe once it’s set up but one that you will be able to pack away tightly and securely.

There’s no use getting a tent that you can’t pack up and put away onto your bike easily; it will become a hindrance to your trip and that is not what you want at all.

Choose a bikepacking tent that suits how you pack. Do you have a big bag, and don’t mind a bit of extra weight? Then you can afford to go for something larger. If you’re all about keeping extra weight, and space, to a minimum, then something that’s ultralight will be what suits your bikepacking adventure.

Remember, you will want to consider the practicalities of traveling on a bike in each location including having to attach it to buses or ship overland or air, so having a smaller tent can keep costs down in this regard too.

Though tents aren’t exactly well known for being easy to set up, it doesn’t have to be this way! There are a lot of good bikepacking tents out there that are surprisingly easy to set up, making the process of arriving at your destination for the night a relative breeze.

You need to consider what sort of weather you’re be riding in, and what lighting conditions you need to be able to set up a tent quickly. Too many steps and fiddly poles and you’ll just end up frustrated at the end of a long day.

If you’re all about doing speed and getting things done quickly, then you are going to want to focus on looking for a good bikepacking tent that boasts a quick set-up time. Tip : It’s also a good idea to set up your tent in your backyard (maybe a few times) before you set off on your travels, just so you know how it works.

The weight of every piece you pack on a bikepacking trip is important, and as one of the bulkier items you’ll be carrying with you, a tent is certainly no exception.

For that reason, ultralight tents are almost always a good call – especially if you’re also riding a lightweight bike.

However, if you’re only setting out for a few days, or if you’re a relative newcomer to the world of bikepacking, you may not have a need for getting the most super ultra featherlight tent out there, which can run more expensive.

4. Durability

You’re not going to want to fork out hundreds (and hundreds) of dollars for a tent that isn’t worth it’s salt. If you are going to be heading out on adventures a lot with your new bikepacking tent, then you are going to want to choose something that will last.

Value for money is a good idea, that’s for sure, but if you’re racing in more rugged conditions, you might want to splash some extra cash.

If there is a lot of rain and wind in your future, and maybe even rugged terrain, then you should really consider getting something that ticks all the boxes when it comes to weatherproof, durable materials.

If not, you might be ok with a more ‘basic’ tent.

Another thing to consider is the warrantees that a lot of bikepacking tents offer. Two and three years is good, but if you think you’re going to be in the bikepacking game for the long haul, then you may want to consider something that comes with a lifetime guarantee.

It’s an obvious one, but basically, you have to think about two things: the size the tent packs down to (packability) and the size of the actual tent once it’s pitched.

Since we’ve already covered how packability can affect how you choose the best bikepacking tent for you, we’ll focus on the actual size of the tent after it’s been set up.

First of all, you’ll want to think about whether you can stand a one-person tent, or if you want a two-person tent for more room (or if you’re going to be travelling as a couple) – or maybe even a three or four-person might be a good idea for you. It all depends on how many people you’re travelling with – and how much you want to spread out.

If you’ve got a lot of stuff, you’ll either want a big tent, or you’ll want something with a lot of storage space.

Lastly, do you want something with room to stand or are you ok with just sitting? Bear in mind that some bikepacking tents can really be mini. Make sure you check the dimensions thoroughly, as tall people probably won’t enjoy smaller tents!

Still, have some questions? No problem! We’ve listed and answered the most commonly asked questions below. Here’s what people usually want to know:

How heavy should a bikepacking tent be?

Ideally, a bikepacking tent should be light so that you could carry it yourself with ease. Luckily, most tents are ultralight nowadays and you can expect a 2-4 pound weight, depending on the size.

How do I choose a bikepacking tent?

Keep these things in mind: 1. Packability and set Up 2. Your budget 3. Size and durability 4. Weight and material

What is the best 1 person bikepacking tent?

We think the NEMO Dragonfly OSMO 2P Bikepack Tent is ideal for solo bikers.

What is the best bikepacking tent on a budget?

A great budget bikepacking tent is the Coleman Sundome Tent . It’s super affordable, yet offers quite a bit of bang for your buck.

Our GREATEST Travel Secrets…

Pop your email here & get the original Broke Backpacker Bible for FREE.

You already know there are so many reasons to go bikepacking . Whatever sort of cycling or motorbike adventure you’re thinking of heading off on, it pays to invest in a bikepacking tent to make sure that your time on the road goes as smoothly as possible. A good tent will definitely be the difference between comfort and annoyance.

We are certain that, whoever you are and however you prefer to travel on your adventures, you will be able to hone in on something on our list of the best bikepacking tents.

There’s a lot to choose from, but we would say that our top choice for the definitive, overall best quality bikepacking tent has to be the Lone Rider MotoTent . That space to store your bike is simply genius.

That said if you don’t care all that much about having a little porch for your bike – and especially if you’re on a budget – a good beginner’s option would be the Coleman Sundome Tent. At that price, this highly reviewed tent is just an amazing purchase.

Let us know in the comments below which bikepacking tent you go for – and tell us if you’ve got a favourite that isn’t on this list!

Hey, carrying a lot of weight on your bike can really make the trip that much more hard work, check the best electric bikes out there if you want to lighten the load on your legs!

You’ll also need a good quality bikepacking bag for your adventure too!

Share or save this post

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Notify me of followup comments via e-mail.

What’s The Best Cycle Touring & Bikepacking Tent? (2024 Edition)

Posted on 

Welcome to my introduction to tent choice for the touring cyclist or bikepacker, in which an actual human writer with loads of relevant experience ( hi! ) will explain what to look for in a tent for cycle touring or bikepacking, and suggest a range of tents for all budgets available worldwide.

Before we get to the good stuff, though, there’s one important thing to know:

There’s currently no established category of tents specifically for cycle touring and bikepacking.

If you’ve already spent some time researching, you’ll have noticed that most tents seem to be designed and marketed for hiking, backpacking, mountaineering, car camping, and general outdoor pursuits, rather than specifically for cycle tours and bikepacking trips.

You might find the occasional exception to this rule, such as MSR’s new-for-2024 Hubba Hubba Bikepack series. But it doesn’t take much investigation to reveal that these are the same old Hubba Hubba backpacking tents with shorter pole sections, different carry sacks, and lots of marketing spin, rather than new tents designed from the ground(sheet) up for cyclists.

And the lightweight tent market is a crowded one. Walk into REI or Decathlon or any other large, high-street outdoor gear retailer and you’ll find a huge range of tent options, from ultralight shelters through to heavyweight family tents, freestanding domes to tunnels and teepees, tents with ventilation and bug-mesh or with snow cowls and snow stakes, double-wall and single-wall tents, tents with or without awnings or footprints – and at prices from next to nothing up hundreds of pounds or dollars. 

Yes – it can be hard to know where to start. (That’s why I originally wrote this post back in 2013, before the AI chatbots took over.)

And why the focus on people with cars and backpacks rather than bicycles? Simple: the market is much, much bigger. It’s about profit margins. Bikepacking may be growing in popularity, but bicycle travellers still sit on the margins, and are lucky if they get more than a quick mention in the product description.

The truth is that you’ll be lucky to find any tent designed specifically with cycle tourers and bikepackers in mind. 

Given that, it’s natural to start searching for trustworthy recommendations when choosing a tent for cycle touring or bikepacking – which I’m guessing is how you arrived here.

Here’s another important thing to remember:

‘Best’ means nothing outside the context of your  bike trip. Every ride is different.

So before you go any deeper into researching the best tent for a cycle tour or bikepacking trip, take a moment to ask yourself:

• Are you hunting for a cheap tent for a short overnight bike adventure close to home, or investing in a long-lasting tent for a transcontinental or round-the-world tour ?
• Are you a heavyweight tourer who likes plenty of living space and room for luggage, a minimalist ultralight bikepacker, or somewhere in between?
• Do you have racks and panniers to take bulky and heavy loads, or are you bikepacking with frame luggage, handlebar harnesses and fork cages alone?
• Do you plan on staying mostly at nice campsites with perfect tent pitches, or wild camping in the woods with your own stove and cookware ?
• Are you planning a fair-weather ride in good weather, or will you encounter winter temperatures , strong winds, high altitudes, or other extreme conditions?

As I mentioned, there are many tried-and-tested tents for cycling and camping adventures that have proven themselves on a massive range of journeys.

But if you want to delve any deeper, you’ll find there’s no real ‘best tent for cycle touring or bikepacking’ until you’ve asked yourself the questions above.

If you haven’t answered them, now’s the time to do so. And if you’re struggling to find clear answers, I’ve written introductions to the what , where , when , who and how of adventure cycle touring and bikepacking to help you do so.

I once rode the length of England without no money ( long story ), sleeping in a Tesco Value 2‑berth tent I got from a recycling centre. Another time I pedalled off-road through a stormy Mongolian springtime with a stormproof German tent costing hundreds of Euros. And before that, my wife and I shared a spacious 3‑person freestanding tent as we traversed the campgrounds of Europe. On each occasion, the tent I was using was the “best” tent for the job. You get the picture.

Okay. Got a clear idea of what kind of bike trip you’re going on? Great! Read on…

What Type Of Tent Is Best For Cycle Touring & Bikepacking?

I’ve spent a long time (too long, probably) looking at cyclists’ tent-buying trends over the last couple of decades I’ve been exploring the world on two wheels.

And I can tell you with confidence that the most popular kind of cycle touring or bikepacking tent for a solo rider is a freestanding, double-walled, 2‑berth, 3‑season tent in an inconspicuous shade of green , weighing 1–2kg (2–4 pounds), striking a balance between comfort, durability and weight, strapping neatly to a rear rack or a handlebar harness, with room inside for the rider and the most valuable bits of their luggage, and space in the awning for more. (The bike itself can stay outside.)

For a couple or pair , it’s the 3‑berth model of the same tent.

And for a solo ultralight rider , it’s the 1‑berth model.

If you asked me to pick just one range of tents that ticks all of these boxes, it would be MSR’s Hubba Hubba range, which is available in 1‑, 2- and 3‑berth models.

( Click here to skip down to the full details, photos, and manufacturer links for the MSR Hubba Hubba range).

I’ve used and abused many tents in the Hubba Hubba range over the years, including a 2014 2‑berth Hubba Hubba NX, a 2012 1‑berth Hubba, and a 2010 3‑berth Mutha Hubba HP. They’re heavily patched-up with seam seal and repair tape, but I still use all of them regularly (see the photos above).

If you don’t have any highly specialised requirements and you’re looking for a top-quality tent you can simply grab and ride out the door with, the MSR Hubba Hubba range is what I’d usually recommend.

As a bonus, being of the free-standing variety of tents, they’re extremely easy to pitch, making them ideal for newcomers to frequent camping in varied conditions.

How Do Tents For Cyclists Differ From Tents For Hikers & Backpackers?

Before I start listing the best cycle touring and bikepacking tents, I’ll briefly explain how tent-buying priorities for cyclists differ from, say, long-distance hikers, and how that might affect your choice.

The first big difference is that packed weight and volume is usually less important for cyclists.

On a bike trip, you have a two wheeled, pedal-powered vehicle to carry your gear, rather than shouldering the burden yourself. This means – generally speaking – you can consider bigger, heavier tents that will allow you to live more comfortably, fare better in bad weather, last longer, and possibly cost less too.

Long-distance thru-hikers in particular are often concerned with minimising their base pack weight, and for that reason sometimes carry single-skin shelters held up by carbon-fibre trekking poles that weigh just a few hundred grams. Unless you’re hoping to win an endurance bikepacking race, you probably won’t be sharing this obsession. (But in case you are, there are suggestions below for ultralight tents for bikepacking too.)

A second difference is that cyclists often camp close to roads, as well as in the backcountry. 

This brings with it slightly different priorities when it comes to visibility .

Many hikers prefer to be as visible as possible in remote landscapes in case of needing assistance. Cyclists just as often want the opposite: to be able to wild camp (or stealth camp) undetected , close to civilisation when necessary. For that reason, the colour of the pitched tent often factors into the buying decision.

This is less of a concern for remote, off-road riding in wilderness areas where you’re going to be a long way from people. But because trips like this often involve road sections too, both cycle tourers and off-road bikepackers are served best by tents suited to both scenarios.

A third, although marginal, difference is that hikers have the ability to pitch ultralight shelters which use trekking poles for structure. 

If you’re on a bike, some of these shelters may seem to offer a fabulously lightweight and packable solution for a bikepacking expedition. But you’ll have to buy/make/bring an additional set of poles to set them up. These poles will have no other use, which cancels out the weight savings. If reducing your luggage is really your top priority, consider using the bike itself to support a tarp shelter .

The Best Cycle Touring & Bikepacking Tents For 2024

To the listings!

The following tents are specifically recommended for cycle touring and bikepacking , and have been extensively road-tested by the community.

Models in this list come from a variety of manufacturers worldwide, so whether you’re reading this article in the UK or Europe, the USA or Canada, Australia, or elsewhere, there’ll probably be options here you can find locally, as well as online.

Some of these recommendations are inspired by my interviews with highly experienced riders who have spent countless miles and years road-testing these tents. Others are tents that frequently appear in trip reports and receive unanimously positive reviews from real-world users. The listings are fully updated to reflect the latest models and prices for the 2024 season.

We’ll start with low-budget tents for short and simple trips, move on to the most popular tents in the mid-range for general cycle touring and bikepacking service, and work our way up to the most durable lightweight tents for world-ranging rides of months or years.

To finish, we’ll looking at a few examples of specialist tents suited to the weight and pack size restrictions faced by ultralight bikepackers with minimal frame luggage (though this niche is not my usual focus).

For each tent, you’ll find links to manufacturer’s websites where you can get detailed, up-to-date specifications. Wherever possible, I’ve included links to online retailers in the UK, USA, Australia, and Canada offering the best deals I can find (affiliate links are marked with an asterisk; you can find out more about my affiliate policy here ).

These are not the only tents that’ll do the job. In fact, the tent you already have in the garage/basement/attic/storage unit might be perfectly adequate, as you don’t really need any of this fancy gear anyway .

But I can promise you the listing below represent the very best of what the global cycle touring and bikepacking community is using today.

Wild Country Zephyros Compact 2 (UK, £230)

Wild Country is the budget marque of the premium British manufacturer Terra Nova. The 1.95kg  Zephyros Compact 2 takes more than a little inspiration from Hilleberg’s Akto, a favourite high-end tent for minimalists since it was popularised by TV outdoorsman Ray Mears. It requires staking out at each end, but you get a lot of interior space for a reasonably low weight and with a single pole supporting a single-pitch structure. 

The “Compact” tag was added to the name in 2020, with the tent now featuring shorter pole sections for a more convenient 30×16cm packed shape for bikepacking luggage and small panniers, as is fast becoming the trend.

There’s also a 1‑berth version which weighs in at 1.65kg, but in my opinion – especially given the small awning – the 300g you’d save isn’t worth the loss of interior storage space for your gear, unless minimising weight is your number one priority.

• Exclusive to Tom’s Bike Trip readers : Get 15% off the Wild Country Zephyros Compact 2 on the Terra Nova website when you use the voucher code TOMA15 at checkout.
• The Wild Country Zephyros Compact 2 is also available online or in-store in the UK from Go Outdoors ,  Snow + Rock and  Cotswold Outdoor , or online-only from Amazon . Try eBay.co.uk for second-hand offers.
• Wild Country is a British brand, so (especially post-Brexit) this tent is quite hard to find elsewhere in the world.

Alpkit Ordos 2 (UK, £235)

Direct retailer and manufacturer Alpkit have made a splash in the UK bikepacking and cycle touring scene with their Ordos ultralight 3‑season wedge tents. I used one on a traverse of the central highlands of Armenia , and I’d still be using it if it hadn’t later been trampled by a herd of cattle.

With 2- and 3‑berth models available and a choice of a red or green rainfly, the lightweight Ordos tents – just 1.4kg for the 2‑berth and 1.7kg for the 3‑berth in their most minimal configurations – are roomy, practical, well-ventilated, easy to pitch, and reasonably priced, doing best in warmer weather.

The classic wedge design echoes classic tents such as the Vaude Hogan UL from Germany (see below) and Big Agnes Seedhouse from the USA. It’s not quite freestanding but close enough for most real-world scenarios, requiring a minimum of four stakes for a good pitch.

The most recent versions of the Ordos feature shorter-section collapsible poles, making the 42cm-long pack shape and size slightly more handlebar harness-friendly (though still not as friendly as other tents in this list).

• Order the Alpkit Ordos 2 or Ordos 3 direct from Alpkit in the UK or with worldwide delivery.
• Also try eBay for rare second-hand models.

REI Co-Op Quarter Dome SL 1/2/3 (USA, $330/350/400)

If your tour is beginning in the States and you need a new set of camping gear, you’d do well to head to the nearest branch of REI .

REI is a well-known outdoor co-operative manufacturing a range of top-rated gear and selling it without the third-party mark-up, so you get a lot for your money. Sign up as a lifetime member of the co-op and you’ll also get 10% of your spend back in store credit at the end of each year, as well as free delivery and various other benefits.

Their ultralight, semi-freestanding Quarter Dome, available in 1‑berth (2lb 6oz / 1.1kg), 2‑berth (2lb 14oz / 1.5kg) and 3‑berth (4lb 9oz / 2.1kg) versions, was the most popular cycle touring tent among Stateside riders in my most recent survey of cycle touring and bikepacking tents (though I have not yet slept in one personally).

The mesh inner can be pitched fully freestanding for warmer weather and stargazing, with the rainfly needing just a couple of (included) stakes.

Expect plentiful headroom, excellent build quality and one of the best warranties you’ll find in the outdoor equipment industry.

• Buy the REI Co-Op Quarter Dome range online from REI.com in the USA , or in-store from one of 132 retail locations in the lower 48.
• Try eBay.com for second-hand models of this popular range of tents.

MEC Spark 2.0 1/2/3P (Canada, CA$375/475/575)

Looking for a tent for a cycle tour originating in Canada? The Spark 2.0 range of tents from Canadian gear retailer MEC comes in 1‑, 2- and 3‑berth versions at a very reasonable weight for the price – the solo 1‑berth version weighs just 1.34kg packed.

With a familiar looking freestanding dome-shaped design, the 2- and 3‑berth models each have two doors and two vestibules for easy access to extra storage for panniers and other luggage. All models feature a 3000mm waterproof, 30D polyester ripstop fly (ie: industry-standard waterproof material) to protect you from the heaviest of North American springtime downpours.

And because the Spark 2.0 range is designed, manufacturerd and sold direct by Canada’s largest gear retailer, each model also works out considerably cheaper than similar tents from better-known brands, and is covered by MEC’s ‘rock solid’ guarantee.

• Get the MEC Spark 2.0 tent online from the MEC website or from any of their 22 retail stores across Canada.

MSR Elixir 1–4 (Worldwide, £250–380 / US$320–490 / CA$350–635)

If saving weight is not of utmost importance, and you’re looking to save money, but you still want a quality tent from a reputable brand, the  MSR Elixir range is a very good bet (click for Europe / USA / Canada official manufacturer webpages).

These tents have a very similar freestanding dome structure and a range of 1- to 4‑berth variants – similar to the much-loved Hubba Hubba range (see below) but for significantly lower prices. Why? They’re considerably heavier: 2.77kg compared to 1.76kg in the case of the 2‑berth Elixir versus the 2‑berth Hubba. That’s almost 60% more weight, although we’re still only talking the equivalent of a 1‑litre water bottle. For a fully-loaded rider carrying a tent on a rear rack, that’s a marginal difference, though the 51cm-long packed size will exclude it from many bikepacking handlebar harness setups.

Slightly more spacious than the Hubba Hubbas, and with a more complex pole structure, you can expect the Elixir tents to last even longer than their more expensive brethren. As such, they’d be an excellent choice for fully-loaded riders heading off on long-haul trips where maximum durability is key.

UK/European markets get a choice of green or grey rainfly while North Americans are, for unknown reasons, stuck with grey.

• Buy the MSR Elixir range in-store or online in the UK from Go Outdoors , Snow + Rock , Cotswold Outdoor or Ellis Brigham . Online retailers include OutdoorGear UK , Amazon and eBay.co.uk .
• Buy the MSR Elixir range online in the USA direct from MSR or from REI , Amazon or eBay.com . Don’t forget REI also have 132 retail locations across the contiguous US.
• Buy the MSR Elixir range online in Canada direct from MSR or from MEC , Amazon or eBay.ca . Again, MEC have numerous retail locations where you may be able to see the MSR Elixir pitched before you buy.

MSR Hubba Hubba 1/2/3P + Bikepack editions (Worldwide, £385/445/650 / $470/550/630)

In the long term, the MSR Hubba Hubba range ( Europe / USA / Canada webpages) is possibly the all-time most recommended series of tents among the global community of cycle tourers and bikepackers, as mentioned in the introduction. As a result, it has spawned a thousand cheap and inferior imitations .

Riders love the generous headroom, the inner mesh pockets, the vast luggage awnings, and the low packed volume and weight.

The range features 1‑, 2- and 3‑berth models (all three of which are pictured above) and has been updated several times over the years as tent technology evolves. For 2024 the range has been slightly expanded with the addition of “Bikepack” editions of the 1- and 2‑berth tents (but not the 3‑berth), almost identical to the regular models but with shorter pole sections, a packed size and shape better suited to handlebar harnesses, a dark green rainfly, and a slightly higher price tag.

The MSR Hubba Hubba range aims to strike that finest of balances between weight, comfort and durability. In other words, they’re neither the lightest, biggest, nor longest-lasting tents in this list, but you’re unlikely to find fault with the end result.

Since 2022, the North American models (pictured above) have come with a “Sahara” yellow-tan rainfly, replacing the light grey of previous “NX” iterations.

In Europe (where the range still goes by the old “NX” naming scheme), grey and green rainflys are still available. If you have a choice, I’d recommend green for more inconspicuous wild camping .

A solo fully-loaded cycle tourer might go for the 3lb 4oz / 1.5kg, 2‑berth Hubba Hubba 2P , or the Bikepack edition of the same tent, which may also suit those bikepacking in pairs . This is my personal go-to tent for most scenarios.

Couples with a full luggage setup will probably prefer the spacious 1.7kg, 3‑berth Hubba Hubba 3P . This is my and my wife’s preferred tent when we ride together.

Ultralight solo bikepackers will likely go for the 1‑berth Hubba Hubba Bikepack with a minimum packed weight of 2lb 13oz / 0.93kg. I took an older version of this tent down the US West Coast a few years back and wrote this review .

There has in the past been a 4‑berth variant called the Papa Hubba, but it isn’t part of the current range.

Expect MSR tents to last many years if well looked-after, with top-quality weatherproofing, well-designed ventilation, superb build quality, and super-easy setup, with a variety of pitching options for different climates, including inner-only and fly/footprint-only. If you do encounter difficulties, warranty repairs or exchanges can be requested from MSR’s service centres in WA, USA and Ireland.

• Buy the MSR Hubba Hubba range in-store or online in the UK from Go Outdoors , Cotswold Outdoor , Snow + Rock , or Ellis Brigham . Online-only retailers include Alpine Trek , OutdoorGear UK and Amazon . Also try eBay.co.uk for second-hand offers.
• Buy the MSR Hubba Hubba range online in the USA direct from MSR or from REI (also in-store ) , Amazon or eBay.com .
• Buy the MSR Hubba Hubba range online in Canada direct from MSR or from MEC (also in-store ) , Amazon or eBay.ca .

Vaude Hogan UL (UK & Europe, £470/€500)

Another tent that has stood the test of time, German brand Vaude’s classic Hogan UL 2‑berth tent was, back in 2007, my first real high-quality tent. I rode across Europe, the Middle East, Africa and Mongolia with it for four years, so I guess you could say I’ve put it through its paces (read my very outdated original review here ).

At 1.9kg it’s not the lightest tent in this list, nor is it truly freestanding, but it is extremely durable, waterproof, with a decent-sized porch and a nice natural shade of green available for the fly. 

As with other wedge-shaped tents, it’s a little more sensitive to side winds than tunnel or geodesic (aka: dome) tents, so you’ll do well to be mindful of wind direction when pitching.

• Buy the Vaude Hogan UL online in the UK dire c t from Vaude or from Amazon .
• Buy the Vaude Hogan UL in its native Germany direct from Vaude or from Bergzeit.de .
• Vaude doesn’t currently have an official distributor in North America or Australia.

Terra Nova Voyager (UK, £660)

A British design that’s been on the scene for decades, the semi-freestanding classic Voyager is a long-term favourite among round-the-world riders originating from the UK, in part because Terra Nova don’t feel the need to change the design of or discontinue perfectly good tents. This has allowed the Voyager to build up a second-to-none reputation. It’s the tent I would have bought at the start of my first round-the-world attempt if I could have afforded it!

With a packed weight of 2.15kg, lightness is not the Voyager’s top design priority – but instead, you get top-class construction and weatherproofing, loads of liveability, and extreme durability for years (decades!) of riding.

The Voyager’s inner tent can be pitched fully freestanding, so in good weather you’ll also be able to take advantage of its part-mesh construction for ventilation and views of the night sky.

• Buy the Terra Nova Voyager online in the UK direct from Terra Nova , with an exclusive 15% reader discount when you use the voucher code TOMA15 at checkout.
• The Terra Nova Voyager is also available in-store or online in the UK from  Cotswold Outdoor and Snow + Rock , or online only from  UltralightOutdoorGear.co.uk and Amazon . Try eBay.co.uk . for second-hand offers and deals.
• As with their subsidiary brand Wild Country, Terra Nova tents are not easily found outside the UK.

Hilleberg Nallo 2/3/GT (Sweden, £910+)

The most lusted after (and expensive) tents for long-haul trips for which durability is the key consideration are undoubtedly those in the Nallo range from Swedish tentmakers Hilleberg .

They’re not the most lightweight, nor the best choice for hot climates, but they do have an unmatched reputation for quality and longevity. Hilleberg have long resisted following the trend for ever lighter and more flimsy materials: these tents are among the most tried and tested in the world and will last – literally – for decades.

The Nallo 2  (2.4kg) is recommended for solo heavyweight tourers, with the Nallo 3 GT  (3.1kg) delivering luxury on-the-road living for couples and their luggage.

Other Hilleberg tents often seen on the road include the lighter 1.7kg  Akto  for soloists and bikepackers, and the freestanding and spacious 3.3kg  Allak 2 for couples and heavyweight tourers. The Swedish brand of course makes excellent winter tents, with the 2.4kg  Soulo standing out.

• Buy the Hilleberg Nallo range in-store or online in the UK from Ellis Brigham or Tiso , or online-only from UltralightOutdoorGear.co.uk or AlpineTrek.co.uk . Always check eBay.co.uk for deals and second-hand offers.
• Buy the Hilleberg Nallo range online in the USA from Moosejaw or eBay.com , or for in-store locations see Hilleberg’s list of authorized dealers .
• Hilleberg does not appear to have an official dealer in Canada , but you might as well check eBay.ca anyway.

Ultralight Bikepacking Tents

The following tents are included in this list as examples of shelters that have either been developed with bikepacking in mind or crossed over from thru-hiking circles because they’re the lightest and most packable shelters you can get.

The range of minimalist tents and shelters serving this niche has only grown with the rise of bikepacking , so consider this a sample of the kind of options you’ll find if you start digging deeper into this market. It is certainly not an exhaustive list: for that, you’ll have to visit a specialist bikepacking gear blog.

You’ll find some of the lighter tents from the list above – such as the Alpkit Ordos 2 or the MSR Hubba Hubba Bikepack 1P – making their way onto bikepacking kit lists , possibly in stripped-down form.

Six Moon Designs Lunar Solo (USA, $260)

Weighing just 680g (that’s the same as a full, standard-sized cycling water bottle), the single-pole, single-wall Lunar Solo relies on being staked out and requires you to supply your own pole (it’s designed to be used with a trekking pole). It’s never going to be as comfortable as a double-wall tent with a geodesic structure – but if you’re OK with that, it’s difficult to imagine a more minimal shelter that isn’t a bivvy bag.

• Get the Lunar Solo direct from Six Moon Designs in the USA , or from Ultralight Outdoor Gear in the UK .

Terra Nova Starlite (UK, £655)

Launched in 2018, the Terra Nova Starlite series, available in 1‑, 2- and 3‑berth options, was one of the first British tents specifically designed with bikepacking in mind. Aside from striking a great combination of weight and weather-resistance, the 2‑berth Starlite 2 weighs just 1.5kg and, thanks to a reduction in pole section length, has a packed length of just 29cm. This means it’ll fit easily into a small pannier, or strap to your handlebars using the stuff-sack’s integrated webbing loops.

Some might consider its non-freestanding tunnel design a negative, but in the type of climate and terrain it’s designed for, staking it out really shouldn’t be a problem if you choose your pitch accordingly. Once up, it’s as roomy as you’d expect from a tunnel tent and very stable. That the optional footprint extends to cover the awning floor is a nice bonus.

• Read my long-term review of the Starlite 2 here .
• Get the Terra Nova Starlite 2 in the UK direct from Terra Nova , with a TomsBikeTrip.com exclusive 15% discount when you use the voucher code TOMA15 .
• The Terra Nova Starlite 2 is also available online in the UK from  Amazon , eBay.co.uk , and possibly elsewhere.
• As previously noted, Terra Nova products are hard to find outside of the UK.

More Tents For Cycle Touring & Bikepacking

If that’s not enough of a selection, try the following, which have also been recommended by readers of this blog:

• Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2  (USA, $530)
• Decathlon Forclaz MT900 Trekking Dome Tent 2P (UK/Europe, £220)
• Macpac Minaret 2P  (New Zealand, NZ$900)
• Marmot Tungsten  (Worldwide, $214)
• Nordisk Telemark 2.2 PU  (Denmark)

I have also happily cycled the length of England with a Tesco Value tent I rescued from the local household recycling centre, because remember:  you don’t actually need any of this fancy stuff .

Which tent(s) have you successfully used on tours or bikepacking trips? Let us know in the comments .

Bogged down in research for your next big bicycle adventure?

I wrote a whole book to help with that. How To Hit The Road is designed to be read at your leisure, making planning a bike tour simple and achievable, no matter the length, duration or budget. Available globally as an ebook or paperback.

Save or share this post:

• Share Copied to clipboard

Also relevant to this post:

• Terra Nova Starlite 2 Bikepacking Tunnel Tent: Long-Term Review & Photos
• What’s The Best Camping Stove For Cycle Touring Or Bikepacking?
• How To Custom Build The Ultimate Expedition Touring Bike (With Pictures)

Comments ( skip to respond )

139 responses to “what’s the best cycle touring & bikepacking tent (2024 edition)”.

Excellent review Tom.Some great guidance.I’ve used the hubba nx on the wild Atlantic way in Ireland & it was excellent in all areas as you’ve said. Recently I bought a Durston XMid 1 to go sun 1kg.It’s a lightweight backpacking tent & you would use your trekking poles normally to pitch it.As the hiking poles are awkward on the bike:) Dan also supplies ultralight poles to pitch it. I’ve used it recently in Kerry doing a few days & it’s very good.It’s 800g without poles & still below the 1kg with them.it’s pitches rapidly with four pegs & have double entry & big vestibules. It’s a quirky offset interior but there’s ample room in the one man. Just something different & quite good value if you’ve a buddy coming home from the states & you avoid the add ons,Ciaran

Thank you for this page (and the whole site).

I’ve got a Wild Country Helm 1 and Helm 3 for bike camping (depending on how many of us are going), but I’ve recently been thinking of the Hoolie 3 ETC or the Robens Pioneer 3EX or Voyager 3. The really large porches on both these seem to lend themselves to bike touring as they are big enough to put your bike and panniers in. Do you have any experience of these?

My wife and I have just completed our first bike packing trip with a 28 year old Terra Nova Trisar. The floor has had better days and the tape on the fly is just starting to leak but they make a great product. We have climbed the world in this from lightweight treks to perched on a bergschrund alpine climbing. Certainly a product to consider if you want quality

¡Hola¡ Ahora tengo 71 años y empecé mis aventuras hace siete años. La tienda que me compré fue una Nallo 4GT ¡Enorme! pero cada ciclista es un mundo. Lo máximo que he estado han sido 15 días, en Francia y en invierno (finales de noviembre principios de diciembre de Toulouse a Royan y vuelta). Cuando viajo sólo hago camping “salvaje” muchas veces. Mi esposa se ha apuntado y vamos los dos. Nuestro territorio es España, Alemania pero sobre todo Francia. Uso una tienda grande y cómoda porque al final del día (podemos llegar a hacer 70 km) deseamos descansar, cenar bien y dormir confortablemente y tranquilos. Hemos tenido vientos muy fuertes y la tienda no se ha inmutado, así como mas de seis horas de lluvia torrencial y no ha entrado nada de agua. Con temperaturas bajo cero, es interesante porque dentor de la tienda hay unos 5 grados mas que en el exterior. En verano es muy calurosa, pero solo la usamos del atardecer al amanecer. Ahora han empezado a fallar las cremalleras (punto débil de Hilleberg) y hemos comprado una Keron 4GT, (La espero en tres dias) a veces la Nallo en su parte baja tocaba el saco de dormir y se mojaba este. Al año hacemos unas siete salidas y recorremos vias verdes. Encantado de compartir nuestras experiencias

Have you taken a look at the Ventour Wisp? Interesting set up and less than 1kg.

Hey Tom, any thoughts on the Naturehike Cloud Up 2?

Hi Tom, year ago i saw a Lonely Planet book On cycling 9 or so European countries starting up in the Alps or Switzerland. I can’t find it at LP and twice I had it in my hand planning to buy it but finds we’re tight at the time Regards Simon

I also have a Lonely Planet guide to cycling France somewhere… I think it was last updated in 2009.

Hi again Tom. I’ve been reading your tent recommendations — useful thinking. 

I just want to share that over the past 5–10 years I’ve done a number of bike trips, and I normally just buy a cheap two-man tent from Tesco or an online retailer if my last tent is gone. Each costs around £20+ sterling and I often give them away to a local at the end of the trip. So far they’ve worked a treat and have more than once stood up to storms, hail, snow, etc. Like you say, you don’t always need expensive stuff. 

That said, always aim to be safe…

Thank you Ian! Those on a budget would do well to heed this advice. For what it’s worth, I also used a Tesco 2‑person tent on a tour (I bought it used from the local tip) and it worked perfectly well through a rainy English spring. That said, I wouldn’t rely on it for, say, a crossing of Patagonia… ?

HI All, Does anyone have any experience with Kammok hammock tents? Sunda 2.0 seems like a nice option, pricey imo. But is it worth the $?

Hi. Thanks for the advices. Cracking website. I’ve just discovered it. Very useful.

Depending when and where we cycle we use a tent or a tarp. We’ve been travelling by bike since 24/30 years.

Hilleberg’s Nallo 2 GT : Scotland, Denmark, Sweden, Netherlands, Baltic countries. For spring or summer 4 to 5 weeks trips. Great comfort and space. Bombproof. But heavy. And bulky.

Mountain Equipment AR UL 2 : France from late spring to early fall. 1 to 3 weeks trips. Very good tent. Pity ME does not produce tents anymore. Sturdy, reliable, compact, light. A bit stuffy inside : bags or paniers sleep out. We also use it for hiking trips.

DD Hammocks Superlight tarp 2.9 × 3 m : France. From late spring in the South, to early fall. We spent more than 2 weeks in French “Bretagne” under it and it was absolutely great, even under bad weather. Very large protection against rain. But not when humidity fell… We also used it during two weeks on the EV8 route along the Mediterranean coast. Brilliant. In fact, since I changed my old Scico paniers for Alpkit bags, I tend to take the lightest shelter as possible. Unfortunately, I’m not sure 😉 we’ll be able to travel in Scotland under a tarp in summer, and the ME is also a wee small for this rainy destination.

We’re using a Wild Country Hoolie 6 for cycle touring as a family of four. It ticked all our boxes — packs small enough to fit easily in our trailer, light enough (7kgs) has two sleeping areas, height to stand up, loads of storage space, space for the kids to bring a couple of friends, and roomy enough inside to contemplate sitting out bad weather for a few days, whilst being a pretty functional 3‑season tent. There were a couple of other tents on our wishlist which were either too expensive for us to contemplate, or simply unavailable when we needed to get our tent, but a couple of years on from purchase, we’re very happy so far with it.

Hi Tom, I really enjoyed the article and I too have spent many a comfortable, and uncomfortable, night in a MSR Hubba Hubba 2P. I picked it up secondhand 5 years ago and it has served me well (we’re even using it yesterday on Islay) but I now need a bit more waterproofing in my tent life. I do like the USA-style tents with high walls, roomy inner, 2 doors, etc and I’m leaning towards a brand-new MSR Hubba, a Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 or even a Sierra Designs Meteor 3000 which I’ve only just read about and has been tweaked with Northern European weather in mind! Also the SD is a bargain!! I spend 100+ nights a year under canvas, either backpacking or biketouring, and most of those are in the UK so waterproofing is essential and of course the ability to stand up in strong winds. Are there any others to consider in this category style?

You might try the REI Quarter Dome, or Hilleberg’s Allak (not the lightest)… but if you’re happy with the Hubba Hubba then why change it? 🙂

Banshee Update to comment posted on July 28, 2016! The seam sealant worked. Continued using the tent until 2019 when I bought a Vango Tempest as I needed to store muddy panniers inside a tent vestibule on campsites. As expected the Tempest is fine. Because of Covid my Tempest is trapped in Germany so I have got out the old Banshee to see if I can UK tour with it this summer. Put up in Garden for seveal days now to check it out and its still good! Groundsheet ants bite holes fixed with Gorilla Tape. Money saving tip if you want a footprint to put under your groundsheet. Use builders roofing under sheet cut to size its very tough light and thin — started doing this a few years ago. Most roofers have huge rolls of the stuff and can easily spare a couple of meters.

Thanks for the tip, Phil!

Anyone experience with wickiiup tipi tents?

Not personally. Anyone else?

Hi Tom! Thanks for this website and greetings from Finland. I would like to add the Norwegian Helsport Ringstind 1–2 to the premium ultralight category for solo riders. Used it last summer for my 6 week bike tour and even though it is not self-standing, it is quick to set up and as the inner tent can remain connected to the outer, everything will stay dry even if pitched in the rain (+ it has excellent ventilation). The vestibule is just big enough for two panniers + some other items. Footprint is sold separately. The tent is nice and long even for taller riders. I also bought the Helsport Bitihorn superlight tarp to extend the camp area in bad weather, as the tent is a bit too compact for anything other than sleeping.

Entire sleeping system under 4 pounds. If you want to go minimalist on weight but not sactifice comfort, there is the Nemo Ultralight 1p at 812g or 2p at 935g. Its made by a New Hampshire company (USA), very high quality, lifetime warranty. I use it for bike packing. Except for the light poles, the entire tent fills half of a 3.5 liter Salsa Everything Bag. I also use Sea to Summit Spark Ultralight sleeping bag (extra long) which can be packed in a second Salsa Everything Bag and still give room for sleeping pad. Usually I can carry tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, pillow and towel in two Salsa bags that weighs in at under 4 pounds. I stick the tent poles in the frame bag just under the top tube. https://www.nemoequipment.com/product/hornet-elite/ Keep on peddeling! Fred

Hi Tom Followed your recommendation on Bike choice and went to Richard at Oxford Bike Works and I love the bike he built for me. None of our three tents we use make your tent list though — 1) Vango Omega 350 — originally bought for weekend car camping but a great size for a group of 3 adults bike touring, relatively cheap and massive storage, 2) Nigor Great Auk 2 — enough height and space in porch for two adults to be able to sit in chairs (Helinox) and wait out foul weather, 3) MSR Hubba Tour2 — picked up for £260 this year — has masses of storage space for panniers etc and decent sleeping space for 2 adults. This years international touring scuppered, but enjoyed both the Nigor and MSR around East Anglia this year.

Likewise I am very pleased with my Oxford Bike Works bicycle. Re tents, your Nigor Great Auk 2 is an eye watering £800 and heavy at 3.5kg. I went for a Luxe Outdoor Peakarch TL-6350, less than half the price, and 1kg+ lighter. The MSR Hubba Tour2 looks like you got a bargain though.

Hi Allen What would you consider an adequate water column for a bike touring tent?

I almost decided to get a big agnes copper spur 3 for crossing Europe with my gf next near. However yesterday I saw it has a water column of just 1200, which seems awfully low to me, especially for the floor. (The other tent i looked at was Hilleberg Nammatj, but it costs twice as much, and interior space is a lot more limited.) 

Also thanks for all the amazing info on your website.

cheers Jake

As much of Europe is in the temperate zone and you’ll be camping mostly on soft, moist ground, I would go for a tent with a higher water column rating for the floor than the rainfly. For example, MSR’s Hubba range has the same 1200mm rainfly fabric as the Copper Spur, but uses 3000mm for the floor. Having said that, if you’ve found a good deal on the Copper Spur and you can buy (or make) an additional footprint/floor protector to go with it, then I am sure it will serve you well for a few weeks in Europe.

Hope that helps!

To clarify, the models in the second pic with a central ‘spine’. Thanks.

This is the Vaude Hogan UL, which is mentioned in the article.

Hello, what are the Kharki coloured tents in the article thumbnail pls.

this is great thanks. I’m trying to decide on an ultra light tent that I can use for hiking or off road bike packing. Solo use. I will bivy if weather good so looking for one that I could use in the winter too, or am I trying to tick too many boxes in one tent. I bought a second hand terra nova laser competition 1 first to check I’d definitely be doing this to warrant getting a new one. From that I’ve learnt it would be good to be able to sit up. What would you recommend?

Have a look at Decathlon tents, some are light weight and good price, also Naturhike Cloud up 2 or Mongar tents.

The Hilleberg Soulo is a very capable 1‑berth 4‑season tent, but it’s not ultralight. You might consider the 1‑berth MSR Hubba NX, which has lots of headroom, but isn’t ideal for winter, though you would no doubt manage with it.

You missed out on Hilleberg Niak! The perfect compromise on everything except perhaps price.

Hi Moa! Thank you very much for this recommendation. The Niak looks like a relatively new model for Hilleberg, so would you mind telling us a little more about your experiences using it for cycle touring and/or bikepacking?

Excellent article Tom.Ive used the Msr Zoid 1.5,now discontinued but a great tent.Hiking,bike packing, motorbike trips, concerts etc & it was a dinger.Its for one & a half people ie fits two but plenty of room for one.They pop up second hand & are very well made, so should be considered if we’ll minded.I now use the Hubba 1 & love it as an excellent all rounder.I was lucky to spot it second hand, but only pitched in the guys house, for 90€.I thought it might be a copy but it’s genuine.Moral of the story, I know buying used tents is risky but like the zoid I sold, which was fit for years more use & the hubba I bought, pre-loved can work too with a bit of research & luck, Ciarán.

Thanks, Ciarán! You’re right that if a tent has been lightly used and well looked-after, there’s no reason it shouldn’t be a second-hand option. Always best if you can inspect it in person, of course!

Used a Vango Mirage 200 for a while. good tent but with pannier bags inside it wasn’t too roomy. Opted for the Vango Mirage 300, plenty of room, decent porch and I can kneel up fully inside. The extra weight is worth the extra benefit. Lots of good tents out there.

You have a what? ‑_-

“On a bike tour, you have a vehicle to carry your gear, rather than shouldering the burden yourself.”

The vehicle is your bicycle!

I noticed I commented last years edition of this post too. What I failed to say is that sometimes it is also interesting to notice how the type of tent you are using affects the way you travel. I mean rather than choosing a tent by listing ones personal priorities.

On my first solo tours I had a small, lightweight and highly waterproof tent. I could camp pretty much anywhere. Later I travelled with a friend who had this old, leaky and heavy four person tent. They had used it on their annual weeks hike in Lapland for a decade or two. His dad had told him the basic rules on how and where to pitch the tent.

So what happened is we learned to read the map and really put effort on finding the perfect spot. So if there is no lake, sea shore or riverside views, maybe there is is a spectacular hill top somewhere… And I dont think I would have found it using an ultralight one person sleep anywhere camo setup. Because I’m lazy and I dont have to.

Besides: a spacious four kilo tent with two large entrances only makes two kilos per person. The modern one person tents are sometimes more about individualism than actually keeping things lightweight.

Good luck on your trips! We are planning on doing a guidebook/map for bike touring in some close to Finland parts of Russia. That is if the funding works out…

Really useful article, thanks. I’ve been using a Big Agnes Seedhouse SL1 for about 5 years in all weathers, and it’s been great as a bikepacking tent. Now that I’m getting a bit long in the tooth, and less bendy, I’m thinking of upping size to a 2‑berth tent and the Copper Spur HV or Fly Creek HV are both looking like good options. Interesting to see Big Agnes has now got bikepacking specific versions (shorter poles and a few other features) — clearly a commercially viable niche these days!

hello Tom , is there a 4 seasons ticking all the boxes for cycling around the planet like the ‘hubba hubba nx’ 3 seasons does, considering you d have to camp in some colder areas .. like the MSR Access 2 maybe ? .. cheers and thanks for sharing !

Hi Tom, Thanks for all the info particularly keeping things up to date! I’m heading off for my first big cycle tour next week (solo around Europe) and after a lot of debate between taking my brothers ancient Eurohike 201 or whether to invest in something a bit lighter and better designed I have gone for the MSR Hubba Hubba NX2 . . big money for me but I’m very excited!

Hi Tom I’m using the MSR Hubba Hubba 2 persons for the last 6 years trips in south Australi Tasmania and Asia, it is good , little bit heavy, unfortunately somebody stepped on the poles last trip and 3 of ther were broken, do you know where I can get replacement

Have you tried an official MSR dealer locally?

I used the Big Agnes Spur 3man tent on my tandem cycling tour in southern Germany with my 8 year son July 2018. I was disappointed. I’ve also used it on a 5 day hike with my son (6) 2017 in April. 

Very easy to put up, freestanding and light and nice shape and room. But so not suitable to rain. Yes you stay dry, but it’s soggy fly cover is not good getting in and out of and with only single mesh walls cold. I didn’t take the tent liner and I should have. The tent floor is far too light for not having extra protection. Which definitely defeats to lightness. Even as a hiking tent, we hit rain and the tent requires extra effort to keep the fly away from the mesh inner to prevent dampness on your tent. This wasn’t so easy in sand and the fly needs to fit over the tent frame perfectly to be able to pull it away. I found in wet (hot/tropical) weather the tent you had to fiddle a bit with it. 

Further for a basic tour I also have two bike tube patches on the fly and on on the innner mesh. It is so light that it’s easy damaged. And it’s it’s own system of venting that mostly damaged it. The fly vents have a firm 10cm long “post” that keeps the vent open, but went you fold pack the tent you have to make sure you have these (2) horizontal to your tent roll otherwise they dig into the tent fabric. This is a pain to do. 

I guess too I was used to the toughness of the Macpac Apollo (no longer around). Yes super heavy at 3kg but that tent was amazing. Bought in 2006 and only just retired it for the Big Agnes. I’m glad to see it’s not on the top list of tents on this blog. 

Though you can tell I’m having to get a new Tent. I’m Australian so need a tent that is good for hot weather also.

Cracking article as ever, thanks for the in depth reviews.

I was wondering if you’d thought about the Mont Moondance 2? It’s only available in Aus but not too expensive to ship to the UK https://www.mont.com.au/moondance-2-tent-bracken

I’m deciding between that and the MSR Hubba NX2 to tackle Central and Southern America over a few years. To me the Mont Moondance appears to match up pretty well and has the added benefit of having 2 entrances, which I’m sure will allow a much appreciated through breeze when in hotter climates.

Would be interested to hear your thoughts and any pros/cons.

If I’m honest, at first glance this tent looks like a more or less straight copy of the MSR. Even the company logo looks like a close imitation!

The 2‑berth Hubba Hubba also has two entrances, by the way…

‘Nice article. Well-written, informative, honest–even “revealing.” LOL ‘Nice photographs, too!!

And not LITTERED with ads. Granted, you have links–but they can be quite useful. 

‘Read another review of tents just before this one and there was ad after ad after ad after ad. I wrote to them, pointing out that they perhaps HAD a lot of experience, and things to say, but … geez. If you’re going to review tents, review tents–right? And as I was composing my unsolicited comment, immediately to the right on the page was an ad for HOTHOUSES! What the heck!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! LOL

Anyway, ‘very informative article. Thank you!!! ~ Michael Morelia, Mexico Whidbey Island, WA Cajamarca, Peru

Thanks Michael. This blog has been ad-free for 12 years and counting. Glad you appreciate it 🙂

I’m soon to hit the big ol’ world for the first time on a bike! I have the Vango Banshee Pro 300 just for me as it’s spacey and allows me to sit up with clearance—I’m 6′1″. (The space is superb if I’m going to be staying for a while). The only issue worth a mention is that it’s not freestanding ie. it requires both ends to be tethered, (not good for camping inside a buddhist monastery Tom!). Other than that, it’s well-vented and a top quality tent for the price.

On a recent tour whilst using the Wild Country by Terra Nova Zepheros 1 and feeling claustrophobic in the extreme I met a guy using the Nigor Wickiup 3 with a half inner, what impressed me most about it was the sheer volume of living space, ease of setup & ventilation! So much so that I bought the tent myself, it’s a great tent, not free standing but otherwise, everything I need for a bike packing/touring tent, lightweight & weatherproof, great ventilation and so much livable space, especially for a longer tour. I use it with a lightweight groundsheet/footprint. https://www.tgomagazine.co.uk/gear-editors-column/nigor-half-size-innertent-wickiup‑3/

So many suggestions yet no mention of QUECHUA Quickhiker Ultralight from Decathlon :/

It’s very affordable (£110) and lighter (under 2kg) then pretty much anything mentioned here. It also has very favorable reviews (4.6/5) as of this writing.

Thanks Danny – I’ll include it in the next update!

Ayy, nice — thanks for responding Tom!

Interesting read, I have a tour (my first!) Planned this summer with my dad in France, contrary to this list we’ve gone with Robens challenger 2 tents, which come with their own dry bags!

I used to hike with a MountainHardwear light tent (the model doesn’t exist anymore)for 2 persons which weight is about 2 kg but recently bought a minima sl 1 from camp.usa https://www.camp-usa.com/outdoor/product/essential-equipment/minima-1-sl-tent/

Very happy with it and especially when packed. It’s a really small bag and its total weight is 1 kg.

I too prefer a smaller, solo tent, and I am surprised that the one I have been using for several years now never seems to get recognition. The Eureka Spitfire 1 weighs in at just over 3lbs, sets up and tears down quickly, is easy to get in and out of, has great ventilation, and offers a surprising amount of room… It’s unusual shape allows me (I am 6′5″) to stretch out for sleep–with room to store items above, below, and on both sides of me–and it affords ample space to sit up to get dressed in the morning. I have a brief review and picture of it on Amazon.com: Eureka Spitfire 1 Tent https://www.amazon.com/dp/B00SZ0ZLME/ref=cm_sw_r_cp_apa_JXiWAbF3J52Q4

Check out Naturehike tents. Great value for money. Quality products. Tom, keep up the good work.✌?

Cheers Adam!

A key factor for me in choosing a tent was that the outer tent went up first, so doesn’t get the inner tent wet if you have to pitch in the rain, and can act as a shelter until the end if you have to pack up in the rain. This Luxe tent is the tent I use; it weighs 2kg, has a single pole and has lots of inside space. http://www.luxeoutdoor.com/eng/catalog-topic-gallery-view1.asp?id=1405&selfpath=/173

Thanks Mike! Hope you’re doing well!

I’ve used the Luxe Mini Peak II for several years. http://www.luxeoutdoor.com/eng/catalog-topic-gallery-view1.asp?id=1388&selfpath=/173 Weighs in at 1.6kg plus pole. I like it because - 1. Very light and packs down. 2. Tons of interior space for storage. 3. Lost of ventilation. This is important here in Australia where you are more likely to have hot weather. 4. Like Mike says it is useful to be able to put the outer up first. The tent goes up fast.

My touring is for 1 — 2 weeks at a time. I mainly stay in campgrounds. I would not be able to comment on possible expedition use. The tent is pegged out, not freestanding. I’ve been able to use it with 2 people by getting an additional inner. I’ve always used it with a tarp or other groundsheet.

I’d recommend buying a tent with two entrances for better views. A two person ten for solo rider and a four person tent for two or for the family. I know most people prefer green but I’ve noticed that a bright colour like orange works just as well. Enjoy your trip!

Hi Tom, great article and perfect timing for me personally. The suggestions and endorsements from readers have led to a dozen open tabs in seconds. Just throwing into the mix the Yellowstone Matterhorn 1 (1.5kg) very cheap, it cost me £30 and it served me well, if a little bit too small for my height, and used it across Europe and Scandinavia a couple of years ago.

A good piece, Tom! A bike touring tent is a really personal purchase which, like bikes, I think people tend to buy with undue haste when starting out, before working through what they need it to do for them.

A thought or two on tents for larger groups — specifically those with children!

In groups of multiple adults, more than two in a tent and you’re best off having multiple tents of that size. It’s inefficient to do otherwise, but with children you have very little choice but to go big.

We used the Vango Ark 400 when the children were smaller; this was a good price but the fly never quite seemed to be the same shape as the inner, and relied on the roominess of our child trailer to transport it. The cube, more so than the weight, became an issue, although it was no lightweight.

To say that “Terra Nova don’t feel the need to change the design of or discontinue perfectly good tents at random” isn’t *quite* true when it comes to bigger tents, because the Laser Space 5 which we use, had a frightfully short life. Sadly, I fear that critical mass for an ultra-light five berth tent simply doesn’t exist. The similarly shaped 4 berth version remains in the Wild Country range but is heavier and has two of the two-berth inners, rather than a three and a two.

We spent over a year trying to track a Laser Space 5 down, having been royally done over by a retailer during the clearance sale, but got lucky in the end. We can now get all five of us, and all our bikes and panniers at a push, under cover in a space most of us can stand up in — and pack the tent away into a single Ortlieb Sportpacker, excluding the poles. We use the Wild Country footprint and carry a tarp for the bikes in a second pannier, with space left in the top of both, and it all fits on the rack of a 20” wheeled trailerbike. There’s a few pictures of it in action, here: http://www.familybycycle.uk/2017/08/vatersay-barrabados.html

The downsides? Frontal area, and the consequential strain on guys in strong winds necessitating some meaty pegs for insurance, and a distinct lack of stealth — but if you have children you’re unlikely to be banking on that anyway 😉

There is a distinct shortage of choice for families looking for a seriously lightweight tent, and it’s a real shame that, expensive as it was, the Laser Space 5 has been discontinued. We know a family who actually make their own tents for touring — and we nearly did the same!

Good to hear someone else also using a Laser Space 5. We (2 adults + 3 kids) are not long back from a cycle tour of Burgundy where it again served us well.

I found out that Naturehike, a Chinese brand that you’ll find on Aliexpress as well as sometimes Amazon, kind of replicates the style of the MSR Hubba Hubba (my very first tent!) as it used to be with their so called Mongar. And the price is divided by three. Something to investigate for the newcomers, I guess.

Thanks Michael – several people mentioned that on Twitter recently when I put out a call for recommendations.

Thumbs up for the Nature Hike. Did a tour around the outer Hebrides last year, had everything from torrential rain to snow and gales. Never missed a beat and stayed dry. Well impressed for the money

Which Naturehike tent did you use exactly for your Hebrides trip? Was it Mongar?

great list! On our biketrip from Austria to Australia we also used the 1‑person MSR Hubba NX each. Great tent. I was satisfied with it during our whole journey of 11 months.

I’ve used a Hillberg Akto for several years whilst cycling & hill walking. It’s absolutely bomb proof & easy to put up that I find is great when conditions are bad & you need to get your tent up quickly. My version is quite old now as I inherited it from s friend when he bought a new tent. The only downside is it’s size & weight when compared to modern compact & lightweight tents on the market. But the benefits hugely outweigh these downsides. Great article as always from Tom, my go to site on bikes & bike equipment.

How much time did you spend in your tent on your janapar expedition? How important is Living space on such a long journey?

I am setting off soon for a few years and can’t decide on how big a tent I want.

As a beginner I found having a bit of living space was nice in the long run. A 2‑berth tent suited me fine. Nowadays I’m happy with a 1‑berth tent or just bivvying without a tent at all, but it took a few years to get to that point.

Great reviews thanks. I have used my Vango Blade 2 a few times. Long metal pole front to back. Loads of room for one with panniers. Inner up first but I have no experience otherwise. As someone else commented, their is not a lot of room between the inner and outer, and I too dislike the awkwardness of the pole even though you can unzip to go past it left or right. Did the job but had to be a strap-on-top of panniers job partly due to poles. Gelert solo tents are rare as hens’ teeth. The Banshee 200 is looking good to me!

The Solo one is sometimes sold under the Highlander brand. I also highly recommend the Wild Country Zephyros 1 (a 1.4kg Hilleburg Atko copy for <£100) and my fave, the Wild Country Aspect one for a good spacious 1 man 1.9kg tent.

Hello Tom, thank you for the guide and recommendations! We (my boyfriend and I) are setting off to Australia from Barcelona in December, going through the Balcans, Turkey, Iran, China, Thailand etc and would like to know what your opinion is on the MSR Hubba Hubba nx3? We are planning to camp all the way, although not sure if it will be ok in SE Asia yet but anyway.. Would this tent be good in case of cold nights and also good for hot climates? By they way I would like to comment on the Vango Banshee 300. We used this tent on our tour from Edinburgh to Barcelona(Via Holland, Belgium, France) and unfortunately after a month the tent poles started to crack. We did tape them along the way but it was really frustrating to set the tent up in a decent shape. Also the button to hold the tent doors rolled up came off pretty soon but we stitch that with no problems afterwards. The waterproof of the tent is very very good luckily! Also shape and color are great. This is our feedback so we wouldn’t rely on it for a long term use. I’m sure for short trips is great, or maybe we have just been unlucky.

The Hubba range is very good all-round. If there’s two of you I’d definitely look at the Mutha Hubba (3‑berth) – I’ve been using it with my other half since 2010 and we really appreciate a little extra space to unpack and make it more homely. I’ve heard only good reports about the updated NX version of the tents. HTH!

I have a vaude hogan ultra light. Its great for wild camping very quick to set up . Cycled cape york in Australia and could not leave the tent up in the the afternoon sun the poles break from the heat and the tension on the two shorter ons. Back in NZ the repaired them. Then i cycled from the Netherlands to Indonesia bringing repair kit for tent plus spare parts of pole plus sleeves. The poles are just to light or thin. Have to look ad something els #(:

Hi, i have been using a banshee 200 for the last 3 years as a one person tent. Bought on price match from Go-outdoors. Original one a seam on the inner parted on first outing & shop replaced (was not actually a big problem) since then i have used the tent for well over 100 nights in Scotland, England, Germany & a trip all the way down the Rhine. Seen some real bad all season weather & its held up & stayed dry. It has been a good performer & is very well suited to wild camping especially if you leave the panniers on the bike & use a cheap plastic groundsheet as a footprint. Now has a very minor seam leak — I have internet ordered some sealant that i hope will sort this out. For the price it is excellent value if I throw it away & buy another one tomorrow I will still have spent less money than on some other tents & also will have worried less about how much i spent on kit. I am sure there are other good there but the banshee is a very good low cost buy. It is not free standing but i see very few situations were I need this.

HiI, we did our first cycle tour in 1992 through Europe and used a Vaude three person tent. It weighed about 2.8kg. I still have it and still use it .I have had the seams resealed by a parachute maker here in Australia and have found its internal inner hanging system unbelievable. The best tent I have ever used for hiking or biking

Hi tom, great website, rich with relevant information. I begin a transcontinental tour from Alaska in June. I am using the hilleberg Allak. It’s a roomy 2 man tent at 5 lbs and looks solid. Do you have any record of experiences with it? I tested it in the Himalayas in snow and at ‑15 c. It was really comfortable. The zips worry me though.

Hi Tom, my favourite is the Hilleberg Soulo. I am using it now for an entire year and never had any problems with it. It has the perfect size, easy to pitch and enough space for all panniers. I am 172cm. Yes it is expensive but no regrets — I love it. Greetings Heike

Heike, saw your blog a while ago and wondered what your tent was, now i know! safe travelling!

I’ve got the Terra Nova Voyager too, it’s a great tent for bike camping tours. I bought it after following a discussion thread on http://www.livinghistory.co.uk/forums/viewtopic.php?f=10&t=36510 about what tents to buy. Made a great choice, if anyone else is looking then this comes recommended. One of my buddie has the Hilleberg Nallo and he’s pleased with that so also worth considering.

The Gelert Solo tent is available in Europe under the name Highlander Blackthorn 1 for about €40 from Amazon. Mine will be here in a few days. Thanks for the great post!

Thanks for the tip, John. Here’s the link to the tent on Amazon UK.

Terra Nova Photon Laser Elite on a 72 day tour round France plus a tour of Northern Spain. Very light at under a kilo and compact for sticking in a pannier bag. Like others I’m very unimpressed by TNs non response to an email I sent seeking advice on a repair issue. The tent served me well . For me weight is an issue especially in hilly regions.

Yes – Terra Nova haven’t responded to any of the emails I’ve sent them over the years with various enquiries. Seems they make good tents but aren’t particularly interested in the people who buy them…

I am a big fan of the good old tarp. I have a 10x12 Cuben fiber tarp that weighs around 16oz. TONS of room and more airy and roomy.

I’m probably not going with a tarp, although it recommended by many experienced light-weight affiicionados. But I am curious: What is your preferred method for setting it up, and what to you do about mosquitoes? Thanks.

Stumbled on the website, great article. 

Is use the terra nova tourer deluxe for touring. Comes in at around 2.5kg and is a massive 2 man tent, with a porch area. It’s an excellent tent, but too big for single expeditions. 

For solo efforts I have reverted to the terra nova Jupiter bivvy and a tarp. This is a new set up, so it will take me a bit of time to fully appreciate it.

I v got the Coleman Celsius Compact. Fantastic simplicity, One entrance, on the long side, and easy in and out. Very good ventilation, accessable from inside, and the colour is a decent brown and green. Freestanding , a must I think.

I’m using this one Tramp Sputnik (around 1 kilogram)

Definitely not the best choice: in a one layer tent all things are wet after the night.

I travel with success with Topeak BikCamper, 3 seasons only I would say not really suitable for winter. 

http://www.topeak.com/products/bike-tent/bikamper

I have had this tent the terra nova voyager for just under a year now mostly took out out in fair weather I decided to camp on top of Pen-y-fan 11/04/15 the wind condition’s were moderate to strong at the time’s but with this being rated a 4 season tent I was confident it would withstand the weather being thrown at it , but boy was I wrong the arch pole over the door kept being blown back onto the tent and me inside all night despite being pitched correctly the result in the morning was a broken pole and where the red pole sit’s over the two blue horizontal poles it had rubbed holes in both pole sleeves and the stitching inside was tearing through the inner tent where the pole sleeves attach, now I cannot insert the poles through the sleeves without them coming through the holes . I contacted terra nova about this they were useless after many emails and pictures of the damage were sent I had to send it off to them, 2 weeks for them to look at it and after they make a dissension another 2–3 weeks for them to repair it at my expense when it is clearly a design fault as there is no reinforcement protection where the poles overlap on the front of the tent but there is protection on the rear. Truly disappointed in there poor customer service I expected more form a British company I have lost faith in there product’s and will buy a Hilleberg for a better experience .

Superb article Tom , I use a Force Ten , Argon 200 for my present tour. Very lightweight and spacious, good in the wind too !

During summers 2013, I attended my first cycling tour, and guess what; I changed three tents in just 24 days. It was my first trip I had no idea and just fell for reviews. But, I have to admit that the search ended with TLDR. It’s a genuine dome that is durable and waterproof and it’s very light. Even a couple of hundred grams weighs more when you are on a one month hiking and camping trip.

What is TLDR ?

TLDR: too long; didn’t read

thank you !

Have been n the road for more than 2 and a half years now (so far have cycled Norway to Taiwan). We’re using the Hilleburg Nallo 3 GT which we highly recommend for couples on long-time cycling trips. It’s not perfect but having slept in it on this journey for more than 500 nights including in Mongolia, China, Pamir Highway we really can’t complain about it. In seriously high winds and prolonged rain it’s been fine. Yes, it’s expensive but on this journey it’s our home. I think there are few tents out there that would be so reliable over such a long time period. However, if your trip is just for a few months then it’s probably not worth forking out so much. http://www.slothsonwheels.blogspot.com

I am a huge fan of my Terra Nova Solar, which has travelled the world with me over the years, on the back of my motorbike and bicycle.A bit pricey but well made, its a roomy one person tent ( you can store your panniers inside), or a cosy 2 person tent with your luggage in the porch.

Damned cool, inspiring site, by the way. A friend just introduced me to it last night.

Have you tried or even heard of the Black Diamond Mega Mid Lite? It’s a HUGE 4‑person, center pole tent made of parachute material, so it stuffs down to about the size of a softball on steroids. Probably weighs about 2 and a half pounds. It has no floor, so not great in areas with snakes and creepy crawly things. If it is set up really taut, it sheds water well. I’ve used it in winter conditions and actually even built a small fire inside. It stand probably 5 and a half feet, so you can sort of stand up to pull on your pants. If creepy-crawlies are an issue — and most of my camping and touring is in the desert southwest of the U.S. where ants, spiders, scorpions and an occasional snake are issues — you can purchase the Bug Mid which is netting and integrated floor. The Mega Mid then just drapes over that. Total weight with floor and tent is 5 pounds, 10 ounces. The tent has a HUGE front opening that really lets the outdoors in. If you go with the no floor version, the tent pulls down to within about 3 inches of the ground. I don’t know why, but in my experience with this tent, mosquitoes never, ever fly in under the tent walls. I’m old and travel with a light weight backpacking chair which I can easily set up inside the tent. Personally I think that this is the best all round tent for most applications.

What I’ve seen so far looks very inspiring, have purchased the E‑book and look forward to reading it. Keep up the great work and stay safe.

Great article: looking at several of the cheaper tents now. I am doing a bike trip around Europe and want the best bang for my buck. Doesn’t everyone?

I use a very cheap gelert scout, 1,750 Kg, for 2people, but better for just one. Is goof for summer, letting the door open a little. With cold weather some moisture in the morning, never used in stormy weather or very fast wind. Very good for £ 15, but not for every kind of journey

Used the Wild Country Zephyros 1 last May for a east coast ride of 4 days, very light & plenty of room for panniers. A really great tent.

Backpacking Light Uk sell a budget version of the Hubba Hubba called the Luxe Habitat — not tried it myself but it looks pretty good — pitching video here https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TAn967N5reA&list=UUGdXKgAS4MDFHO-O71E8C9g

Personnally I think the Micra by Salewa is impressive. Freestanding! Sturdy! small footprint! Steep walls! Green ( the older models are darkgreen.. ) Inner only possiblity! Some people might argue that 2.3 kg is too heavy, But I think, if you ’ re cycling it is not extreme, for one kilo less you might find something that is very flimsy ” fashion before function”. I like to think that you get a lot more Reliablity for the extra 500 gram.

I’ve just bought a 2pax, forest-green MSR HubbaHubba HP. I believe this particular range has been discontinued but I was lucky enough to come across one in a store here in Dublin, Éire. The name of the store is Great Outdoors, the tent cost e499.00, they ship internationally, and I think they have a couple left. I believe the footprint will be an extra e50 when they get them in next January. Happy hunting.

The Hubba HP range is still shipping in Europe, AFAIK. I’d cut a cheap plastic tarp to size rather than waste money on an expensive footprint…

There are a few similar models

The ‘Blow ‘by Hannah, a czech company The ‘Tordis’ by Ford Nansen, a polish company.

Nice green colours too, better then the Hubba, a bit too light. IMHO!

Excellent idea. Must give that a try.

Have finally managed to try out our Dragonfly 3XT with my husband. We really like the quick pitch and robust shape. Lots of room for storing panniers in the porch area, and plenty long enough for a tall man in the tent. For solo touring my husband tends to take a Quecha 2 man, much cheaper though not such a strong tent.

I use a Quechua Arpanaz 2 Fresh&Black — it’s shiny white on the outside, so no under the radar wild camping, but i love my sleep even on tour and enjoy the dark and cool inner. I replaced the fiber glass tent poles with aluminium, which brought weight and size down: less than 2kg, 38x13cm — for less than 100€ (45 tent, 20 aluminium tent poles, 10€ for repair tubes to reinforce the pole ends).

I’ve a somewhat spacious Vango Tempest 300 which is technically a 3 person tent but the pack size is a reasonable 46x16cm and 3.35kg and that fits in a pannier. It’s a bit big for solo use though you can get all your bags inside and if you remove the wheels, your bike even fits in the porch.

Having just carted it around the Pennines for the best part of a week though, I’m tempted with the smaller Zenith 100 or Blade 100, halving the weight and reducing the pack size (Zenith is 35x13!).

The Gelert Solo might have been possibly discontinued but there seems to be a few clones of it about on Amazon such as ‘Highlander Blackthorn 1’ and ‘Charlies Outdoor Leisure Beris 1 Man Camping Tent’ for sub 30 quid. I’d rather have a bit more space, especially for stashing away kit, so your panniers don’t go walkies in the night.

I picked up a Blade 100 for about £50 after a price match+discount in April and used it for a 23 day tour through France & Spain. It’s quite roomy for a 1 person tent but don’t pack it too full as the gap between the inner and fly isn’t great. You can get your pannier bags inside alongside your sleeping bag and 1 or 2 in the porch. 

The single pole gets in the way a bit at the door and if your pitch isn’t perfect bends into an S. It’s inner first which some people dislike (I don’t mind). But, another good cheap, light (1.75kg) tent from Vango.

Good to know about the Vango Blade 100 – thanks Shaun!

Can I just cast another vote for the humble, inexpensive and very compact Gelert Solo. But I’d like to make it clear to all — you won’t be holding a disco or having your mates round for a brew. It’s a low, narrow sleeping space .…… Which is all I personally feel I need on bike trips. Getting dressed inside requires agility, organisation and telescopic legs would be an advantage. Brilliant value though, and tucks away small. Perfectly good waterproofing too.

Having used the banshee 200 over the past few years and find this is more a 1 man tent with a bit of added room, used in all weathers have found it to be a fantastic tent, during the summer I generally take a bivy bag for short 1 / 2 night’s even if a spot of rain is expected, makes it easier for wild camping.

Another thumbs up for the Gelert Solo. Used it mainly for lightweight “bike-packing” and 1.5kg weight and squat pack size make it perfect. For longer tours, I highly recommend the “Wild Country Aspect 1” . It’s a pitch with outer, two hoop tunell tent at 1.9kg. It’s quite tall (but very stable), and makes for an “airy” camp if sitting down, plenty of headroom for moving about. The USP clincher for me is that the whole side zips open, and you can attach to nearby bike for a tarp-like big awning for cooking, lazing about. Also sleeping with the side open gives a nice panoramic view through the upper mesh of the side. Being Wild Country (a branch of Terra Nova), the quality is exceptional, and all for about £90 or less if you shop about. Can’t fault it, and for me the perfect solo touring tent. Think they are discontinuing them soon (and can’t find anything similar), so snap any residual stock for a bargain.

Got to be freestanding! I have a Coleman Boa, freestanding and long with 233 cm inner.. I remember once I put it up on a concrete surface under a roof near a footballfield in France. It was raining very, very hard. It was great to find this spot and then just put it up there. This could not have worked with a non freestanding tent. I like tents, I tried a hammock as well , nice, but only if the weather is good. Reason I like a tent is spiders, snakes and dogs. And musquitoes of course!

Very happy to recommend the Tarptent Scarp 1 . Kept me very comfortable for 15 months across Asia. It’s amazingly spacious for a one man with two porches and lofty head room (even for me at 6′ 2″ and a bit). Goes up in a flash, pitches taught, you can choose a mesh or solid inner and it all weighs just 1.35kg. Seems to balance quality, space and weight perfectly and what’s more you don’t have to take out a mortgage to get one.

I’ve just found this website and I am glued to it! A lot of what it have read so far, and the ‘just do it’ attitude is truly inspiring. Most of what I have read online seems to involve a lot of overthinking and overanalysing so this approach is extremely refreshing. Keep up the good work.

Everyone knows your confessed love for the discontinued Hubba Hubba, but you used the 1 man version for your American trip right — so why do you recommend the bigger/heavier version? 

I’ve just got a Seedhouse SL1 for £100, cheap price but it doesn’t have the split pole design of the SL2 (or indeed the Hubba range). So it’s freestanding ability is a little flawed.

These aren’t personal recommendations, they’re my interpretations of the results of an extensive survey. Most solo tourers seem to prefer 2‑person tents for the extra living space. Personally, I’m happy with a minimal 1‑person tent nowadays, but that’s just my preference.

Love my Big Agnes Seedhouse SL1. Has coped with some “character building” weather so far despite only being a 3 season tent, packs down nice’n’small and is a smidge over a kilo (some stripped down variations go lighter). Not sure what you mean by no ‘split pole’ — d’you mean the sort of Y‑shape arrangement? If so, mine does have that, perhaps there are older versions which don’t?

I have spent years in my Nallo 3Gt and I’ll likely have it on my rear rack the next time I hit the open road for an extended period of time; however, I have recently switched over to a bivy sack for overnight to weeklong trips. Its the best way to set up and take down camp in a hurry, which is essential when free camping where maybe you shouldn’t be!

Yes, agreed. Plus, being inside a tent is often quite rubbish!

Nice compilation Tom! I would vote for the Gelert Solo actually. I have been looking around for an affordable lightweight tent before hitting the road for a month and have been quite happy with the choice. I didn’t encounter any harsh conditions though, but it seems to be a fairly durable tent indeed.

I just picked up a Hilleberg Unna — will be testing on my next trip.

I used the Terra Nova Voyager XL 2 on a recent tour of Europe. It lasted about a week and the tents poles broke in a mild storm. Customer service didnt answer my emails, and I thought the service was shocking. It’s a shame because it seems they make really good tents, but I got a duff one. That is when customer service is important. Sadly they are infamous for poor service. Ended up buying a generic tent for a quarter of the price and it served me well.

That’s a shame, as the tent itself comes highly recommended.

MacPac Minaret. We did tones of bike touring with it and it was fantastic. The last one held well for 12 years now we’ve got a new one!

Thanks — this was a common recommendation from couples in NZ and Oz, as well as their Citadel .

Try the Macpac microlight as well. Just finished a couple of weeks round inner Hebrides. Mixture of sun and storms. Didn’t leak a drop. Great gear.

I have both a Macpac Mineret and a Tarptent DW moment. I love both of them. The Mineret is perfect for two, and sometimes I take it on solo tours, but at 3.2kg (15 years old and still bomb proof), it borders on extravagant. The tarptent, is half the weight, and super simple to put up, freestanding, and brilliantly ventilated. But I’m not sold on the tricky sideways entry in pouring rain, and the small head space when lying down (I am 6′3″). So I think my dream tent would be a blend of the two. Mineret for the front entry, Tarptent internal battens in a triangle on the back end. Of course there is also the Tarptent double-moment (slightly bigger), if I had to chose just one more tent, that would be it.

Something to add? Cancel reply

• Travel Gear

Bicycle Touring Tents: Everything You Need To Know

Tents are my home away from home. They are my space to take a well-deserved break and relax after a long day in the saddle.

Having spent hundreds, if not thousands of nights under sheets of expensive, lightweight, waterproof nylon – this is what I know about bicycle touring tents.

Tent Classification

In this article I will reference three different types of tent:

Ultralight: This type of tent favours weight over all other factors. Ultralight tents are great for short trips in good conditions – so don’t expect them to last a long time or be brilliant in wet and windy conditions. A typical problem with ultralight tents is broken poles, so always carry a splint. Typical weight: 800-2000g.

Backpacking: These mid-weight tents pick up some of the key durability features of 4-season tents and place them in a lighter weight and better ventilating package. Backpacking tents are often great for the average bicycle tour, or for longer journeys in warmer climates. Typical weight: 1500-2800g.

4-season: These tents tend to be most suitable for cool-mid climates and adverse weather conditions. If you’re planning on hitting sub-zero temperatures, snow and strong winds – this is what will work best. 4-season tents are often great for six-month or longer bicycle trips because of how durable they are. Typical weight: 2500-4000g.

Horses for Courses

Ok, so there is no best tent; different tents are better in certain situations.

Most of the time, you’ll need to strike a balance between weight (ultralight tents) and durability (4-season tents). With durability also comes better performance in the wind, tougher, more waterproof floors, and additional insulation properties in cooler climates.

High-quality 4-season tents tend to be expensive, twice the pack weight/size of an ultralight equivalent and perform poorly in warmer climates where heavier fabrics (and reduced mesh) limit the tents ability to ventilate well.

In summary, look for a tent that will suit both the climates you intend to travel through, the types of places you will camp and the number of times you’ll need to use it.

Freestanding vs Tunnel Tents

A great way to reduce your options is to decide whether you’re after a tunnel or freestanding tent.

Why should you buy a tunnel tent? – Tunnel tents are undoubtedly better in the wind at any given weight (eg. a 2kg freestanding tent vs 2kg tunnel tent). – The vestibules are often large and great for entertaining/cooking under. – They’re easy to set up (especially in the wind).

Why should you NOT buy a tunnel tent? – Tunnel tents rely on being staked out, limiting where you can set them up. – They’re 20-40% longer in length (bigger footprint) than a dome tent for the same inner size, again limiting where you can set them up. – Not as good at supporting snow on their roof. – They’re most of the time single entrance. – They have a lower, sloping roof; two people sometimes can’t sit up at once, or at all. – Poorer ventilation than most freestanding tents, especially if your gear is stored in the front and rear.

Why should you buy a freestanding tent? – They stand without staking, allowing you to pitch them anywhere. – You can easily pitch just the inner. – Two entrances is common. – They often have great ventilation. – You can pick up the tent, move it, shake it out, clean it etc – The roof can often withstand snow. – They’re more spacious internally (eg. headroom).

Why should you NOT buy a freestanding tent? – Not as good in the wind as a tunnel tent – you’ll need a comparably heavy freestanding tent to do well in adverse conditions.

My take:  I cannot imagine travelling with a tunnel tent because I sleep on many surfaces which will not allow pegging – such as a concrete pier or basketball court. Heavy objects can be laid out to hold up a tunnel tent, but I prefer to pop up my freestanding tent anywhere without hassle.

Tents suitable for bike touring can be as lights as 800g or as heavy as 4000g. When comparing similarly priced products, the weight of a tent is often a good indicator as to how durable it will be.

Heavier 4-season tents employ more poles (that are reinforced) and thicker materials for the fly and inner. As a result, you will probably find a 4-season tent that lasts longer than an ultralight.

Size (1, 2 or 3-Person?)

What size tent is best for bicycle touring? It depends on how long you’re on the road.

On shorter tours (less than six weeks), you’ll be fine with a tent designed for the number of people you’re travelling with (eg. a solo traveller in a 1-person tent, or a couple in a 2-person tent).

On longer tours (more than six weeks) it’s worth getting a tent with a bit more space (eg. a couple in a 3-person tent). The space is nice; I can even fit all of my bags inside my 3-person tent inner with another person, giving me quick access to everything I carry.

If you will be camping in adverse weather conditions, you may want to consider a tent with large, usable vestibules (or a gear shed). They are great for entertaining, cooking, cleaning or repairing your bike in the rain.

Most freestanding ‘dome’ tent vestibules are actually pretty useless when it comes to their space being usable – tunnel tents with a gear shed are much better. If all you need is to store your bags, dome tents will of course be fine.

I’ve found that floors are one of the most important features of a tent in wet weather conditions. This is because the pressure applied from your body weight and bags is enough to force groundwater through the floor of most tents with a 5000mm (or less) Waterhead rating.

This is a common problem when you camp on surfaces that don’t absorb water well (gravel, clay, rock, concrete), as the water tends to run under your tent floor and permeates inside.

Ventilation

In general, ultralight and backpacking tent inners have more mesh, and 4-season tent inners employ more nylon. As a result, lighter weight tents tend to be better in warmer climates.

Some 4-season tents have nylon panels that zip away to expose large areas of mesh, which increases their ventilation and makes them more versatile. If you’re planning to use your tent in various climates, look out for this feature.

Depending on who you’re travelling with, the number of entrances in and out of your tent may be something to consider. It is no doubt less obstructive to have two side doors, where people can enter and exit the tent without climbing over or zipping near somebodies head.

If a tent with two entrances is important to you, you’ll find mostly freestanding tents with this feature.

Clips, Straps, Guy Ropes

The rule here is that simpler is better – complex clips and straps are just asking for trouble and are almost never field repairable.

Ideally guy ropes should attach at two locations on the tent poles, which dramatically increases the stabilisation of the tent in windy conditions. You’ll notice that all 4-season tents have this feature, and high end companies such as Hilleberg, have this feature on almost all of their tents.

Some tents are able to be pitched in the rain without getting the inner wet – such as my Mountain Hardwear Skyledge.

The way it works is that the groundsheet and fly can be pitched together, and the inner is brought in later and clipped to the poles. This has been handy for us from time to time but isn’t 100% necessary.

If you’re wild camping like me, you’ll find that light green or sandy coloured tents are great for a mixture of climates, from desert to forest. Darker green tents are great in thicker wooded areas.

Yellow and red tents do stand out, so only use them if you don’t need to be discreet.

Groundsheets

I love tent groundsheets. These thick material sheets keep my tent inner clean, protect the tent floor from sharp objects and are great to use as a picnic blanket at lunch time .

When I pitch my tent for days in a row, I also throw a groundsheet over the fly to protect it from the sun’s harmful UV rays. They are truly multipurpose.

Pick a bicycle touring tent which best suits your needs.

If you’re camping in warm climates, an ultralight or backpacking tent will be much more comfortable than a 4-season given the liberal use of mesh.

In adverse weather conditions or if you’re travelling for a long time, a 4-season bicycle touring tent with a gear shed may be beneficial.

Recommendations

For someone…

Who will spend 2-3 weeks touring per year in good weather conditions? A sub-1500g ultralight freestanding tent designed for the number of people travelling together. Check out the Tarptent Double Rainbow .

Who is on a three month trip in good weather conditions? A freestanding backpacking tent with space for one more person. Try the MSR Nook, Vaude Hogan , Mountain Hardwear Skyledge or Mont Moondance .

Who is on a three month trip in a cooler climate with a high chance of adverse weather conditions? A 4-season freestanding or tunnel tent with a gear shed. Try the Hilleberg Nallo GT or Vaude Hogan XT.

Who is riding through lots of deserts? A 4-season freestanding or 3-season tunnel tent for sure. Deserts are windy! Check out the Hilleberg Nallo or Allak .

Who is on a 12-month plus trip? Either: Invest, invest, invest in a high-end 4-season tent. A Hilleberg Staika or Exped Venus freestanding tent will cost an arm and leg but you will almost definitely get 1000+ nights out of it. Or: If your trip will take you through predominantly warmer climates, an ultralight or backpacking tent will be cooler, but less durable. You may have to replace it sometime on your journey. Check out the Mountain Hardwear Skyledge , Vaude Hogan or Mont Moondance .

Reputable Brands

Exped: High quality, high-end tents. Hilleberg: This company is world-renowned for making some of the best, most durable tents. Don’t expect to end up with change after purchasing one. Mont: Australian tents which have the magic combination of a 10,000mm floor and lots of inner mesh. Mountain Hardwear: Although I broke poles and clips on my original Skyledge 3 tent, the replacement tent is very light, easy to pitch and super ventilated. MSR: Highly popular for a reason – good range, decent quality and ok price. REI: Great budget tents. Tarptent: Ultralight tents at a decent price point. Terra Nova: Super high quality, renowned for their waterproofness. Vaude: A decent range, high quality and popular for many world tourers.

Related Posts

• Review: Mountain Hardwear Skyledge 3 Tent (2011)
• Review: Salewa Sierra Leone II Tent (2013)
• Mont Moondance Tent Review: Tough Enough For The Americas?
• Use Your Tent Groundsheet as a Picnic Rug on Tour
• groundsheet
• tent review
• wild camping

I had a light weight summer hiking tent but it devoloped a hole in the mesh so I am planing on buying a new one. I wasn’t sure if I should get a 3 or 4 sesson tent so I statred to look at some bivys becasue they are small and light, and can be rolled out and climbed into after a long day. They are good for quick sleeps but don’t afford much room for extened stays. I want to ride through the Snowy Mountains and do some hiking just before the ski season. I know a 4 season tent is required and I will buy one, but I still think I should get a bivy sac as well.

There is a tent that really deserves attention, the american-made Tarptent Scarp, It is basically a tunnel tent with central arcg like the iconic Hilleberg atko, but with many improvements, it has entrances and vestibules on both sides, rectangular rather than wedge-shaped and a bit more spatious, they make it for one or two persons bur the solo version can reportedly accomodate two. It is cheaper and lighter than the atko but lighter wieight comes at the cost of less durable materials. It has the wind resilience of a tunnel tent but with two optional bars can be reinforced and transformed into a free standing tent, the best of both worlds type of thing. On the down side, they make only a greyish white colour which may be good to reflect off the sun but doesn’t hel to blend in anywhere.

Thanks for the suggestion!

A very comprehensive guide and Mont is grateful for the mention. Thanks Alee!

Mont Adventure Equipment

The most important change in tents in decades is just around the corner and it’s name is Dyneema. When Hilleberg makes a big tunnel tent with vestibule and they build the fly out of Dyneema I will Jump on it. 2/3 the weight, totally waterproof and only twice the price!

No mention of Wilderness Equipment out of Fremantle? I used one of their Second Arrow tunnel tents on two long trips – first from Perth to Brisbane and then half-way up South America. In all weathers, it never let me down. Admittedly not the two person tent they claimed it to be, but a very livable tent for one person. It can be pegged out with just three pegs, the floor of the inner can be rolled back for plenty of room for cooking, and the ventilation options make it suitable for almost any climate. Mine’s nearly twenty years old and not as waterproof as it once was, but I’d certainly buy another.

There’s too many tents to mention! Thanks for the recommendation.

Comments are closed.

The 10 Best Tents For Cycle Touring In 2024

Looking to find out which are the best tents for cycle touring in 2024? You’re in the right place! In this guide, I’ll be showcasing 10 of the most popular and best-loved options, with information on what makes them so great for touring, their weight, price and more.

What tent do I use for cycle touring? I personally use the Quechua Quickhiker Ultralight 2 Tent. It’s super lightweight, quick to pitch and take down, and just an all-around great tent. Sadly, this tent now seems to be discontinued, although the Forclaz Ultralight 2-Person Tunnel Tent is almost identical.

The 10 best tents for cycle touring

Here’s the lowdown on the best tents for cycle touring, including tunnel tents, dome tents and a bivvy-style model.

Vango Nevis 200 (£155)

While the Vango Nevis 200 may not be the lightest tent on this list, it is incredible value for money at just £140. If you’re new to cycle touring and don’t want to spend a fortune on gear, you can’t go too far wrong with this. It’s waterproof, has good ventilation, and would even make a decent wild camping companion, thanks to its low profile and green colour scheme.

Weight:  2.02kg

✔ Great budget option ✔ Good for stealthy wild camping ✔ Easy to pitch and take down

Forclaz Ultralight 2 Person Tunnel Tent (£219.99)

The Forclaz Ultralight 2 Person Tunnel Tent is almost identical to my trusty Quechua Quickhiker, which is why I’m recommending it here. The 1-pole design makes it quick and easy to pitch, plus it’s lightweight and packs up reasonably small. And, at just £220, it’s pretty decent value for money. The 2-berth version of this is a little claustrophobic for 2 people, but it’s plenty spacious for a solo cyclist.

✔ Good budget option ✔ 1 pole design for speedy pitching ✔ Small and compact

Weight: 1.75kg

Winterial Single Person Bivvy Tent (£135)

The Winterial Single Person Bivvy Tent is a real bikepacking tent. Ideal for ultralight solo cyclists, this glorified bivvy bag is super lightweight and low on fuss. Its low profile and forest green colouring make it ideal for stealthy wild camping as it blends nicely into the environment. It’s super easy to set up, taking less than 5 minutes — simply install the two aluminium poles and stake down the corners of the tent. The Winterial Single Person Bivvy Tent is good for 3 seasons, so it will see you comfortably on cycle tours from spring to autumn.

✔ Excellent for stealthy wild camping ✔ Quick to pitch ✔ Ultra lightweight

Weight: 1.31kg

Alpkit Ordos 2 (£219.99)

The Ordos 2 is Alpkit’s lightest 2-person tent, packing down to just 1.4kg. It has collapsible poles so it packs up small and compact — about the size of a 1.5-litre bottle — making it easy to secure to your bike’s handlebars. The central ridgeline design creates a stable yet spacious shelter, offering maximum living space while maintaining its low weight. Plus, the tent has a vestibule for storing luggage, as well as hang loops and pockets in the interior for further storage.

✔ Ultra lightweight ✔ Handle-bar friendly pack size ✔ Spacious with vestibules and interior pockets for storage

Weight: 1.4 kg

Vaude Lizard (€650)

At just 1.13kg, the Vaude Lizard is seriously light. This, coupled with its low profile and green colour scheme, makes it ideal for stealth camping. Despite the compact size and featherweight design, the tent is fully waterproof and rated for three-season use.

✔ Ultra lightweight ✔ Great for stealthy wild camping ✔ Excellent build quality

Weight: 1.13 kg

MEC Spark 2.0 (CA$474.95)

The Spark 2.0 is a dome tent from Canadian outdoor brand MEC. Set up is fast and easy, thanks to the thoughtful design and clear colour coding. It balances weight and size well, providing room for two cyclists, or ample room for a solo rider. And, with two vestibules, there’s plenty of room for luggage storage.

The Spark is also great value for money: it’s designed in-house by Canada’s largest gear co-op, so is quite a bit cheaper than similar tents. You’ll also be pleased to know that this tent is rated for three-season use and holds up impressively well in heavy rain.

Weight: 1.75 kg

✔ Great value for money ✔ Spacious with vestibules and interior pockets for storage ✔ Quick and easy to pitch, thanks to clear colour coding

Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 Bikepack ($579.95)

Given the fast-growing popularity of bikepacking, it’s not surprising to see bikepacking-specific tents start to pop up. The Copper Spur HV UL2 Bikepack from US brand Big Agnes is one such tent, designed to have a handlebar-friendly pack size and a low weight.

The Copper Spur offers a good balance between weight and size, making it a comfortable cycle touring tent for two people. It has two doors and vestibules, plenty of headroom to sit up, and interior pockets for storage. In addition to its spacious interior, it’s also easy to pitch and take down — an all-around great tent.

✔ Specifically designed for cycle tourists and bikepackers ✔ Spacious with vestibules and interior pockets for storage ✔ Handle-bar friendly pack size

Weight: 1.59 kg

Terra Nova Laser Compact 2 (£600)

Another great option for bikepackers and wild campers, the Terra Nova Laser Compact 2 has a low profile and a dark green colour scheme. It’s not cheap at £600, but it’s been tried and tested and has even won awards. It’s safe to say that the Laser Compact 2 will be a long-lasting, reliable touring companion.

The tent pitches all-in-one, with the flysheet and inner attached, making it quick and easy to pitch. With a low weight and a small pack size of 30x15cm, the Laser Compact 2 is ideally sized for a handlebar bag. Despite its low weight and small size, it’s rated for three-season use and has two porches for storing gear. It will be quite cosy for two cyclists but plenty spacious for a solo rider.

✔ Great for stealthy wild camping ✔ Handle-bar friendly pack size ✔ Excellent build quality

MSR Hubba Hubba NX (£540)

The MSR Hubba Hubba NX is perhaps the most recommended series of tents among cycle tourists. It’s lightweight, it packs up small, it’s spacious with plenty of headroom and it has ample vestibule space for storing luggage. On top of that, the tent is very durable, with high-quality weatherproofing, good ventilation, and overall great build quality. What more could a cycle tourist want? The 2-berth version will likely be the model of choice for most cyclists, while the 1-berth model will suit ultralight cyclists and the 3-berth for a pair of riders.

✔ One of the most recommend tents among cycle tourists ✔ Spacious with a vestibule for storing luggage ✔ Excellent build quality

Weight: 1.72 kg

MSR Elixir 2 (£340)

While the above MSR Hubba Hubba NX is one of the very best tents for cycle touring, the £515 price point might not suit everyone’s budget. This is where the MSR Elixir 2 comes in. The Elixir is also a high-quality MSR tent, and the £200 saving is likely worth it to those who aren’t too bothered about saving on weight. At 2.77kg, it’s the heaviest tent on this list, but it doesn’t sacrifice on quality or durability.

✔ Cheaper alternative to the much-loved Hubba Hubba NX ✔ Great build quality ✔ Spacious with a vestibule for storing luggage

Weight: 2.77 kg

More great tents for cycle touring

Not enough choice in my list above? Here are some more options to look into:

• OEX Salamanda Bivi Tent
• Wild Country Zephyros Compact 2
• REI Co-op Quarter Dome 2
• Nemo Hornet 2P
• Sierra Designs Meteor 3000
• Big Agnes Fly Creek HV UL2
• Vango F10 Hydrogen Air Tent

Which tent(s) have you enjoyed using on cycle tours? Let me know in the comments below!

About The Author

Lauren Pears is a freelance travel writer and blogger based in London. She writes about active adventure travel, aiming to encourage and inspire travellers to make the most of the great outdoors.

Thank you for reading! If you found this post useful, I’d be grateful if you would consider using the affiliate links below when planning your travels. I’ll make a small commission at no extra cost to you. This will help me to keep this blog running. Thanks for your support – Lauren. Hotels –  Booking.com Hostels –  Hostelworld Cheap flights –  Skyscanner Travel insurance –  World Nomads Outdoor gear –  Decathlon  /  GO Outdoors Cycling gear –  Chain Reaction Cycles Alternatively, you could buy me a coffee to say thanks!

Similar Posts

A Complete Bike Touring Gear Guide and Kit List

The 8 Best Panniers For Cycle Touring in 2024

Really helpful article. I currently have a Stratospire Li by Tarptent. Pricey but super light. I have used it with my spouse and individually. I am 5’10” and partner is 5’4”. Vestibule on both sides as well as doors on both. Great for storing gear out of the weather if needed.

Thanks for the recommendation Kenn, sounds like a good tent!

Why there is no word for Nemo tents. I feel Osmo by them is worthy of being in the list. Another one is by Druston,(Hope spelled it correct). They are making extremely light weight and durable tents.

Yes I’ve heard a lot of good things about Nemo! Thanks for mentioning them.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

• camping gear

13 TOP Tents – Which is the best tent for a bike trip and for bikepacking?

Für evtl. enthaltene Werbe-Links auf dieser Seite zahlt der Händler ggf. eine Provision: Transparenz

What is the best tent for a bike trip and for bikepacking? There is currently a seemingly endless selection of tents on the market. That can be quite confusing! So there are now: Ultralight tents, freestanding tents, tents for 3 or 4 seasons and with or without awning. There are also single and double-walled tents. Some also come with footprints, some without, and certain ultralight tents also come without poles.

In this article you will find a detailed and understandable tent guide. In it you will probably learn everything there is to know about tents. I have written down the knowledge for you in a simple and understandable way.

You will also find an overview of recommended tents from the following categories:

✅ Bikepacking tent : Tents for minimalist bike travel. Here the focus is on low weight and a compact pack size ✅ Tent for bike trip and tent for bike tour : Are tents for (mostly) one or two people and are suitable for short or extended bike tours. The tents are robust, durable and offer comfortable space inside for people and equipment.

With the important topic of price, there are big differences: Premium tents like to cost several hundred euros. Fortunately, there are also very inexpensive TOP tents. For each tent category, I therefore show recommended price tips including their pros and cons. Plus, of course, we take a look at the most popular bikepacking tents and the absolute TOP tents in the tent for bike touring section.

You’re in a hurry? Tent recommendation: MSR Hubba NX

You’re in a hurry? The MSR Hubba NX has proven itself to many bike travelers over the years. It also meets all the above requirements. So my recommendation for the best bikepacking tent and tent for bike touring is the MSR Hubba NX in the green color.

• VienvietÄ— palapinÄ— MSR Hubba NX - Žalia

* Werbung - Aktualisierung am 2024-06-07, Preis kann gestiegen sein, Als Amazon-Partner verdiene ich an qualifizierten Verkäufen, Bild:Amazon

The MSR Hubba NX tent is available in different sizes:

• As a 1-person tent - tent for bikepackers (MSR Hubba NX)*.
• As a 2-person tent - tent for solo bike travelers (MSR Hubba Hubba NX)*.
• As a 3-person tent - Tent for bike travel as a couple (MSR Mutha Hubba NX)*.

I have owned the 1-person MSR Hubba NX myself for 3 years now and am absolutely satisfied with it. It offers the best overall package of small pack size, reliability and robustness and space inside: Even with my 1-person tent I have my 1.84 height enough space to lie stretched out and sit upright. I can still stow some luggage in the tent and the tent has a small vestibule in which two small bike bags and my shoes fit easily. It is also quick and easy to assemble and disassemble.

Some time ago I already created a detailed video test of the MSR Hubba NX:

I bought the tent in 2017 for the Tuscany Trail in Italy. A year later I had it with me on a bike trip from Stuttgart to Istanbul and it still looks like new.

The MSR Hubba NX still convinces me today and it is my current favourite tent. The 1 person version is ideal for me as a minimalist bike traveler or for bikepacking trips. You need more comfort? then the 2-person variant or the 3-person variant is better suited for you.

So the MSR Hubba NX has been convincing me in practice for years. The technical peculiarities are also convincing:

✅ Light weight : Weighs just 1330 grams ✅ small pack size : Ideal as a bikepacking tent. The 2- or 3-person version is suitable as a tent for bike trips ✅ Freestanding tent : So that fast and convenient to set up.

…and much more. I present the MSR Hubba NX in detail in the detailed MSR Hubba NX practical test (test & experiences) .

MSR Hubba NX bei Amazon kaufen*

Now we continue with the ultimate tent selection >>

Determine the requirements for your tent

First, please answer the following question: What kind of bike trip or bikepacking adventure are you taking?

• Do you only need your tent for a few weeks a year for a summer adventure? Or do you want a super reliable tent for a cycling trip around the world?
• Are you travelling as a couple and need a lot of space or are you alone and like to travel minimalistically?
• Do you like to stay at campsites or do you prefer wild camping?
• Are you out in good weather in the summer? Or can it rain sometimes or do you even camp in winter?

So what are your requirements? It is now time to answer these questions.

Have you given it any thought? Super! It will then be much easier for you to find the right tent for you. Read on now

In the last few years, however, I have been watching the market trends at all times. In addition, I was and am on many continents of this world with bike and tent on the road. The following tips ha proven themselves:

• Best tent for bike trip and best tent for bike tour for one person: Free standing, double walled, 2 person tent for 3 seasons, weighs between 1.5 and 2.5 kilos and has an inconspicuous color such as green. Such a tent fits centrally on the luggage rack of a touring bike. The space inside is comfortable: there is enough room for the cyclist and most of the luggage.
• For a couple so two people: A 3-person tent with the same requirements as above.
• best bikepacking tent: For a solo bikepacker, the 1-person variety or alternatively a tarp or bivy sack is suitable.

13 TOP tents for bikepacking and bike trips

So I’ve been doing a lot of research. Also, the list is based on my years of experience with different tents. In the process I found 10 tents that are very interesting. Also, I always keep the list up to date. The tents are suitable for bikepacking and also for normal bike trips and for a bike tour.

We start with cheap and simple tents. These are especially suitable for shorter trips and for bike tours in good weather. Then we work our way slowly. To tents that can withstand cycling trips across continents and are even suitable for a cycling world tour. These tents are therefore also suitable for cycling trips lasting several months or years. The list also includes recommended bikepacking tents. These are particularly light and have a small pack size. This means that they can be stowed directly in the frame bag or in the handlebar roller.

For all recommended tents I have also linked you directly to an online shop. This means you can order tents online immediately and have them conveniently delivered to your home.

You miss a tent or have an insider tip? Then feel free to drop me a comment.

Tent for bike trip and tent for bike tour – the TOP 5

The tents in this selection offer a particularly good mix of weight, space and price. These tents are also about weight. However, particular emphasis is placed on the space available. In this category good tents are already very inexpensive to have. So there is also money left over for the trip 😉 with these features, the tents are suitable for many travelers and are the ideal choice as a tent for a bike trip and bike tour.

Tent for bike trip – Overview

MSR Elixir 2

Weight: 2.77kg Pack size: 51 x 17 cm Water column (outer tent, floor): 1,500mm, 3000mm Features: since 2018 with more space

The Elixir is one of MSR’s newest tents. The space is intended for 2 people. MSR officially promotes the Elixir 2 as a backpacking tent. This results in a great advantage: the tent has particularly large vestibules on both sides. They’re actually for backpacks. Large bike bags and equipment fit of course just as well underneath 😉 the weight is 2.7 kilos. As a tent for a normal bike tour, the weight is therefore perfectly fine and the equipment is just right for a tour for two.

The price of the MSR Elixir 2 is particularly interesting for a high-quality brand tent: the tent costs just over 200€ at well-known online retailers.

MSR Hubba Hubba NX

Weight: 1.72 kg Pack size: 46 x 15 cm Water column (outer tent, floor): 1200, 3000mm Features:

The MSR Hubba Hubba NX is one of the most popular tents for bike travel and is also great for a bike tour. There are also many bicycle travellers who tour the world with a tent. The tent has also been my favorite bikepacking tent for a few years now. Here you can find my extensive MSR Hubba NX field test . The popularity of the MSR Hubba NX has several reasons:

The MSR Hubba Hubba NX is lightweight yet very durable. MSR has continued to develop and improve the tent over the years. There are also two colors: white and green. In order to remain undetected when wild camping, I bought the green version myself.

In the MSR Hubba series there are different tents for different requirements:

• The Hubba NX is the ideal bikepacking tent – because it weighs only 1.12 kg.
• The Hubba Hubba NX offers plenty of space for a solo bike traveller: With 2 vestibules, there is also plenty of space in front of the tent for gear
• For a couple on a bike tour, the Mutha Hubba NX is the ideal tent for the bike tour: it also weighs only 2.3 kg

Change Pathfinder TL

Weight: 2.3kg Pack size: 45 x 15 cm Water column (fly, groundsheet): 5000mm, 7000mm Features: suitable for tall people

The Wechsel Pathfinder is a 1-person tent with extra space. The Pathfinder weighs only 2.3 kg – that’s light for the “tent for bike touring” category. So what does the tent offer? With a length of 2.35 in the inner tent, the Wechsel Pathfinder is especially suitable for tall people. The water column is 5000mm for the outer tent and 7000mm for the tent floor. The height of 75cm is rather low, but with a maximum width of 94cm the tent offers a lot of space for equipment inside. The tent is also free-standing: a great gain in comfort that also saves time during pitching and dismantling.

The price of the Wechsel Pathfinder is unbeatable and therefore the tent is the price tip in this category.

Salewa Denali II

Weight: 2.63kg Pack size: 47 x 20cm Water column (fly, groundsheet): 3000mm, 5000mm Features: Self Standing, Classic

Salewa is a traditional tent builder and brings a lot of experience to the table. The company is known for very good tents. On the one hand, the Salewa tents offer high quality – but are also somewhat heavier.

The Salewa Denali II is nevertheless an attractive tent: it is free-standing, weighs 2.63 kg and is very attractively priced. Thus, the Salewa Denali II is definitely an interesting tent. Especially if you are looking for a reliable tent for a longer bike trip.

The technical data is convincing: The space inside is ample and very comfortable, especially for one person. The length of the lying surface is 2.10 meters. At 1.10 metres in width, there is plenty of room to lie down and carry extra equipment. The seat height is a comfortable 1.05 metres. So you can stay in the tent even longer in bad weather.

I don’t think the yellow colour is ideal: it only attracts unnecessary attention when wild camping.

Nordisk Finnmark 2 SE

Weight: 3.0kg Pack size: 15 x 50 cm Water column: 3000mm, 10000mm Features:

With the Nordisk you really get a lot of tent for the money: It is a 2-person tent and offers 1.15 metres seat height, 1.50 metres width and 2.30 metres length for the lying area. The ideal tent if you are going on a bike tour as a couple and want a bit more space.

The weight of 3 kg is a good value for a tent with such ample space. As I said, a great tent for those who want a little more space.

Bikepacking tent – the TOP 8

These are the most interesting bikepacking tents. No bikepacking tent on this list weighs more than 1.23 kilos and the lightest comes in at a featherweight 798 grams. Exceptions are the price tips. Here the weight is a little higher. It is often astonishing how resistant the tents are despite their lightweight construction.

A good entry-level bikepacking tent is also available for really cheap. For several hundred euros you get tents from the top class. Many of these tents are designed specifically for bikepackers or have a good reputation in the bikepacking community.

Some of the tents recommended in the list above (tent for bike trip and tent for bike tour) I mention here again. These are then mostly weight-reduced versions of the upper tents or it is simply the 1-person tent instead of the 2- or 3-person version.

Overview – Bikepacking Tent

MSR Hubba NX

Weight: 1.12 kg Pack size: 46 x 15 cm Water column: 1200, 3000mm Features: 3 seasons

The Hubba NX is MSR’s best-selling 1-person tent. This tent has been my absolute favorite for several years and I’ll tell you why right now. Before that, a quick note: The Hubba NX is also available as a 2-person tent and is then called Hubba Hubba NX. In any case, I am not the only one who is convinced of the tent: Many cyclists have already made world tours with these tents.

The tent is a 3-season tent and weighs just 1,120 grams complete with all the trimmings. Say: The tent, all the poles and the pegs. A Footprint thus a ground protection tarpaulin I recommend to buy in any case still in addition. However, this only comes to a few grams.

The tent is free-standing and can therefore be erected without tensioning. It is still stable in up to medium-strong winds. If the wind then becomes very strong, the tent should be braced. The ventilation is excellent and also the weather resistance I can confirm: Even in heavy rain, water never came through the tent wall or even the tent floor.

The seat height is 90 centimetres and the reclining width is 76 centimetres. To illustrate: With my 1.84 meters I lie quite relaxed and stretched out in the tent and still have room and a small backpack to accommodate. The rest of the luggage then goes under the vestibule. Check out my extensive MSR Hubba NX field test for even more details on this top bikepacking tent.

The tent was simply very well thought out by MSR: The MSR Hubba NX is a really good tent with many strengths and no real weaknesses.

The MSR Hubba NX is definitely worth the price.

To the detailed MSR Hubba NX field test (test & experiences)

MSR Carbon Reflex

Weight: 798 grams Pack size: 43 x 13 cm Water column: 1200, 1200mm Features: 1 person, 1 entrance & vestibule, UL 7D fabric.

At just 798 grams, the MSR Carbon Reflex 2 is significantly lighter than the Hubba NX. It’s also MSR’s lightest, double-walled tent. To achieve the weight, MSR has used quite thin material: 7D fine material is used for the outer tent. The floor is made of 15D Ripstop Nylon, a slightly stronger material. although the outer tent as well as the floor have a water column of 1200.

There is no zipper at the entrance. A velcro fastener and two hooks are used. Very weight-optimized. The head height of 81 cm is low, as expected. Experience shows that the carbon frame is one of the weak points of the tent.

Naturehike New Cloud Upgrade

Weight: 1,550 grams Pack size: 45 cm x 12 cm Water column: 3000, 3000mm Features: 1 person, 1 entrance & Apside

Probably the most popular replica of the MSR Hubba NX is the “Naturehike New Cloud-Up” or also “Naturehike Cloud-Up upgraded”. The Chinese company has done a really good job here:

For just over 100€ you get a reliable tent with very similar features: The weight is with 1,550 grams about 250 grams heavier than the MSR tent. Otherwise, the workmanship of the zippers is not quite up to the original.

Of course, the Cloud-Up is also freestanding, but you have to unhitch it a little earlier than the MSR Hubba NX. Very pleasing: The high water column of 4000mm for the tent floor and the outer tent. In addition, the scope of delivery also includes a footprint. The buyers on Amazon seem to be very satisfied with the tent. I have also seen the tent live once at friends and could convince myself of the quality. Definitely a price-performance tip.

Naturehike Neues Cloud-Up Upgraded auf Amazon kaufen*

Decathlon Forclaz Trek 900 Ultralight

Weight: 798 grams Pack size: 40 x 12 cm Water column: 4000, 5000mm Features: 1 person, 1 entrance & vestibule, UL 7D fabric.

The Decathlon Trek 900 is another price tip in the bikepacking tent category. The Trek 900 can be bought online at Decathlon for about 120€.

For the price, the Decathlon Trek 900 offers a surprising amount of advantages and has hardly any weaknesses. In principle, it is largely a replica of the excellent MSR Hubba NX.

With a weight of about 1,600 grams, the tent is about 200 grams heavier than the MSR Hubba NX, which is more than twice as expensive. The packing dimensions are 40x12x12 and are absolutely fine.

For a lightest bikepaking tent for one person, you can also be comfortable inside: 95 cm high. Inside you have 60 centimetres of space on the head side and 50 centimetres on the foot side. As usual with a lightweight tent, the sides are not exactly spacious. You should still be able to fit some gear in the tent. If the space requirement is larger then the tent also has a vestibule.

Fortunately, a footprint and a repair kit are included in the delivery.

To the detailed Forclaz Trek 900 Ultralight practical test (test & experiences)

Vango F10 Helium UL 1

Weight: 1.23 kg Pack size: 43cm x 9cm Water column: 3000mm outer tent, 6000mm floor Features: 1 person, 1 entrance & vestibule, UL 7D fabric.

The Vango F10 Helium has almost all the features you could want in a bikepacking tent. The price remains pleasantly low. Good reasons, therefore, to take a close look at the tent:

The Vango F10 Helium offers extra head and legroom. The outer tent is made of 15D nylon. The base plate is made of particularly robust 70D nylon. This also results in a high water column of 6000mm for both the outer tent and the tent floor – in addition, all seams are factory-taped and therefore waterproof. A footprint is not included, but can be purchased as an accessory.

The interior dimensions promise great space for a 1-person tent. There is space for equipment on both sides: on one side, a triangular area has been added to the inner tent for storage space. There is an apse on the other side.

Big Agnes Fly Creek HV UL1

Weight: 0.98 kg Pack size: 48 x 10cm Water column: 1200, 1200mm Features: super light, 3 seasons.

Big Agnes is especially popular with bikepackers and backpackers in the USA. The most popular models are now also available from us. Anyway, there is a whole range of interesting tents from Big Agnes. These combine light weight with a pleasantly large amount of space. Ideal bikepacking tent therefore.

To be sure, the Fly Creek is not completely freestanding. On the other hand, it is particularly light with a total weight of 980 grams. We are dealing with a 1 person and 3 season tent here. The price of about 330 euros is also very fair for what is offered.

There are also 2- and 3-person models of the Big Agnes Fly Creek HV. The 3-person model is still pleasantly light at 1.5 kilos. It is therefore particularly suitable for cyclists with a large space requirement, who nevertheless attach importance to a lightweight tent.

By the way, the addition HV in the product name indicates the revised version of the Big Agnes Fly Creek. In the new HV model, the tent walls have been pulled up more steeply. This makes better use of the indoor space.

Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL1

Weight: 1.13 kg Pack size: 42 x 10cm Water column: 1200mm, 1200mm Features: very light, 3 seasons.

Another Big Agnes tent in the bikepacking tent category. Compared to the Fly Creek, the Copper Spur is completely freestanding. With a total weight of 1.5 kilos, the tent is still pleasantly light.

As is often the case with freestanding tents: With the Copper Spur, the inner tent can be pitched independently of the outer tent. This optimises ventilation and the view on hot summer nights. Or the outer tent is used as a tarp without the inner tent to save a few more grams. Can also be used for

There is also a 2-person and a 3-person model of the Copper Spur. The weight is then still absolutely within the framework and the space is of course comfortably large.

The same applies to the Copper Spur: the HV suffix in the name identifies the revised version of the bikepacking tent. The tent walls rise more steeply, which increases the space available in the interior.

Nordisk Telemark 2 ULW

Weight: 0.88 kg Pack size: 41 x 12 cm Water column: 2000mm, 2000mm Features: received multiple awards & Design Award

The Nordisk Telemark 2 ULW has received several awards for its special design. It’s also incredibly lightweight at just 880 grams. For a double-walled tent, that’s a house number. Officially, the Nordisk Telemark 2 ULW is a 2-person tent. However, I recommend using it for only one person.

Then you can also be pleased about the large amount of space: Luxurious 1 metre seat height and 1.02 lying width are offered. Thus also still another some equipment in the tent comes under.

At around 600 euros, the bikepacking tent is not exactly cheap. If you’re looking for a tent that’s both high-quality and lightweight, you should definitely check out the Nordisk Telemark 2 ULW.

Ultralight tent – The TOP 5

Overview – ultralight tent, guide – tent for bike travel and bikepacking tent.

So by now you know what you need your tent for and I have introduced you to the most suitable tents currently available. In this guide, we delve deeper into the topic of bikepacking tents and tents for bike touring.

Important questions before buying a tent

Some important aspects should be considered before buying a bikepacking tent and a tent for bike travel. Let’s get the main points straight. I also give my own practical experience on each point.

Single and double-walled – the type of construction

A single-wall tent, as the name implies, consists of one wall. In such a tent you are less well protected from the weather, insects and dirt. You can also come into direct contact with condensation on the tent wall.

A double-walled tent offers many advantages in comparison: The outer tent provides weather protection and ventilation. The inner tent offers protection from insects, the weather and dirt. In addition, one is much better protected from condensation inside.

In comparison, a double-walled tent therefore offers many advantages. In return, it is about 200 grams heavier. You also lose about 5 inches to each side through the inner tent. In summary, a multi-wall tent offers many clear advantages. Most travelers can certainly get over the slightly higher weight. For most cyclists, therefore, a double-walled tent is probably the best choice. Only if every gram is important, a single wall tent could be an alternative.

With many tents, the inner tent and outer tent can be pitched and packed separately. This opens up many possibilities:

• Building the outer tent without inner tent: Opportunities especially in dry areas without insects. You save weight and have more space.
• Pitching the inner tent without the outer tent: Recommended in Hot regions, indoors, under canopies or even indoors. The inner tent serves as mosquito protection. In addition, one has a better ventilation which can be especially pleasant in hot areas. The view of the starry sky is also free.
• In the event of rain, pack and transport the wet outer tent separately from the dry inner tent.

Type of guy: freestanding or guyed?

Some tents are free-standing, i.e. you do not have to tie them down with a peg. They stand by the tension of the tent poles alone. For even more stability, these tents can be additionally braced with tent cords and pegs. Dome tents and geo tents are representatives of the freestanding category.

Note should be taken: On stony ground or if the ground is too soft or too hard, then no herring holds. Nor indoors. In such a case, a free-standing tent is worth its weight in gold. In addition, you don’t have to unpeg the tent, saving you time and effort.

Free-standing tents are also usually quicker to erect than non-free-standing tents. Especially in rainy weather and at the end of an exhausting day an uncomplicated tent has advantages.

Free-standing tents are usually about 200 grams heavier than non-free-standing tents.

The ideal tent should weigh as little as possible. When you carry less weight on your bike, you move faster and easier – and riding is more fun. At the latest when you have to push or carry the bike, you know what I mean.

Modern tents can be incredibly light. So the best tent for a bike trip should be as light as possible. This is especially true for bikepackers.

The ideal tent for bike trips should have the smallest possible pack size. Then it takes up less space in the bike bags. The sticking point when it comes to tent packing dimensions are often the tent poles: These are the longest items. Unfortunately, especially free-standing tents often have somewhat longer tent poles. This is usually not a problem on a bike trip: The tent poles are then simply fastened securely in the middle of the luggage rack.

Thanks to its small pack size, the ideal bikepacking tent fits in the handlebar roll or in the frame bag. Some manufacturers now sell special bikepacking versions of their tried-and-tested tents: these feature particularly short tent poles, making them ideal for stowing in the handlebar pulley or frame bag.

The longer your bike trip, the more important the durability of a tent. But also in general you want to have a long time pleasure with your purchase. Modern lightweight tents have a limited lifespan. So on a really long bike ride, strictly speaking, you could talk about a consumable. I’m sure many long-term travellers had a number of tents in use at once on their trip. There is a whole series of common sources of faults: zips no longer work, the underbody is less and less waterproof or the tent poles break after a certain time. UV rays also damage the outer tent over time.

Can your bikepacking tent withstand stormy weather? Stormy weather is the exception rather than the norm. However, if the cycling trip lasts for a long time, it can sometimes come to a thunderstorm or squalls. Some regions are also known for particularly unpredictable and harsh weather – for example Iceland.

So the ideal tent should be able to withstand a storm. Even if houses, animals or even cars are blown away in the surrounding area 😉

Two factors significantly influence the stability of a tent: the type of tent and often also the weight.

• Influence of tent design on stability: Geodesic and tunnel tents are particularly stable in windy weather. Always provided they are correctly braced. The direction in which the tent is pitched also plays a role: the tent should be pitched in such a way as to give the wind as little of an attack surface as possible. Ridge tents, which are wedge-shaped tents, are most susceptible to strong gusts of wind. Nowadays, however, tents of this design have largely been superseded by other designs. More about this also further down in this article
• Influence of the tent weight on the stability: Basically, a very light or even a UL tent (Ultralight tent) is often not as storm-proof as a slightly heavier one. As described above, some tents do not need to be braced. These are then so-called free-standing tents. The additional support provided by the pegs in the ground and the guy ropes naturally increases the weather and wind resistance.

In the event of a storm, it is then also worthwhile to unhitch this tent.

Interior space

In the ideal tent there is enough space for more than just a sleeping mat. In the ideal tent, people sleep, unpack and repack travel gear, work, play, change clothes and invite guests.

A tent for a bike trip usually provides space for the sleeping pad and the bike bags.

In a bikepacking tent there is usually room for a small backpack or saddle bag in addition to the sleeping pad. In a very minimalist Ultralight tent there is usually only room for the sleeping pad.

Vestibule – space outside

The best tent for bike touring and bikepacking also has room to keep gear safe and dry. The bike has to stay outside most of the time for space reasons. But even quite small tents usually have a vestibule, i.e. an awning. Larger tents sometimes even have two of them. Additional equipment such as panniers can be stored there. The vestibule is also an ideal place to put your shoes or cook.

With many modern tents, the size of the vestibule can be changed by bracing it accordingly. If the vestibule is correctly tensioned, the equipment will usually only get a few splashes, even in moderately heavy rain.

Color and visibility

The tent color is not only a matter of personal taste. If you would like to go wild camping, for example, then you should remain undetected. An inconspicuous tent color helps a lot. A tent that adapts to its surroundings, almost like a chameleon, is therefore ideally suited.

For the following cases, different colors have proven to be useful:

• Dark green, dark brown and neutral colors: The tent is particularly inconspicuous in nature and you will not be seen immediately.
• Red, light brown, bright orange colors and yellow: The tent is more suitable for the high mountains. Here the tent can be discovered quickly. In dangerous situations such as avalanches or for orientation, this feature can save lives. In desert regions these colors are very inconspicuous.

The choice of colour therefore depends entirely on the environment in which you intend to use the tent most of the time.

Weather resistance

A good tent keeps you dry inside and stays tight even in the rain. The best tents will do that even in monsoon-like rain or if they get washed out. Could you get into a weather situation like this? You should think about this before your bike trip.

The following measures can increase the weather resistance of a tent:

• Footprint: A footprint is available as an accessory for most tents. Sometimes this ground cover is already included in the delivery. The Footprint increases the water resistance of the tent floor and protects it from wear and tear. For some tents there are special large groundsheets. In addition to the tent floor, these also protect the space in the awning so that the equipment in the awning also stays dry.
• Adaptable outer tent: With flexible tents, the outer tent can be pulled down low. Also, the outer tent should generally reach all the way down at the corners. This will keep rain splashes out safely. The side walls can then be left up in good weather and allow pleasant air circulation.

Ventilation

Comfortable ventilation is one of the most important aspects when buying a tent for bike touring and for a bikepacking tent. In the worst case, a large amount of condensation can collect on the tent wall. So much that water drips down and literally makes you wet! Tents with poor ventilation also heat up quickly, even in the early morning.

The following points ensure particularly good ventilation in the tent:

• Double-walled tent: Due to sweating and breathing, condensation forms on the outer tent. With a single-wall tent, you can easily touch the tent wall. In addition, the condensation water can also drip downwards. An inner tent prevents condensation from touching the tent and sometimes keeps water from dripping down.
• Adjustable outer tent: The ventilation of the outer tent should be adjustable. Basically, raised exterior walls provide better ventilation. In the event of bad weather, the outer tent can then be pulled lower for rain protection.
• High mesh content in the inner tent: Large areas of sewn fly netting promote ventilation in the inner tent. In hot weather, only the inner tent can be pitched (without the outer tent). Then a pleasant breeze can blow through the tent. You can also marvel at the starry sky at night.

Privacy in the tent

After a long day on the bike, you’ll probably want to retire for a while. In the ideal tent you should therefore feel safe and secure. Especially in hot weather, the following point can be important: For ideal ventilation, you can only pitch the inner tent without the outer tent. Then you can be pampered by a warm breeze. Not everyone should look directly into your tent? Then an inner tent with a combination of mesh and solid tent makes sense. An inner tent completely made of mesh is very easy to see from the outside.

View from the tent

Your tent should protect you from rain and bad weather. But thou shalt not suffer from claustrophobia in it! But when the weather and nature are at their best, you want to soak it up 🙂 Right out of your tent! For a particularly beautiful view out of the tent: a retractable vestibule (awning) and a fly net (mesh) on the tent door or a high mesh section on the inner tent.

Of course, price is also an important factor when buying a tent! How much tent do you get for your money? Really good tents from well-known outdoor brands cost several hundred euros and are definitely worth the money. However, it is understandable that many people have a price ceiling for buying a tent.

The good news in this case: There are also some good alternatives for just over a hundred euros. In the core, the weight of these tents is then usually a few hundred grams higher. However, compared to the top tents, they cost only about half. I realize that price is an important factor. That’s why I’ve included these inexpensive alternatives above.

What types of tents are there?

In this section I explain in detail the different tent designs. I’ll also list the pros and cons for you, and then give a conclusion on tent construction.

The following designs are possible for a tent for bike touring and a bikepacking tent

The ridge tent is a very simple tent design. It is built in a wedge shape and the tent walls slope steeply towards the outside.

advantages and disadvantages

✅ Special lightweight construction: This construction can be a few hundred grams lighter than other types of tents. There are therefore some UL tents in the ridge tent design. ❌ Steeply sloping tent walls: This also severely limits the space inside.

Because of this disadvantage, ridge tents are only the exception nowadays. This design was superseded by other designs.

Tunnel tent

As the name suggests, these tents look very similar to a tunnel. The tent poles are almost perpendicular to the ground when the tent is erected. This results in the following properties:

✅ Good ratio between floor space and available space as well as seat height Comparatively large vestibule due to the tunnel construction, especially an advantage in comparison with dome tents. ✅ very good space-to-weight ratio ❌ Unfavorable much attack surface for wind and squalls. To minimise the area of attack, the tent should be aligned lengthwise to the wind. ❌ Not free-standing: Must be braced

The walls of the dome tent are almost as steep as those of the tunnel tent. This results in a number of interesting properties

✅ Good ratio between floor space and space available as well as seat height – but somewhat worse than the tunnel tent ✅ good space-to-weight ratio – here also somewhat worse than a tunnel tent ✅ Free-standing: Stands without guy ropes and pegs ✅ Resistant to wind gusts and storms

The geo tent is a complex tent construction, suitable for 2 persons and more and offers a number of unique advantages. If the tent has to be particularly robust, then the geo tent can be a good choice.

✅ Also good ratio between floor space and space available – similar to dome tent ✅ Very robust against wind and storm: Due to the multiple crossed pole construction ✅ Carries snow loads well ✅ Free-standing: Stands without guy ropes or pegs ❌ Complex under construction: Requires at least 2 people

Bivouac tent

Take a bivy sack, add a mini tent to the head end and the bivy tent is ready. Due to the limited space, as well as low comfort, the Biwack tent is a niche product. For a short bikepacking trip, the bivy tent can be an alternative to a bivy sack or a 1-person tent.

Advantages and disadvantages of the Biwack tent

✅ Unbeatable light tent ✅ Unbeatable small tent pack size ❌ Low comfort ❌ Hardly any space: Can only be used for sleeping

A roll-up tent is more suitable for weekend trips by car. I mention this design therefore only for the sake of completeness. The poles are integrated into the tent. The tent practically pops up by itself when it is opened. Thus it stands within a few seconds and is also quickly packed again.

However, due to its construction, the packed tent is very heavy and large. This makes it unsuitable as a tent for bike touring and certainly not as a bikepacking tent. A throw tent is also not wind and weather resistant. Tents of this type are therefore more often found at festivals.

Conclusion – Tent construction

At the beginning of this article we clarified your requirements for a tent. Then we took a close look at the most important features when buying a tent. Now you know the advantages and disadvantages of the different types of tents. So match your requirements with the features of the tent builders and then make a buying decision.

The tents presented in this article can also help you decide. Do you have any questions or suggestions for additions? Then feel free to write me a comment 🙂

Ultralight sleeping pad test & comparison – find your next featherweight companion for trekking, bikepacking and all other outdoor adventures. Great overview and practical test

Wild camping in Europe – where is it legal and where is it illegal? In this article you will find the complete overview with all countries

Das könnte dich auch interessieren

Bikepacking Bags – Review & Comparison (Ultimate…

Smart roller trainer test – 16 roller…

SOTO Windmaster Test & Experiences – Wind…

Michael Luplow

Schreibe einen kommentar cancel reply.

Really Big Bike Ride

The Best Bikepacking and Bicycle Touring Tents And How To Choose One

Choosing the right tent can make or break a cycle touring or bikepacking trip.

Bikepacking tents are a relatively new concept. Just a few years ago, this uber-niche category of tent didn’t exist.

Even now, cycle touring is still a relatively niche activity.  However, the recent resurgence of interest under the guise of bikepacking has exploded the marketing of lightweight, bike-based kit.

Due to this influx of popularity, there are now specific bikepacking and bicycle touring tents available on the market.

Which makes selecting the best bikepacking tent for cycle touring all the more subjective. More choice = more confusion.

What are the important characteristics of a bikepacking or cycle touring tent?

To help answer this question I’ve decided to offer guiding principles for choosing the best bikepacking tent based on my experiences cycle touring in over 40 countries.

What’s the difference between a tent for hiking and camping and a cycle touring or bikepacking tent?

Before we jump into the best tents for bikepacking and cycle touring, it’s important to understand the industries from which we choose a tent. Tents are made for many specialist reasons and hiking is a popular one.

The best tent for hiking would be super lightweight and portable. Since a hiking tent is carried by one or two people in a backpack, weight is a major consideration.

Bikepacking tents vs tent for hiking

That may not necessarily be the same criteria for cycle touring. Since you have a bicycle to bear the load you may prefer the extra space of a larger tent.

A tent for climbing on the other hand would be designed for strength and durability. Pitching a tent on the side of a mountain requires additional ruggedness and toughness. Arguably, the best tent pegs money can buy would come in handy too.

Essential questions to ask yourself before buying a tent for cycle touring

First up, where are you going and how long for? Do you even need a tent?

When I cycled from Vietnam to the UK , I immediately realised once in Vietnam that a decent hammock would have been WAY more appropriate for cycle touring in South East Asia.

Stubbornly, I persisted with the tent and found out the hard way that ‘camping’ is not such a big thing. It essentially looks like you’re hiding in the bushes. Not cool in a place like Vietnam.

The humidity was stifling, which made the tent so unappealing that in the end, I simply slept on top of the tent using the canvas like a bivvy bag.

What is the best tent for bikepacking and cycling touring?

The point I make here is that the first consideration when choosing the right tent is context. How will you use the tent?

Is it a long-distance solo journey or a multi-month family cycle tour?

Are you a couple going on a short bikepacking jaunt in the UK or a multicountry ‘world cycle’?

Start to think about what you want from a night under canvas. There are many ways to sleep out at night. There is little to recommend the best tent for cycle touring except the requirements of your trip.

When I collected my Dawes Galaxy from Spa Cycles in 2011, the chap that built the bike, Andrew, recommended that no tent or bedding were required. Simply visit a local supermarket and pilfer a pile of cardboard – bed and shelter all in one move.

That said if you still need recommendations on the qualities of a decent tent for cycle touring, here’s a shortlist of the best tents for bikepacking and cycle touring according to dozens of experienced cyclists, adventurers and bikepackers.

Expert Buyer’s Guide: How to Choose the Perfect Bikepacking Tent for Your Adventure

As you embark on your epic bikepacking adventure, the importance of choosing the right tent cannot be underestimated. Your tent will be your home away from home, providing shelter and comfort after long days of pedaling.

With so many options on the market, finding the best bikepacking tent that suits your needs can be overwhelming. But fear not!

We’ve reviewed the bikepacking kit that we feel offers the best bang for your buck – to help you make an informed decision.

Consider these essential factors when reviewing bikepacking tents:

Packability: As a bikepacker, efficient use of space is paramount. Look for a tent that not only offers reliable protection when set up but also packs away neatly and securely.

Opt for a size and weight that complements your bikepacking style. If you have a large bag and don’t mind a bit of extra weight, a roomier tent may be suitable.

However, if you prioritize minimizing weight and space, go for an ultralight option. Remember, a compact tent is also practical when attaching it to buses or shipping it during your travels, potentially reducing costs.

Set up: A quick and hassle-free tent setup can make a world of difference, especially after a long day of riding. Consider the weather conditions you’ll encounter and the lighting available for setting up camp.

Look for a bikepacking tent with a straightforward setup process, as complex procedures and fiddly poles can be frustrating and time-consuming.

Pro tip: Before embarking on your adventure, practice setting up your tent in your backyard a few times to ensure you are familiar with the process.

Size matter with bikepacking tents

Weight: Every ounce counts when you’re on a bikepacking trip, so the weight of your tent is crucial. Ultralight tents are an excellent choice, particularly if you ride a lightweight bike.

However, if you’re going on a short trip or are new to bikepacking, you may not need the lightest tent available, which often comes at a premium price.

Durability: Investing in a sturdy and long-lasting tent is a wise decision, especially if you plan on frequent bikepacking adventures.

Focus on finding a tent made from weatherproof and durable materials, particularly if you expect to encounter challenging conditions like rain, wind, or rugged terrain.

Some bikepacking tents come with warranties, with options ranging from two to three years or even a lifetime guarantee.

Size: When it comes to size, consider both the packed-down dimensions and the tent’s actual size once pitched. We’ve already discussed the importance of packability, so now let’s focus on the tent’s interior space.

Determine whether you prefer a one-person tent for solo adventures or if you need more room with a two-person tent for couples or friends travelling together.

For individuals with ample gear, a larger tent or one with plenty of storage space might be necessary. Additionally, consider the height of the tent, as taller individuals might not be comfortable in smaller, more compact tents.

By carefully considering these factors, you can confidently choose the best bikepacking tent for your unique adventure, ensuring a comfortable and memorable journey. Happy riding!

Bikepacking Tents Reviews – The Best Bike Touring Tents of 2022/3

Big agnes copper spur hv ul ultralight bikepacking tent.

The Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL Ultralight Bikepacking Tent* is an ultralight tent that recently underwent a redesign, offering steeper walls and more interior space.

It’s a practical choice for weight-conscious adventurers who prefer proper tent poles over trekking poles.

While it might not suit taller and broader individuals sharing it, this tent excels for solo hikers seeking a lightweight option for summer and spring tours.

The North Face Stormbreak 1

If you anticipate windy and wild weather on your tour, The North Face Stormbreak 1* is an ideal choice. Its X-pole design provides structural stability against strong winds, while the mesh netting ensures good ventilation.

With a lightweight package and clever colour coding for easy assembly, this tent is perfect for solo bike tourers looking for a reliable and quick-pitch option.

MSR Hubba Hubba NX 2-Person Lightweight Backpacking Tent

For the luxury bike tourer seeking extra space for both gear and themselves, the MSR Hubba Hubba NX 2-Person Lightweight Backpacking Tent is a great choice. Its exoskeleton frame allows for quick and easy pitching, and the unified rainfly keeps the inside dry in wet weather.

Despite not being the lightest on the list, its spaciousness and small packed size make it a fantastic option for bike packing.

Winterial Single Person Bivy Tent

Budget-conscious adventurers will appreciate the Winterial Single Person Bivy Tent. Weighing under 3 pounds and packing into a compact bag, this bivy tent offers a cost-effective solution for bike touring.

Its 2 hoop design simplifies pitching, and the inner mesh material ensures proper ventilation for warmer months. With a rain fly for rainy days, this tent is a valuable choice for three-season adventures.

MSR Hubba Hubba 3-Person Lightweight Backpacking Tent

Planning a summer bike-packing adventure with friends or want to share space with your gear? The MSR Hubba Hubba 3-Person Lightweight Backpacking Tent is perfect for such scenarios.

Although made for backpacking, this hardwearing three-person tent is spacious enough for a trip of adventurers to feel comfortable. Plus, the Easton Syclone poles are virtually indestructible. It’s fully waterproof too.

Remember: Things to Consider When Buying a Bikepacking Tent for Cycle Touring

• Weight: Choose lightweight tents to reduce the burden while cycling.
• Tent Style: Consider bivy tents, single pole designs, or exoskeletal frame tents based on your preferences and requirements.
• Internal Tent Space: Determine how many people and gear you want to fit inside the tent.
• Packed Size: Ensure the tent fits onto your bike without hindering your movements.
• Features Explained: Familiarize yourself with tent shells, ventilation options, pitching methods, stakes, and pole designs.

The Best Bikepacking Tent is the one fits your adventure

Finding the best tent for cycle touring and bikepacking is essential to ensure a comfortable and enjoyable journey.

The options we’ve listed above cater to various preferences and needs, from ultralight solo hikers to adventurers seeking extra space.

While material and construction technology has moved on, I still consider the Hilleberg Nallo 2GT a great all-rounder. Failing that, a hammock is also a great choice depending on the climate.

Consider your requirements, and select the perfect tent that will be your reliable companion on your next bike touring adventure. Happy riding!

Have you got a recommendation for the best bikepacking tent? Share your favourite below:

Gear-obsessed editors choose every product we review. We may earn commission if you buy from a link. How we test gear.

11 Best Tents for Bikepacking and Camping

Find your perfect adventure partner with these top tents of the year.

Whether you need an ultralight tent to strap on your handlebars or a large home-away-from-home for a trailhead basecamp, these top 11 tents of the year will keep you safe, dry, and comfortable when you head out into backcountry by car or bike.

Check out quick reviews below of our top five tents, or scroll deeper for more helpful buying info and full reviews of those models plus other high-ranking options.

Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL 2

Total Expert Score: 95/100

The most spacious and lightweight bikepacking tent for two.

Big Agnes Fly Creek HV UL 2

Total Expert Score: 87/100

This is one of the lightest tents favored by bikepacking experts. 

Coleman Sundome 4

Total Expert Score:  95/100

A popular budget and family-friendly tent best for car camping.

REI Kingdom 6 Tent

Total Expert Score:  93/100

A spacious two-room tent for your trailhead basecamp.

Kelty Kelty Salida 2

Total Expert Score:  88/100

A simple, affordable tent for solo bikepackers on a budget.

Backpacking vs. Car Camping

If you plan to carry your tent by back or bike, backpacking tents are your best bet. They come in one to four-person models. Plus-size models offer greater length and width, but experts recommend going for a size higher than your number of people if you need extra space for storage and gear.

Ultralight backpacking tents now weigh less than 3 pounds, but their lightweight material often sacrifices some durability, which means you need to be extra careful on long backcountry rides. For many, regular lightweight tents offer a good compromise between toughness and weight—on a bike, those few extra grams may be less noticeable and you get a more resilient product (and often a few more features, including extra room). Keep in mind that additional elements like footprints, rainflies, stakes, and guylines for non-freestanding tents will also add weight.

If you prefer to trek out into the outdoors by car rather than by bike, car camping tents are an ideal choice. They typically come in four-, six-, or eight-person models for larger groups. They will be heavier, but often have more rain protection, storage space and can be easier to assemble. For either type of tent, also consider qualities that improve its livability, such as number of doors and vestibules that make it easier to share a tight space with multiple people.

How We Rated

We researched 19 expert sources and 2,500 consumer reviews to select the top 11 tents of 2019. To determine our Total Expert Score, we calculate the ratings from expert review sites such as Outdoor Gear Lab , Section Hiker , and Gear We Are , and convert them to a 100-point scale to make it easier for you to weigh the best options. Our Consumer Score represents the percentage of consumers who rated the product at least 4 out of 5 stars on retail sites like Amazon , Moosejaw , REI , and Backcountry .

Best Overall

Total Expert Score: 95/100 | Consumer Score: 83% give it 4 stars or higher A spacious and lightweight tent for two.

Weight: 3 lb. 1 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H): 88 x 52/42 x 40 in. | Doors: 2

The Big Agnes Copper Spur offers the best balance between weight and size, making it the most comfortable backpacking tent for two. At only 3 pounds, it still features two doors and vestibules, plenty of headroom to sit up, and interior pockets for storage. Plus it’s light enough for most bikepacking adventures.

The Big Agnes Copper Spur was highly rated by 11 out of 19 of our expert sources, and ranked #1 by Section Hiker , Clever Hiker , and Digital Trends . Outdoor Gear Lab gave it their Editor’s Choice, writing that it’s “truly a tent that we could take anywhere, from sea kayaking adventures to peak bagging missions.”

In addition to its roomy interior, one REI reviewer noted, “It was easy to set up and pack-up.” Many other reviews remarked on how it stayed dry and secure in rain and wind. This tent also comes in sizes for one, three, or four people.

Expert Pick

Total Expert Score: 87/100 | Consumer Score: 82% give it 4 stars or higher Big Agnes’ Fly Creek is the lightest tent favored by bikepacking experts.

Weight: 2 lb. 5 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 86 x 52/42 x 40 in. | Doors: 1

Because of the the brand’s popularity among bikepackers, Big Agnes is releasing new bikepack models of the Fly Creek and Copper Spur designed as more bike-friendly with shorter tent poles that fit better in a handlebar or frame bag. These tents won’t be available until April 2019, but until then, the 2018 Fly Creek HV UL remains the top bikepacking expert pick, recommended by Bikepacking.com , Dirt Rag Magazine , Gear Patrol , and more.

Though it’s not freestanding, the Fly Creek is the lightest tent with a packed weight of just over 2 lbs. Bikepacking.com wrote about the Fly Creek HV UL1 mntGLO model with LED overhead lights that “for its weight, size, and ease of use, it’s simply hard to beat as a solo bikepacking tent.”

One user wrote on REI , “Yes, it is small. Yes, it is delicate. But, it is also amazingly light, and it is more durable than you would expect.” If you’re willing to sacrifice some durability for less weight on your bike, the Fly Creek is your best pick.

Best Car Camping

Total Expert Score: 95/100 | Consumer Score: 88% give it 4 stars or higher A popular budget- and family-friendly tent for car camping.

Weight: 10.6 lb. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 100 x 86 x 59 in. | Doors: 1

Coleman Sundome 4-Person

There’s a reason for this tent’s popularity: The Sundome is cheap, versatile, and easy to set up, with decent water resistance and two large windows for ventilation. The Gear Hunt gave it 5 stars, writing that it “has all of the features one would expect to find in a camping tent” at a lower-than-average price.

Along with other consistently positive Amazon reviews, one user wrote that “it will work well for short camping trips with a small family, couple, or individual.” If you only take a few camping trips per year, the Sundome two, four, or six person may be for you.

Best Family

Rei kingdom 6.

Total Expert Score: 93/100 | Consumer Score: 79% give it 4 stars or higher A spacious two-room tent for families and larger groups.

Weight: 19 lb. 12 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 120 x 100 x 75 in. | Doors: 2

REI Co-op Kingdom 6

One of the most spacious and versatile tents, the Kingdom comes with a curtain in the center to make an extra room, as either another bedroom, pet or storage space, or living area. With so much room, it’s a great option for family trips to the Vermont’s Kingdom trails or any other adventure destination.

Switchback Travel named it the #1 camping tent of the year, describing its thoughtful design “with plenty of interior storage, a center divider, and very large doors on both ends.”

One REI reviewer said, “We easily fit a family of 5.” Experts and consumers alike both recommend springing for the “garage” attachment to store gear and supplies, especially in poor weather. Along with an optional additional vestibule, REI also offers the tent in four- and 8-person models.

Kelty Salida 2

Total Expert Score: 88/100 | Consumer Score: 89% give it 4 stars or higher An easy, affordable tent for solo bikepackers.

Weight: 4 lb. 9 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 88 x 55/45 x 43 in. | Doors: 1

For a backpack-friendly two-person tent, the Kelty Salida delivers the most value at a low price. With one door and vestibule space for your gear, this tent can easily accommodate a solo bikepacking trip, though some users claim it’s a little cramped for two.

Giving it 5 stars, Gear We Are said, “It’s relatively easy to set up and transport, and is surprisingly adept at keeping the elements at bay.” Though there are more expensive, lighter tents than the Salida 2, one REI review claims that for its price, it’s the “perfect size for backpacking and light enough for long trips.”

More High-Ranking Options to Consider:

Msr hubba hubba nx.

Total Expert Score: 93/100 | Consumer Score: 94% give it 4 stars or higher A durable weekend backpacking tent with weight that two can share.

Weight: 3 lb. 13 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 84 x 50 x 39 in | Doors: 2

MSR Hubba Hubba NX 2

The MSR Hubba Hubba NX competes closely with Big Agnes’ Copper Spur with similar space and comfort, including two doors and vestibules, but ultimately compromises on some weight and storm protection for durability.

Appearing on 9 expert best-tent lists, the MSR Hubba Hubba NX was also labeled the “best weekend backpacker” by Digital Trends . They wrote, “If you’re willing to sacrifice a bit of weight for added durability, the MSR Hubba Hubba NX is a high-quality option.”

A buyer on Moosejaw described this tent as the “perfect combination of functionality and light weight.” Others claim that it holds up well in storms, even if it doesn’t beat the Copper Spur for weather protection.

Big Agnes Tiger Wall UL 2

Total Expert Score: 85/100 | Consumer Score: 65% give it 4 stars or higher One of the lightest backpacking tents you can buy—under 3 pounds.

Weight: 2 lb. 8 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 87 x 52 x 39 in. | Doors: 2

Big Agnes has designed the Tiger Wall as even lighter than the Copper Spur, though slightly more than the Fly Creek. Two doors and dual vestibules for your gear will make bikepacking in wet weather easier. Its semi-freestanding design with light material may not be as suitable for rocky terrain or heavy winds, but its mesh walls provide great ventilation and comfort in better conditions.

Backpacker concludes, “If you want an easy pitch, two doors, and freestanding convenience for a hair over a pound per person, this is your tent.” One reviewer on Moosejaw wrote, “Brilliant hybrid of a Fly Creek and Copper Spur. Light weight. Easy to pitch. Very roomy.”

Alps Mountaineering Lynx 1

Total Expert Score: 83/100 | Consumer Score: 93% give it 4 stars or higher An affordable single-person tent for solo hikers and mountain climbers.

Weight: 4 lb. 4 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 90 x 32 x 36 in. | Doors: 1

ALPS Mountaineering Lynx 1

If you’re the type who prefers solo adventures, the Alps Mountaineering Lynx is a one-person shelter that will keep you secure and comfortable without weighing you down.

The Gear Hunt gave it 4.75 stars, noting that its 4-pound weight “makes it easy to attach to your hiking or climbing gear.” Many Amazon reviews remarked on its great value for under $100. “This tent performs like it should cost around $400,” one said.

REI Half Dome 2 Plus

Total Expert Score: 90/100 | Consumer Score: 83% give it 4 stars or higher A roomier two-person tent perfect for bike touring.

Weight: 5 lb. 5 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 92 x 56 x 44 in. | Doors: 2

REI Co-op Half Dome 2 Plus Tent

Though the REI Half Dome is a 2 person tent, the “plus” indicates that it’s a little more spacious for taller people or additional gear. If your bike can handle hauling a few extra pounds, this REI tent is made from more durable, waterproof material compared to other ultralight backpacking tents.

Backpackers.com selected the REI Half Dome as their Editor’s Choice, claiming that you’ll “sleep like a royal family out on the trail in a well-designed space filled with abundant features and comforts.”

One REI reviewer called it a great bike touring tent: “It’s the perfect size/weight for touring on bike. Easy set up! The first night of use it rained a few hours and the tent stayed perfectly dry inside.”

Eureka Copper Canyon 6

Total Expert Score: 86/100 | Consumer Score: 90% give it 4 stars or higher A massive car camping tent to replace the family home.

Weight: 23 lb. 2 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 10 x 10 x 7 ft. | Doors: 1

If you prefer camping at the trailhead (and driving to get there), the Eureka Canyon is a big, boxy, six-person tent with space for sleeping, relaxing, and all of your gear. It includes a center curtain to divide separate rooms, a gear loft, one large door, and three large side windows.

Digital Trends wrote that despite its large size, “one person can quickly set it up and break it down.” Backcountry.com buyers also love that you can stand up inside. “Very heavy but PERFECT for car camping when space isn’t an issue,” one wrote.

Nemo Hornet UL 2

Total Expert Score: 91/100 | Consumer Score: 83% give it 4 stars or higher An ultralight, three-season tent for two.

Weight: 2 lb. 5 oz. | Dimensions (L x W x H) : 85 x 51/43 x 39 in. | Doors: 2

NEMO Hornet UL 2

Rivaling most one-person tents, the Nemo Hornet UL 2 is light enough for one, but spacious enough for two. Its mesh walls and sturdy panels nicely balance air circulation with privacy and weather protection. Outdoor Gear Lab gave the Nemo Hornet 5 stars, writing that it’s targeted to “backpackers seeking both performance and creature comforts in their equipment.”

An REI buyer called it “just right” in terms of size and weight because it’s “lighter than most one-person tents, but fits two people.” Others also found it suitable for long-distance backpacking and mountaineering.

Paige Szmodis is an editor for Runner’s World, Bicycling, and Popular Mechanics, who researches and writes home, tech, and outdoor product reviews and news.

.css-1t6om3g:before{width:1.75rem;height:1.75rem;margin:0 0.625rem -0.125rem 0;content:'';display:inline-block;-webkit-background-size:1.25rem;background-size:1.25rem;background-color:#F8D811;color:#000;background-repeat:no-repeat;-webkit-background-position:center;background-position:center;}.loaded .css-1t6om3g:before{background-image:url(/_assets/design-tokens/bicycling/static/images/chevron-design-element.c42d609.svg);} Bikes & Gear

These 2 Electric Bikes Are Currently 40% Off

The 13 Best Electric Bikes, Tested by Our Editors

Easton Twilight Criterium Special Episode

The Best Cycling Gear From REI’s Memorial Day Sale

Shimano Launches 12-Speed GRX Di2

Tested: BlackHeart's Gravel AL

Everything to Know When Buying a Kids’ Bike

What to Shop at Pearl iZumi’s Memorial Day Sale

The 9 Best Repair Stands for Every Type of Bike

Kona Is Back in Loving Arms & Facing a Hazy Future

These Electric Bikes Are Up to 40% Off Right Now

• Hiking Shoes
• Hiking Boots
• Hiking Sandals
• Trail Runners
• Base layers
• Hiking Shirts
• Fleece Jackets
• Softshell Jackets
• Rain jackets
• Down Jackets
• Hiking Pants
• Hiking Shorts
• Base Layers
• Rain Jackets
• Hiking Bras
• Baby Carriers
• Cookware Sets
• Water Filters
• Water Purifiers
• Sleeping Bags
• Sleeping Pads
• Hiking Poles
• GPS Devices
• Solar Chargers
• Dive Regulators
• Dive Computers
• Dive Watches
• Dive Wetsuits
• Dive Gloves
• Dive Lights
• Dive Knives
• Spearfishing Wetsuits
• Spearfishing Masks
• Spearfishing Fins
• Spearfishing Watches
• Freediving Wetsuits
• Freediving Masks
• Freediving Fins
• Freediving Watches
• Sit On Top Kayaks
• Inflatable Kayaks
• Fishing Kayaks
• Tandem Kayaks
• Touring Kayaks
• Kayak Paddles
• Kayak Seats
• Kayak Roof Racks
• Kayak Carts
• Stand Up Paddle Boards
• Touring SUPs
• Inflatable SUPs
• Fishing SUPs
• SUPs For Yoga
• SUPs For Surfing
• SUP Paddles
• Climbing Boots
• Belay Devices
• Climbing Shoes
• Women's Climbing Shoes
• Bouldering Shoes
• Approach Shoes
• Climbing Pants
• Bouldering Pants
• Mountain Bikes for Men
• Mountain Bikes for Women
• MTB Handlebars
• Bike Saddles
• Bike Computers
• Bike Lights
• MTB Jackets
• Bike Helmets
• Bike Packing Gear
• Fat Biking Gear
• Ski Bindings
• Ski Helmets
• Ski Goggles
• Ski Jackets
• Snowboarding Bindings
• Snowboarding Boots
• Snowboard Helmets
• Snowboard Goggles
• Snowboard Pants
• Snowboard Jackets
• Snowshoe Poles
• Avalanche Beacons
• Avalanche Probes
• Avalanche Shovels
• Ski Backpacks
• Surfboards For Beginners
• Surfboards For Kids
• Surfboard For Small Waves
• Soft Top Surfboards
• Foam Surfboards
• Body Boards
• Boogie Boards
• Kiteboarding Kites
• Kitesurfing Boards
• Kiteboarding Harnesses
• Surfing Wetsuits
• Men's Rash Guards
• Women's Rash Guards
• Board Leashes
• DLSR Travel Cameras
• Mirrorles Travel Cameras
• Point and Shoot Travel Cameras
• Fuji Travel Lenses
• Nikon Travel Lenses
• Tripods for Travel
• DLSR Landscape Cameras
• Mirrorles Landscape Cameras
• Point and Shoot Landscape Cameras
• Fuji Landscape Lenses
• Nikon Landcape Lenses
• Canon Landcape Lenses
• Tripods for Landscape Photo
• Wildlife Cameras
• Wildlife Lenses
• Wildlife Tripods
• Wildlife Monopods
• Birdlife Cameras
• Birdlife Lenses
• Surfboards For Small Waves

Best Tents for Bike Touring of 2024

The map is spread out on your dining table (or more likely your computer screen) and you are planning your next epic adventure. The roads less travelled, destinations you’ve only dreamed of, and adventures into the wilderness.

But wait…the wilderness doesn’t have hotels!!

So it’s time to find a suitable shelter that you can take with you. What is the best tent for bike touring, you ask? It’s a tent that can be packed up small enough to fit on the handlebars of your bike, one that is lightweight so you aren’t carrying too much weight, and one that can handle any weather conditions you might encounter along the way, anything from rain and wind through to hot summer nights.

We scoured high and low to find the best tent for bike touring. There are plenty of options to choose from; tiny tents, spacious tents, tents with storage, multi-person or single person tents. We shortlisted the best options with varying qualities to help you find the perfect tent for your next bike touring adventure.

For more of our top bike touring gear recommendations, check out the Best Stoves for Bike Touring .

Quick Answer - The Best Tents for Bike Touring

• Big Agnes Fly Creek HV UL2 View at REI
• The North Face Stormbreak 1 View at Backcountry
• MSR Hubba Tour 1 View at Moosejaw
• Winterial Single Person Bivy Tent View at Amazon
• Nemo Apollo 3P View at Amazon

Comparison Table - Best Tents for Bike Touring

Reviews - the best bike touring tents, big agnes fly creek hv ul2.

• Canopy Material : Nylon/polyester mesh
• Capacity : 1P / 2P
• Design Type : Semi-Freestanding
• Floor Area : 28.0 sq ft
• Weight : 2 lbs 04 oz
• Season : 3-Season
• Sleeping Capacity : 2-Person
• Waterproof? : Yes
• Packed Dimensions : 5.5” x 12”
• Pole Material : Aluminium
• Multiple Internal Pockets For Storing Gear
• Durable Rain Fly For Protection In Bad Weather
• Tent Designed Specifically For Bike Packing With A Small Packed Size

The Big Agnes Fly Creek HV UL2 is an ultralight tent that has been recently redesigned to give it steeper walls and more interior space than the older model. It’s a great option if you’re looking to cut weight but aren’t willing to splurge on a high end, super light tent. 

What we loved the most about this tent is it is light but still can be set up with proper tent poles. Some other ultralight tents on this list need to be pitched with trekking poles, which is resourceful but it puts some people, especially new backpackers off. 

The Fly Creek HV UL2 might not cut it for true ultralight hikers who count every ounce. Our biggest drawback is the single door. That’s fine if you’re going to use this tent for solo adventures but it’s a real pain for two people. On that note, unless you and your partner are short and slim, sleeping two people in this thing is going to be a struggle. 

In conclusion, this is a good option for solo hikers who are looking for a practical lightweight tent to use in summer and spring.

The Fly Creek HV UL also comes in a 1-person version

The North Face Stormbreak 1

• Canopy Material : Polyester Taffeta
• Design Type : Freestanding
• Weight : 3.2 lbs
• Sleeping Capacity : 1 Person
• Packed Dimensions : 7” x 9” x 21”
• Small Design Keeps It Lightweight
• Mesh Netting For Good Ventilation
• Simple Design Makes It Easy To Pitch

BEST FOR: WINDY AND WILD WEATHER

Heading out when there may be some wind and wild weather? The North Face Stormbreak 1 is an ideal choice for you. It has an X pole design, where the poles cross over each other, giving it plenty of structural stability to stand up to strong winds. The aluminium poles and minimal design keep this tent a lightweight package. 

The mesh netting allows for good ventilation, while the rain fly holds up to rain. The North Face thought of some clever tricks to make this tent easy to assemble by color-coding the corners of the main shell with the rain fly so you will easily get it right every time. The tent also features a small vestibule allowing you to store your packs and any other small items you want to keep dry.

This tent is specifically designed to sleep one, and for the price point paired with a good quality package it would be hard to go wrong selecting this tent for your next adventure.

MSR Hubba Tour 1

• Canopy Material : DWR Coated Ripstop Nylon
• Design Type : Semi Freestanding
• Weight : 4.7 lbs
• Packed Dimensions : 7” x 17”
• Pole Material : Aluminum
• Short Poles Allow For Small Packed Size
• Spacious Vestibule For Storing Gear Overnight
• Unified Rain Fly For Quick Pitching

BEST FOR: THE LUXURY BIKE TOURER

If sliding into a small bivy tent is not your idea of a good time, and you’re looking for something that is a little more spacious for both you and your gear, then the MSR Hubba Tour 1 could be the tent for you.

While this tent is not as light as some of the others on this list, for its spacious size it is still a light-weight package. Additionally its packed size is a mere 5.5” x 17” which makes it a great choice for bike packing.

The specially designed tent, with an exoskeleton frame (meaning the poles are on the outside of the tent) makes pitching this tent quick and easy. Paired with the unified rainfly, the main canopy is also waterproof, meaning even in wet weather the inside of the tent will stay clean and dry. The large vestibule allows plenty of space for your gear or lots of space for you to wait out a bad storm.

Winterial Single Person Bivy Tent

• Canopy Material : Nylon
• Weight : 2.9 lbs
• Packed Dimensions : 18" x 4.5" x 4"
• Includes Cords And Stakes To Secure The Tent
• Ventilated Mesh Inner Walling To Keep You Cool And Comfortable

BEST FOR: BUDGET CONSCIOUS ADVENTURERS

The Winterial Single Person Bivy Tent is an excellent choice for those who don’t want to spend too much money. This is the lowest cost option on the list, however it is not lacking in all the key areas that you would look for when purchasing a tent for bike touring. 

Weighing in at under 3 pounds and packing up into a relatively compact bag, it’s perfect for strapping onto your bike and hitting the road. This is a bivy tent (see Features Explained section below for more explanation) which means it is short and you will not be able to stand or sit in the tent. The benefit of the small bivy design is that it uses less material and makes this tent super lightweight.

Pitching the tent is easy as it uses a 2 hoop design, where the lightweight poles simply snap together and thread through the tent loops to create the structure. The inner mesh material allows for plenty of ventilation, perfect for the warmer months. Plus it has a rain fly for when the weather turns bad, making it suitable for heavy rainfall. This tent will see you through three seasons and is a great value for cost option.

Nemo Apollo 3P

• Canopy Material : Ripstop Silnylon
• Design Type : Non-Freestanding
• Weight : 1.11 lbs
• Sleeping Capacity : 3-Person
• Waterproof? : No
• Packed Dimensions : 5.1” x 18.9”
• Lightweight And Small Packed Size
• Adjustable Pole To Change The Height Of The Tent

BEST FOR: SUMMER ADVENTURES WITH FRIENDS

If you’re headed out for a summer bike-packing adventure with some friends, or headed out solo but want to keep you bike and gear in the tent with you, then the Nemo Apollo 3P is just what you need.

The simplistic adjustable center pole design makes this tent extremely quick to set up with the ability to vary the height based on your requirements. The single wall construction and floorless design paired with the single pole makes this an ultra-light tent especially considering it will fit up to 3 people. 

Travelling with a friend? You can easily share the weight by splitting up the poles, stakes and tent shell, which will leave each of you carrying less than 1lb of shelter weight. While not completely waterproof, this tent is designed with durable materials and is able to withstand light winds, making it perfect for summertime when the weather is typically more mild.

THINGS TO CONSIDER WHEN BUYING A TENT FOR BIKE TOURING

When bike touring , every ounce matters. The more weight you have, the harder you have to work to carry it around. Lightweight tent options are plentiful and there are plenty of multi-person tents available to share the weight of the tent with your fellow bike tourers.

There are three main styles of bike touring tents:

These are the smallest style of bikepacking tent. They have minimal height and are very compact and lightweight. This style will generally only fit one person and their sleeping gear. You will not be able to sit up inside the tent. Read more about Bivy Tents and Bivy Sacks here.

Single Pole

This style of tent has a single main pole in the center and the edges are staked out to give the tent its shape. Single pole tents come in a variety of sizes. They can be lightweight but do take some practice to pitch.

Exoskeletal Frame

Tents with an external frame use poles that snap together to form the skeleton (structure) of the frame. They can come in either multi-hooped design, X- design, or T-section. These tents are quick to pitch and semi-freestanding. They still require staking but will hold their structure even without being staked down, making set-up super easy.

INTERNAL TENT SPACE

How many people do you want to fit in the tent? Do you want to fit your gear and packs in there too? These are all questions to ask yourself as they will help determine the best tent option for you. 

An advantage of choosing a multi-person tent instead of each person on the trip having a solo tent is the overall weight is not doubled from a single to double person tent. This means you can share the weight of your tent with your bike touring buddy, helping to reduce the overall weight each of you are carrying.

PACKED SIZE

Typically the length of the poles has the biggest impact on the length of the packed size. Ensure the packed tent can fit onto your bike, whether it’s inside bags or perhaps on your front handlebars. Alternatively you can store the poles and stakes separately to the canopy and rainfly to help distribute the weight.

FEATURES EXPLAINED

Tent shells.

This is the outer shell that is designed out of waterproof material and will often have additional waterproof coatings. The seams on the rainfly will also be specially sealed to increase the waterproof qualities. This shell is attached over the top of the tent.

Ventilated Mesh Inner

This is often the inner layer and main component of the tent shell. It’s made from a mesh material which allows for ventilation, helping you stay cool and comfortable while camping in the warmer months. During the warmer months and in good weather these can be used on their own. If used in conjunction with the rainfly, a mesh inner allows for airflow which decreases the chance of condensation forming. Less condensation = more heat so you can stay toasty in the cooler months as well.

Unified Rain Fly

This is a single shell that integrates the rainfly into the main component of the tent shell. Tents with a unified rainfly can be pitched without getting the inside wet even if you’re setting up in the rain.

This is the term used to describe putting the tent up.

These are made from metal or strong plastic and are used to hold the tent to the ground.

These are most commonly made from aluminium and will either dismantle or be adjustable so they can be stored in short lengths for easy transport. The aluminium poles that dismantle are very easy to use, simply by sliding them in or out of one another to create longer poles that are used in the exoskeletal tent design.   

POLE DESIGNS

There are a variety of designs that use aluminium poles that join together. The advantage of this is the poles are compact yet when joined together they form a flexible yet strong structure. The tent shell is then attached to this structure. There are a variety of ways these poles can be used:

Hooped designs use lengths of aluminium poles that create a flexible semi circle. A tent with a hooped design will feature 2 or more hoops that are placed at either end of the tent, which creates the structure of the tent.

X-Style designs use equal lengths of aluminium poles that create a flexible semi circle. Two of these poles are crossed over one another to create an X shape and form the structure of the tent.

T-Style designs use two varying lengths of aluminium poles. The longer length pole forms a semicircle while the shorter length poles connect to the middle of the long pole to form a T-shape.

Freestanding tents are a sturdy structure that do not require stakes to be inserted into the ground to hold them upright.

Semi-Freestanding tents are a sturdy structure that can stand on its own when pitched. However, they require staking into the ground to hold them in place.

Non-Freestanding tents have no independent structure and can not stand on their own without being staked into the ground.

For more of our top bicycle touring gear recommendations, check out these popular buyer's guides:

Touring Bikes

Bike Handlebar Bags

Touring Tires

Panniers for Touring

Touring Saddles

Bicycle touring. Outdoor adventures. Solo female travel.

The best tents for bicycle touring in 2024- buyer’s guide

Cycling tours are a great way to explore new places and get some exercise. But after spending a lot of time on your bike, getting a good night’s sleep is crucial. A good tent is one of the most essential pieces of gear.

There are a lot of different tents on the market, so it can be tough to know which one is right for you. But don’t worry – I am here to help. In this article, I’ll give you a rundown of the best tents for bicycle touring so you can choose the best one for your next adventure.

This post may contain affiliate links and I may earn a small commission when you purchase products by clicking on the links (at no additional cost to you). It will help me keep working on this blog. Thank you for your support!

How to choose a tent for bicycle touring?

I am going on my first trip by bike. Can you recommend a good tent for bicycle touring? I’ve heard and seen this question a thousand times. The problem is there is no right answer .

Every tourist and cyclist has different needs and a different budget. A perfect tent doesn’t exist. Finding the best one involves trade-offs between weight, sturdiness, price, and a few other factors.

Are you planning to wild camp or stay on official campsites?

If you’re not planning to wild camp but only stay on official campsites or in people’s gardens (yes, that’s possible thanks to great initiatives like Welcome to My Garden! ), you don’t need to think about the colour of your tent.

If you’re going to stealth camp, you definitely want to stay unseen for your safety. In this case, dark green or brown will always be better than flashy yellow or red tents that look cool on Instagram.

What weather are you expecting?

Before choosing a tent for your bicycle tour, consider the weather you can expect. If you plan to cycle the Pamir Highway or Trans Patagonia, your tent must handle unpredictable mountain weather. Some nights will likely be windy and rainy, so you want a sturdy and resilient shelter.

If you’re travelling to the tropics, you want a tent with good ventilation. It also shouldn’t get too hot, so brighter colours that reflect the sun will be an advantage. Especially in countries where Malaria is common, it’s good to have a tent where you can use the mesh separately, without the rain fly. This will protect you from mosquitoes while giving you extra ventilation.

How much money can you spend and how long will you use the tent?

Outdoor gear is expensive. If you are only beginning your bike touring and camping adventure, you don’t want to spend a few hundred bucks only to find out you don’t enjoy it. Many of us also have a very limited trip budget and can’t afford to buy an advanced ultralight tent.

Luckily, there are some decent, cheaper options on the market. Most solid low-budget tents are heavier than the more expensive ones with similar features. Going for something really cheap and ultralight can be a recipe for disaster: breaking poles, leaking fabrics, unstable construction… So, if your most important criterion is the price, look rather at a bit heavier tent. In my rundown below, I will include some low-budget options recommended to me by other bike tourists and outdoor enthusiasts.

There are also other ways to save money when buying a good, cheap tent:

• Shop after the season. September/October offers many great deals, with savings of up to 60 %.
• Buy second-hand. There are many websites and Facebook groups where people sell their used outdoor gear. You can read more about it here .

How important is comfort for you?

Are you looking for a tent that will be only a shelter, a place where you survive the night? Or do you want something where you can sit down, play cards, and feel a bit more at home ?

Every person has different expectations when it comes to comfort when camping. If you plan to travel for many months, you’ll probably need a bit more space. Are you more of a weekend traveller, someone who goes for short but intense bike trips? Then you’d rather want to save weight instead of carrying a big comfy tent.

Tent specs explained

Waterproof rating.

Nobody wants to wake up in a tent with water dripping on their head. That’s why you should always check the waterproof ratings before buying a tent.

They express how much millimetres of water the tent can withstand before it leaks. For example, a tent with a waterproof rating of 1000mm can withstand the weight of 1000mm of water. Theoretically, the higher the waterproof rating, the more water the tent can withstand.

Yet waterproof ratings only tell part of the story. You need to consider the quality of the materials and the construction of the tent. A high-quality tent with a lower waterproof rating can keep you dry for as long as a tent with higher ratings made of cheap materials. Wear and tear, and abrasion also play a role, so it’s important to maintain your gear.

As a rule of thumb, you should choose a tent with at least a 1000 mm waterproof rating.

Packing weight vs trail weight

Most online shops list two values for weight in the tent specs: packing weight and trail weight. Which one is more important, and what do they mean? The trail weight is just the weight of the poles, the body, and the rainfly, unlike the packing weight, which also includes the pegs, guy lines, sack, and other accessories (like a repair kit).

Long story short, you should rather look at the packing weight, not the trail weight.

What are the best tents for bicycle touring?

It would make sense if I start with the tent I use myself. On my bicycle tours, I sleep in a Fjord Nansen Tromvik II . It’s a light (2 kg) 2-person tent that’s pretty spacious (even if I travel with someone, we can put our stuff in the tent).

I am not including it on my recommendation list for two reasons:

• It’s sold out in all the shops I’ve checked.
• I had a few issues with it – the fabric is quite fragile, and the poles let me down a few times. To do justice to the manufacturer, since I complained and received a replacement with an improved design, I haven’t had any problems. But the adventures with Fjord Nansen Tromvik II gave me enough experience to write an article about how to fix the most common issues with a tent .

The pros of this tent are magnificent weather resistance. I survived a few heavy storms in Normandy and windy mountain nights.

So let’s move on to the other tents I chose, based on recommendations from fellow bicycle travellers.

I will start with the “premium” tents between 300 and 600 euros. Later, I will present a few less expensive tents between 49 and 250 euros.

Premium tents for bicycle touring

Big agnes copper spur hv ul 2-person bikepacking tent.

An ideal tent doesn’t exist, but Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL 2 is as close to perfection as it gets. Many 2-person tents are not spacious enough to provide a comfortable shelter to two people, but not this one! At the same time, it only weighs 1,59 kg.

As one of the first manufacturers, Big Agnes offers a special edition for bikepacking and bike touring. These tents have shorter poles to better fit on the handlebar or in the panniers. The stuffing sack has special loops enabling you to attach it with straps to your bike.

Buying an ultralight tent like this comes with a price: the materials are quite fragile, and you must handle the Copper Spur gently. For this price, many people would expect a more durable tent. The weak spots seem to be the floor and the poles.

The regular version is about 50 euros cheaper than the bikepacking one. If you don’t care much about shorter poles and all the bike-specific gadgets, it can be a good way to save money.

Big Agnes Fly Creek UL2 Bikepacking

Another great alternative from Big Agnes is the Fly Creek UL2 Bikepacking . It’s also a two-person tent but significantly smaller than the Copper Spur. It’s a great option if you are willing to trade comfort for weight (only 1,19 kg) and price (about 450 euros).

Fly Creek also comes in a cheaper backpacking version with longer poles and as a 1-persons tent .

This model has many cool pockets and solutions to help you organise your stuff inside the tent and under the rain fly. If you are messy like me, you’ll definitely appreciate that.

Besides the limited living space, another downside of Fly Creek UL2 is the colour. The yellow tent looks awesome in the pictures. But, if you’re camping not far from civilisation, it doesn’t help you to be an invisible ninja.

NEMO Dragonfly 2

If you are looking for a lightweight 2-person tent, Nemo Dragonfly 2 is a great option. Weighing only 1,41 kg, it has enough space for two people with many pockets and large vestibules to store your gear. A special bonus for stargazing lovers: on rainless nights, you can camp without the fly and the non-transparent will still give you a sense of privacy.

Nemo Dragonfly is easy to set up, and the colours blend well with the landscape. The only downsides are the high price (about 450 euros) and the ventilation, especially when two people are in.

Tarptent Moment DW

The Tarptent Moment DW is a lightweight tent perfect for fast-moving adventures.

This one-person tent is easy to set up (it shouldn’t take more than 2 minutes). It is completely freestanding which is super useful when camping on hard ground. The Moment DW is also very light – 993 grams (about 2 lbs.), so it’s easy to carry with you on your travels.

It’s also very water resistant – even in storms – so you can stay dry and safe even when things get rough out there! It has enough space to keep your gear inside.

The best low-budget tents for bicycle touring

In this section, I will present the cheaper tents for bike touring. I will start with the cheapest option.

Quechua MH100

This basic tent from Decathlon costs only 50 euros and is a decent option if you’re on a shoestring budget. It is sturdy and reliable compared to similarly priced tents (like the Vango Soul 100, which is known for its faulty poles).

Quechua MH100 is a two-person tent, and although it’s not very heavy (2,4 kg), it’s rather bulky. It should keep you dry and safe even during heavy rains, but the ventilation is poor when two people are inside.

Vaude Campo Compact XT 2P

If you are looking for a weather-resistant two-person tent for reasonable money, the Vaude Campo Compact XT 2P is a good option. It has excellent waterproof ratings and costs about 160 euros.

It is pretty spacious and has many inner pockets to store your belongings. The construction is simple and easy to set up, ensuring stability even during windy nights. It is available in two colours: red and green, the latter perfectly blending in with the environment when you are wild camping.

Unfortunately, Vaude Campo Compact XT 2P is quite heavy (3 kg) and has only 1 entrance, which is annoying if you share the tent with another person.

VANGO-Nevis 200

The Vango-Nevis 200 is a great low-budget tent for bicycle touring. It has great waterproof ratings (6000 mm floor, 3000 mm fly), is lightweight (2kg), and easy to carry around. And it’s green—perfect for discrete wild camping!

This tent can fit two people with gear, but it won’t be comfortable. The tunnel design can feel a bit claustrophobic, like a coffin.

You’ll have to be careful in windy conditions—the tent can be flappy in strong winds.

Big Agnes- C Bar 2

The Big Agnes C Bar 2 – 2-man tent is the best option if you want lightweight but don’t want to spend too much money. It’s not the most expensive tent on the market, but it’s not cheap either.

It’s light at 1810g and sets up easily, which means you won’t have to waste time fiddling around with poles. It’s also free-standing and has good head clearance, which makes it nice for tall people.

The only downside is the light colour of the fabric, which makes the tent easy to spot and get dirty.

What tent do you use on your bicycle tours? If you have good recommendations for a reliable bike touring tent, share them in the comments!

3 thoughts on “The best tents for bicycle touring in 2024- buyer’s guide”

Great article. I realize your directing your article at Europeans but for my tent for biking and camping Sierra Designs which along with Northface started the camping backpacking industry/experience here in US had Sierra Designs Clip Flashlight 1. 2.5 kgs. This lasted me 15 years. The Clip Flashlight 2 was manufactured and then for some reason discontinued about 2 years ago but I called SD and last year luckily found a retailer in US who still had some in stock. About same weight and more plastic parts but still great tent. Glad I had it last December camping in a rainy tropical park in Colombia. Dennis

Thanks Dennis for your comments and the recommendations! So lucky for you they still had your favourite model in stock, a tent that lasts 15 years is a rare bird these days. Hope the new one will last you as long too!

Pingback: Camping alone as a woman - are you gonna die? - Wobbly Ride

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Privacy overview.

Privacy Policy

The Best Tents for Bikers

If you’re planning on touring and considering a night or two under the stars, finding a decent tent that’s compact enough to transport on a motorbike can be tough. Not only do you have the standard tent construction to consider but you need to think about weight, storing bike kit (that’s usually wet!) and keeping your bike close by.

Thankfully, the market for motorcycle touring tents is enjoying a bit of a surge. We used to only have a couple of choices for lightweight tents but with modern materials getting better, tents are getting lighter and more companies are producing motorcycle-specific versions with bikers’ needs in mind.

Some tents even come with garage sections to park your bike overnight, while others provide larger vestibules for storing your panniers and kit outside of the main sleeping area but still protected from the elements.

Standard Tent Buyer’s Checklist

When you’re buying any tent, these are the features you’ll want to have:

• Wind and waterproof flysheet
• Groundsheet
• Breathable inner tent (to stop condensation)
• Sturdy poles
• Strong guylines

A Biker’s Basic Tent Buying Criteria

• How many people does it sleep?
• What’s it physical when packed?
• How much does it weight?
• How much does it cost?
• Can you park your bike in it?

We’ve answered these questions in our easy-to-read key stats for each of our picks below.

Motorcycle Tent: Additional Features To Consider

If you’re buying a tent for the bike, you have to think about how you’re going to carry it and what you want it to be able to do, over and above a ‘normal’ tent.

Pack size: the tent needs to be small enough to fit in your panniers, top box or strapped behind your seat.

Porch/vestibule: A large area separate to the sleeping quarters to place your helmets and other gear overnight.

Weight: Unlike camping with a car to transport your equipment, choosing a lightweight tent will limit the load on your bike.

Of course, if you’re only planning on roughing it for one night, you could always pick up this dome tent for £15; but don’t expect fantastic weatherproofing!

We’ve picked some of the best tents for motorcyclists, to suit any budget and carrying requirements.

Coleman Cortes 2

• Capacity: 2 persons 
• Dimensions: L3.6m, W1.2m, H1.05m
• Pack size: 38x15cm
• Weight: 3.5kg
• Price: £109.99
• Can you park a motorcycle inside: No

This tent is a complete bargain. It’s a 3-pole tunnel tent with a large porch area for storing your helmet, luggage, and wet boots.

It sleeps two and yet it’s lightweight and it packs down into a really compact size and weighs just 3.5kg. It’s small enough to easily stow in your motorcycle pannier to be strapped to your pillion seat. Claimed to be 100% waterproof, with taped seams for extra protection. Some owners claim it’s not that well made and that’s a common complaint when it comes to cheap tents but as long as you’re careful when erecting it, it should last a good few outings.

It’s not quite big enough for you to park your motorcycle completely inside but you could back a good half of the bike into the porch area to keep it close by. This Coleman Cortes 2 tent is a great choice if your budget is on the small side or you’re just off for a couple of nights and don’t want to shell out on something a bit fancier.

SehrGo Professional Backpacking Tent

• Capacity: Up to 4 persons 
• Dimensions: L2.24m, W2.03m, H1.35m (centre height)
• Pack size: 45x16cm
• Weight: 3kg
• Price: £130

If you’re after a bargain, a simple dome tent big enough for 4 will fit 2 riders plus all their gear nicely; and it’ll take you a maximum of 10 minutes to put up. While it does have a porch of sorts, you’ll want to zip this closed at night This example has a separate vestibule for gear so you’ll be more comfortable in the sleeping area. The pack size is compact and will happily fit in a large pannier or top box.

Highlander Blackthorn 1 Tent

• Capacity: 1 person
• Dimensions: L2.65m, W1.70m, H0.75m (centre height)
• Pack size: 40x12cm
• Weight: 1.5kg
• Price: £79.95

If you’re going it alone and don’t mind missing out on the headroom, this compact and lightweight adventure tent is about as small as it gets. But check out the dimensions because it is very compact.

It takes less than 5 minutes to put up. Also, it has a side storage area for your gear. With robust steel pegs and flexible fibreglass poles, it can withstand a windy night too.

Reviewers question the build quality and waterproofing but if you’ve only got one trip planned and you just want somewhere to lay down (pass out?) for the night, this’ll do the job.  It’s about the lightest motorcycle tent you can buy.

Khyam Biker Tent

• Capacity: 3 persons
• Dimensions: L4.00m, W11.95m, H1.25m (centre height)
• Pack size: 60x20cm
• Weight: 6.6kg
• Price: £349.99

Designed for bikers but you can’t park a bike in it, the Khyam Biker is a three-man tent but has plenty of room for two bikers. With side pockets within the sleeping area for your items, a large porch area to fit your stuff and enough headroom to be comfortable, this tent is worth the price.

Designed with a Quick Erect System, the poles are sewn into the flysheet, so the tent is up within seconds. The only downside, the packed tent is large, and the weight may be too much for some but it gets a RiDE magazine recommendation, which some bikers will value.

Vango Galaxy 300

• Dimensions: L4.40m, W2.60m, H1.90m (porch height)
• Pack size: 55x22cm
• Weight: 5.5kg

A favourite amongst bikers for its large vestibule at the front, low ceiling sleeping area to keep in the warmth and stability, the Galaxy 300 is a good 3 season tent.

You could get a folding chair (and a table!) in the porch, meaning it’ll be a decent place to hang out if the weather’s terrible. You can also back park of your bike into the tent, giving you something to hang your kit on and a bit more peace of mind.

The only downside is, the pack size on a little large for storing in panniers and having seen the feedback from owners, it takes a good half hour to erect!

Wingman of the Road - Goose

• Dimensions: L2.00m, W0.75m, H0.70m (centre height)
• Wing length: 1.25m
• Pack size: 63x34cm
• Weight: 10kg
• Price: £320

It may only be made for one, but the Goose is a well thought out, handy piece of kit. Fully waterproof canvas outer construction with a large wing that attaches to your bike for a canopy.

If you thought the pack weight was bulky, that’s because it comes complete with a high-density foam mattress and built-in sleeping bag, meaning you don’t have to worry about any extra weight and storage space.

We like the ethos behind this tent; made from quality old-school materials that are built to last, it might be a bit on the heavy side but its makers claim it’ll last more than 20 years. 

Terra Nova Starlite 3 Tent

• Capacity: 3 persons 
• Dimensions: L3.8m, W1.6m, H1.02m
• Pack size: 29x16cm
• Weight: 2.38kg
• Price: £650

If you’re touring with more gear, investing in a 3 person tent could be the answer thanks to the extra space in the sleeping area. The Redvarz Atacama Expedition is another great tent that provides security for your bike as you can partially park it in the porch area.

With a compact size, it fits nicely on your rack/top box ready for your next trip. The motorcycle bay is large enough to fit the back half of an adventure bike, including its panniers. The solid frame does well in windy conditions, and the seams have been treated to prevent leaks. A lot of what you’re paying for is the weight – or lack of it. If you’re looking for a lightweight motorcycle tent, this is a decent option.

TENTS YOU CAN PARK A MOTORCYCLE IN

Some bikers like the idea of being able to park their motorcycle in their tent. It’s not just a posing thing, I can see the logic. You can zip the tent up and keep your bike away from prying eyes. You can keep the bike closer to you, so you don’t have to worry about it overnight and tents that can store a motorcycle have a parge porch, meaning you can hang your kit on the bike, to dry it off.

Lone Rider MOTOTENT

• Capacity: 2 persons + 1 bike
• Dimensions: L4.15m, W2.4m, H1.90m (centre height)
• Weight: 5.44kg
• Price: £450
• Can you park a motorcycle inside: Yes

This tent might be expensive, but it’s designed to house 1 – 2 riders plus an adventure size bike WITH panniers. The large canopy area has full zips to protect your privacy and your bike from the elements. The large sleeping area will fit 2 people plus additional gear, and a handy vestibule is suitable for leaving your wet gear. Set up is claimed to take under 10 minutes while the large space allows persons over 6” to stand comfortably.

Redverz Atacama Expedition Tent

• Capacity: 3 persons + 1 bike
• Dimensions: L4.9m, W2.5m, H1.9m (centre height)
• Pack size: 53x23cm
• Weight: 6kg
• Price: £539

So small, this tent folds down to 29cm long so it would fit inside a large top box or pannier no problem. The weight is incredibly light for a 3 person tent which does make you wonder about its durability.

The Starlite 3 is suitable for spring to autumn and features a mesh net to protect you from the dreaded midges. The manufacturer’s claim that pitching time is under 10 minutes but having read some owner reviews, many say that it’s very hard to pitch single-handedly, so if you’re travelling solo, maybe this isn’t the tent for you.

Complete with a large porch area that is suitable for storing your helmet, panniers or rolling your bike in for more security and to hang your kit on.

Nordkap Double-Walled Tunnel Tent

• Capacity: 2 people + bike
• Dimensions: L4.15m, W2.4m, H2.0m (centre height)
• Pack size: 61x22cm
• Weight: 8kg
• Price: £155

This tent gets mixed reviews, with many saying the quality of the fabric isn’t great and that it can tear or perish fairly easily. We put it in this guide as it’s cheap (at around £150) and not everyone has £500 to spend on a tent. If you only want to use it a few times, you’re not planning on battling monsoon conditions and you’re able to pack it away carefully, then it’ll be up to the job. It’s roomy enough to park a bike in and store your kit.

Why smaller isn’t always better

When it comes to touring, the gut-feeling is that you can’t afford to take up unnecessary space. So lots of bikers shop for the smallest, lightest tent they can find.

There’s one major issue with a small tent.

If the weather’s rubbish, you’re going to be wet and you’ll have to stash all of your wet kit in your tent with you, which will be unpleasant at best. Your kit probably won’t dry out overnight and you’ll be sleeping in a bubble of rancid humidity.

The other issue when it comes to space – or lack of it – is that if you have a compact tent and the weather’s rubbish, you’ll have little option but to spend your evening cooped-up in your tent. 

If you buy a tent with a porch area, like the Vango we have chosen above, you can at least open up the folding stool, stretch your legs, enjoy a beer and keep your sleeping compartment dry.

Motorcycle Tents - Top Tips

Super lightweight tents cost a huge amount more. For example, the lightest two man tent we could find weighs around 500g but costs a whopping £600. However you can get a tent weighing around 2.5kg for £80. A solo rider will need a two-man tent, in order to comfortably store your gear and sleep at the same time. A two-person tent will be tight for two bikers, so think double the capacity to have a comfortable trip. Stuff some clothes in your tent's storage bag to use as a half-decent pillow. Wet kit won't dry in the sleeping compartment, it'll just make you sticky and sweaty. You need to store it in the outside area, so the airflow can help remove the moisture. Tents that promise to be up and running in seconds sound great but in reality if you practice a few times, you can get any tent up in well under 10 minutes. Often the easy-up tents pack larger - due to longer tent poles - and are more expensive too. Your motorcycle makes a good tent peg. If it's windy, you can use your bike's sidestand to help secure your tent from blowing away. Cooking in your tent is asking for trouble. If you are doing to cook, make sure you buy a tent with an outer vestibule, so that you don't steam out your tent or risk tipping your cooker over inside your tent.

The compact camping table

One of the things we love about motorcycle camping is the challenge to pack enough kit but not take the kitchen sink. Travelling light is always good.

We couldn’t write a guide on the best biker tents without mentioning this cool camping table from SW Motech . It connects to their panniers to form a sturdy table on which to eat your dinner from, play cards on or just organise your stuff on.

It folds away and fits into the lid of the panniers too. Smart!

First time pitching a Vango Galaxy 300 is around 30-40 minutes, however,once erected it can be packed away as one and thereafter pitching is around 10 -15 minutes. Best tent ever for motorcycle touring and I really really can’t believe that Vango stopped making them ? Large spacious and you can stand up in the porch area but packs away small and is lightweight at around 5.5 kgs and also has 5000mm rated material and power flex “ALLOY” poles ,one caveat is the sides of the porch flap in and if it’s raining can leave puddles in the porch area,this is easily remedied though by buying some crocodile clips and guying it out. As For the Kyham Biker its the word Biker that draws you in, IMHO they are not good and I know a lot of people that have owned them ( I have owned the Freelander ) and just like me quickly got shot of them.Pack size and weight is hideous and they take just as long to pitch ( even longer ) than any other tent also you have to seal the seams with sealant ( provided ) before use. If only Vango could tweak the Galaxy 300 and rename it the Vango Biker they would be onto a winner and no you don’t need to have to store your bike in it.

In reply to Urbster I have been using Kyham tents for over twenty years at all the rallies including bmf, bulldog bash, farm yard, storming the castle, Moto club de faro rally, to name but a few and all over Europe. It’s a superb tent it’s waterproof quick to erect and take down the more you do it the easier it gets. It is a fairly long tent when packed but if you have panniers and mount it on your rack it’s less width than the panniers and it’s Ride magazine recommended ok you can’t park your bike in it as the article states but why would you want to, I don’t park my car in my house either. Ride safe mrLeigh👍

Make 2024 your best biking year!

Our monthly email with the best biking experiences, discounts, tips and more. FREE motorcycle security eBook when you sign up. Over 11,000 bikers have already joined.

We’ll only send you the good stuff. No Spam. See our privacy policy.

Session expired

Please log in again. The login page will open in a new tab. After logging in you can close it and return to this page.

Table of contents

10 Best Backpacking Tents of 2024

Some of the links on this page are affiliate links

Your backpacking tent will be one of the most important gear purchases you make. Finding one that has the best balance of interior comfort, weight, durability, and weather protection will make it much easier to stay happy and having a good time on trail.

Our team of gear experts has spent over a decade testing more than 50 backpacking tents from brands like Big Agnes, Zpacks, NEMO, MSR, REI, and more. We’ve hiked upward of 20,000 miles on trails all over the world, including treks through the alpine peaks of Patagonia, summer monsoons in the Rockies, and sweltering days in the desert, with more than 1000 nights in the wilderness.

Though a regular backpacking tent will suit most people, anyone planning a long-distance adventure should definitely check out our guide to the best ultralight tents available. On the other hand, if cost is your primary consideration, we’ve caught some Zs in plenty of budget tents as well as larger car camping tents for weekends away with the family.

Quick Picks for Backpacking Tents

Check out this quick list of the best backpacking tents, or continue scrolling to see our full list of favorites with in-depth reviews.

Best Backpacking Tent Overall: Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 ($530)

Best Ultralight Backpacking Tent: Zpacks Duplex ($669)

Best Budget Tent for Backpacking & Car Camping: REI Half Dome SL 2+ ($349)

Best Semi-Freestanding Backpacking Tent: Big Agnes Tiger Wall UL2 Solution Dye ($450)

Best Lightweight & Sturdy Tent for Harsh Conditions: SlingFin Portal ($560)

Great Option for UL Hikers Wanting More Space: NEMO Hornet OSMO 3 ($550)

Spacious Tent with Innovative Features: Sea to Summit Telos TR2 ($599)

Best Crossover Tent for Backpacking & Car Camping: NEMO Dagger OSMO 2 ($530)

Good Balance of Weight & Livability for Solo Hikers : MSR FreeLite 2 ($450)

Most Affordable Backpacking & Car Camping Tent: REI Trailmade 2 ($199)

Affordable & Spacious Ultralight Backpacking Tent: Six Moon Designs Lunar Duo ($395)

Great Balance of Weather Protection & Weight: MSR Hubba Hubba 2 ($550)

Best Affordable Ultralight Backpacking Tent for One Person: Durston X-Mid 2 ($280)

Backpacking Tent Review Video – Detailed Notes on Each Tent

We’ve updated all of our reviews with more long-term testing results after several hundred more miles of experience with each tent over the past year.

• The Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 remains the best overall pick for over five years running.
• We still highly recommend the classic Zpacks Duplex , but we also had a chance to test out and review its sibling, the Zpacks Duplex Zip .
• The REI Half Dome SL2+ remains one of the best deals for a backpacking/car camping hybrid tent.
• The Big Agnes Tiger Wall UL2 Solution Dye continues to be our favorite semi-freestanding backpacking tent.

Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2

Best Backpacking Tent Overall

Price: $530

Weight: 3 lb. 2 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 88 x 52/42 x 40 in.

Size: 1-Person 2-Person 3-Person 4-Person

Type: Freestanding

• Ultralight for a freestanding tent
• Quick and easy to set up
• Ample headroom
• Very useful pocket layout
• Large doors/vestibules
• Quality construction/materials
• Rainfly zippers can snag

The Copper Spur HV UL2 is one of our all-time favorite backpacking tents – the CleverHiker team has spent hundreds of backcountry nights in this shelter. Its ultralight freestanding design enables hikers to pitch it almost anywhere, and it doesn’t sacrifice convenience, weather protection, or livability.

The Copper Spur is a popular choice among thru-hikers of the AT , PCT , and CDT , all of which are notoriously tough on gear. Despite the ultralight materials used in the construction of this tent, it can last for thousands of miles if you take the time to clear pokey debris from your campsites. We’ve taken several iterations of the Copper Spur 2 over a thousand miles each on trail, and they’re still going strong.

The bent-pole structure and ridge pole of the Copper Spur create nearly vertical sidewalls – maximizing interior volume and providing ample headroom. The UL2 has enough space inside for two regular-width sleeping pads and some gear. You can even squeeze a tapered wide pad plus a regular pad inside but you’ll likely need to store gear outside in that case. 

If you and your hiking partner both use wide pads (or you just prefer extra space), you’ll want to bump up to the Copper Spur HV UL3 . Pretty unique in the backpacking tent category, the Copper Spur 2 and 3 are also offered in Long versions. The Copper Spur Long gives you a whopping 96 inches of floor length, so it’s a lot more comfortable for hikers over six feet tall who prefer to store all their gear inside. Whichever size you go with , you’ll have a backpacking tent that provides an exceptional balance of camp comfort and low packed weight.

Full Review: Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2

Zpacks Duplex

Best Ultralight Backpacking Tent

Price: $699

Weight: 1 lb. 1.9 oz. (no stakes or poles)

Dimensions (LxWxH): 90 x 45 x 48 in.

Size: 1-Person , 2-Person , 3-Person

Type: Non-freestanding

• Very durable for the weight
• DCF material won’t sag when wet
• Trekking poles can double as tent poles
• Needs condensation management
• Non-freestanding design has a learning curve

The Zpacks Duplex is our go-to ultralight backpacking tent for thru-hiking and long-distance adventures. This tent provides an excellent amount of interior space and weather protection at a low weight.

The Dyneema Composite Fabric (DCF) is a big part of what makes the Duplex such a great choice for thru-hikes. It’s waterproof, tough, incredibly light, and doesn’t sag when wet; the downside is that it’s very expensive. That said, the Duplex is a very worthwhile investment if you love to backpack light since it can last for several seasons if you treat it with care. 

The other key to the ridiculously low weight of the Duplex is its non-freestanding, single-wall design. This eliminates the need for dedicated tent poles (you use your trekking poles to create the structure) and a rainfly. It may take a few pitches to get it perfect if you’ve never used a backpacking tent like this before, but you’ll quickly get the hang of it with a little practice. Condensation can also be a bigger issue in single-wall tents because there isn’t a mesh layer to keep the interior separate from the flysheet, so ventilation and campsite selection become a lot more important.

The high ceiling of the Duplex allows you and your hiking partner to sit up comfortably at the same time, and the two-door design will keep you from crawling over each other to get in and out. If you’re looking for the best ultralight backpacking tent on the market, this is your guy.

The Duplex is spacious enough for two hikers, and it’s an absolute palace for one. But pairs of hikers who really like to spread out should look at the Triplex for even more square footage with a negligible amount of added weight. CleverHiker Founder, Dave Collins, has used both extensively, and the Plex tents are his absolute favorites for big mileage trips and hikes with a ton of elevation gain. For ultralight solo trips he packs the Duplex, but when he needs more space to share with a tentmate – like on his JMT thru-hike – he brings the Triplex. On the flip side, solo hikers who prioritize saving weight above anything can’t go wrong with the Plex Solo .

Full Reviews:   Zpacks Duplex , Zpacks Duplex Zip , Zpacks Triplex , and Zpacks Plex Solo

REI Half Dome SL 2+

Best Budget Tent for Backpacking & Car Camping

Price: $349

Weight: 4 lb. 11.5 oz. (including footprint)

Dimensions (LxWxH): 90 x 56 x 42 in.

Size: 2-Person , 3-Person

• Less expensive
• Very roomy interior
• More durable than many others
• Freestanding design is quick/easy to set up
• Footprint included
• Heavier than some
• Bulkier than some

REI’s Half Dome SL 2+ has an unrivaled blend of affordability, durability, and interior space. Its symmetrical freestanding design and very roomy dimensions make it comfortable and user-friendly for hikers of all experience levels. This is our favorite budget-friendly crossover tent for those who want a single shelter that works for camping in the frontcountry and the backcountry.

The spacious interior comfortably fits two hikers plus their gear – you could pack along two wide/long sleeping pads and still have room to spare. The generous amount of headroom also allows two campers to sit up comfortably which is a real perk on rainy days spent inside. While this isn’t the most glamorous camping tent nor the lightest backpacking tent, the Half Dome suits both needs well and costs far less money and storage space than buying a separate tent for each activity.

Though the weight of the Half Dome is more than we prefer for multi-day backpacking adventures, it’s not too bad when split between two hikers. In addition, you can save about 8 ounces by leaving the included footprint at home. Footprints aren’t strictly necessary and we often choose to hike without one. Just taking time to clear your campsite of debris before setting up will go a long way toward preserving your tent floor (but we wrote a whole post that’ll help you decide whether or not you should use a footprint ). Plus the Half Dome already has a pretty robust floor as it is (40-denier nylon).

The NEMO Dagger 2 below is in this same crossover category, and – if money was no object – we’d recommend the Dagger over the Half Dome for its lower weight and larger amount of headroom. But budget is a top consideration for many of us when buying big-ticket outdoor gear, and the much friendlier price point of the Half Dome SL 2+ gets you a very comparable tent that won’t disappoint.

Full Review: Half Dome SL 2+

Big Agnes Tiger Wall 2

Best Semi-Freestanding Tent

Price: $450

Weight: 2 lb. 8 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 86 x 52/42 x 39 in.

Size: 3-Person

Type: Semi-freestanding

• Roomy for one
• Two doors/vestibules (a perk for solo hikers)
• A bit tight for two
• Not as durable as some (floor material is thin)
• No rainfly vents

Solo backpackers who want some space to sprawl and ounce-counting pairs of hikers will love the ultralight design of the Big Agnes Tiger Wall 2 . With enough structure to perform well in inclement weather but a weight that’s barely over a pound per person when split between two hikers, the semi-freestanding Tiger Wall is a more convenient alternative to non-freestanding ultralight tents.

The Tiger Wall 2 and Tiger Wall 3 are top picks for CleverHiker Managing Editor, Ben Applebaum-Bauch. He’s used the 2-person version on over 1,000 miles of trail – including the Oregon Coast Trail and Superior Hiking Trail – and the 3-person version for his 3,000-mile CDT thru-hike with his partner. Both sizes of the Tiger Wall held up beautifully on trail, and only have minor signs of wear and tear to show for all the hard miles put on them – very impressive for such lightweight shelters.

Semi-freestanding tents can often feel a bit cramped, but – while the quarters in the Tiger Wall 2 are still a bit tight for two – this tent has a wider ridge pole than most others in this category. The ridge pole creates more livable space where we want it most – at the head when sitting up. Additionally, you can save valuable floor space by storing gear in the large mezzanine pocket at the foot of the tent. 

Another comfort feature of the Tiger Wall is the easy-to-use door toggles that give you the ability to roll back both sides of the vestibule to take in grand views or max out ventilation on clear nights. Since the Tiger Wall doesn’t have vents on the rainfly like many other tents, we prefer to sleep with one or both doors rolled back whenever possible for airflow.

Out of the three semi-freestanding tents on our list, this is the one we’d recommend most for pairs of hikers looking to balance weight and space most efficiently. Overall, hikers who prioritize saving weight and don’t mind sharing a tighter space will love the minimal yet functional design of the Tiger Wall 2. If you prefer more room to spread out, the excellent Tiger Wall 3 has extra floor space and a few more inches of peak height but is still lighter than many 2P tents.

Full Review: Big Agnes Tiger Wall UL2

SlingFin Portal

Best Lightweight & Sturdy Tent for Harsh Conditions

Price: $560

Weight: 3 lb. 5 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 85 x 51/42 x 44 in.

• Excellent weather protection
• Lightweight
• Roomy interior
• Useful pockets

With an extra stable frame, generous headroom, and top-quality construction and materials, the SlingFin Portal is an excellent lightweight shelter for hunkering down when nasty weather hits. 

The Portal can be set up with internal guylines that run along the interior walls at the head and foot to give the structure significantly more strength in wind than external guylines alone. In the most basic terms, the internal guylines take the stress imposed on the structure by wind and transfer it to the stakes where your tent is anchored to the ground. This keeps the tent from bending and contorting in the wind like most other lightweight backpacking tents would. Comfort is increased as a result, but it also bumps safety up several notches since your poles will have a far lower chance of snapping in strong gusts.

Thicker poles, internal guylines, and the ability to attach trekking poles for added structural integrity make the Portal super solid in wind, rain, and even light snow. These features are unique for a lightweight backpacking tent and are generally more common in high-end 4-season mountaineering shelters . Many hikers would probably be better off buying the versatile Portal rather than a dedicated winter tent that’s heavier and less practical for summer and shoulder season hiking.

One of our favorite features of the Portal is its generous headroom, which makes it feel much more livable than the average lightweight 2-person backpacking tent. While we wish there was a smidge more floor space from head to foot on this tent, the solid amount of breathing room up top keeps the Portal from feeling cramped.

Other details like great pockets and included replacement zipper sliders come together with the stormworthy design to make the Portal one of the best backpacking tents we’ve ever tested for staying comfortable and safe in harsh weather.

Full Review: SlingFin Portal

NEMO Hornet OSMO 3

Great Option for UL Hikers Wanting More Space

Price: $550

Dimensions (LxWxH): 88 x 68/62 x 44 in.

Size: 1-Person 3-Person

• Ultralight for the size
• Well-priced for the specs
• Roomy for two
• Convenient pockets
• High-quality materials/construction
• Good ventilation
• Innovative stuff sack makes it easy to split the load
• Only one side of the rainfly can be tied back

Ultralight doesn’t have to mean sacrificing comfort. With the NEMO Hornet OSMO 3 , a pair of hikers can have the conveniences of a traditional 2-person tent – two doors/vestibules, a roomy interior, and useful pockets – without the additional weight. As an added bonus, this spacious shelter costs around the same amount of money as many of the leading 2-person backpacking tents.

You might want extra space for a variety of reasons – maybe you want to fit two wide sleeping pads with room to spare, or you travel with a large dog or an adventurous kid, or you just want a little more breathing room when sharing your tent with a partner. Whatever the case may be, the generous floor dimensions and peak height of the Hornet 3 will accommodate.

NEMO’s proprietary OSMO fabric repels water better than standard nylon or polyester flysheets, and – best of all – it stretches far less when wet. This means your pitch stays taut in the rain, and you won’t have to worry about saggy rainfly material creating wet spots on the tent body, your sleeping bag footbox, or your head.

We’ve always been big fans of NEMO’s attention to detail, high-quality construction, and innovative designs, and the Hornet OSMO 3 doesn’t disappoint. For those who prioritize saving weight over having extra space, the NEMO Hornet OSMO 2 is also a great choice and is a bit more affordable than similarly designed tents.

Full Review: NEMO Hornet OSMO 2

Sea to Summit Telos TR2

Exceptionally Spacious Backpacking Tent with Innovative Features

Price: $599

Weight: 3 lb. 10 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 84.5 x 53 x 43 in.

• Excellent headroom
• Quick/easy to set up
• Very light for the amount of space
• More comfortable living space than others
• Excellent ventilation
• A bit heavier than some in this price range

The Sea to Summit Telos TR2 is an innovative tent with a lot of unique features to love. The biggest standout is its pole structure which provides far more headroom than any 2-person backpacking tent in its weight class.

The inverted ridge pole of the Telos points upward instead of sloping downward like most others. This creates tall door openings and practically vertical sidewalls that translate to a massive amount of headroom throughout the length of the tent. We find that having ample headroom inside a tent considerably increases comfort, and the Telos is certainly best-in-class for this spec.

CleverHiker Senior Gear Analyst, Casey Handley, took the Telos on a rainy test hike over the 40-mile Timberline Trail with her partner. This spacious tent provided a cozy retreat for the pair to wait out inclement weather when the rain really started coming down. There was plenty of room to keep gear dry inside as well as enjoy a game of cards until the weather quieted down.

The Telos also has exceptional ventilation – it features a huge apex vent that can be opened or closed plus low venting on the vestibules that can be deployed when necessary. We find that the vents create truly excellent circulation and provide comfortable and practically condensation-free nights. Other creature comforts, like the light-dispersing Lightbar and shady Hangout Mode, add to its livability and make the Telos feel like a little slice of luxury in the backcountry. 

Though it’s pretty spendy, the comfort the Telos provides is worth the cost if you’re looking for a versatile 2-person backpacking tent with all of the details dialed in. There’s really nothing else on the market like this tent, and we recommend it to hikers whose main priority is comfort on trail.

Full Review: Sea to Summit Telos TR2

NEMO Dagger OSMO 2

Best Crossover Tent for Backpacking & Car Camping

Weight: 4 lb. 2 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 90 x 50 x 42 in.

• Very spacious
• Light for how much space it offers
• Great pockets
• On the heavy side

The NEMO Dagger OSMO 2 offers a ton of interior space at a reasonable weight, so it’s perfect for those wanting a tent that’s comfortable for both backpacking and car camping.

When split between two hikers, each will carry just over two pounds. While that’s not as impressive as some others at first glance, it’s actually very respectable when you consider the whole picture. The Dagger offers significantly more interior space than much of the lighter weight competition thanks to its long, rectangular floor and nearly vertical side walls. 

Since the Dagger has enough floor space for two wide/long pads and plenty of interior volume to comfortably hang out inside, it works quite nicely for car camping as well. Crossover tents like this one will save the user storage space at home and a ton of money over buying a dedicated tent for each activity.

The Dagger has many convenient features built in, like two huge, trapezoidal vestibules for gear storage, light-dispersing headlamp pockets, and an included tub accessory for the vestibule that keeps your gear clean and dry. The innovative OSMO fabric also doesn’t sag when wet (unlike Silnylon), and it remains waterproof for longer than the coated fabrics used for many other tents.

Though the Dagger is among the more expensive tents on our list, its ability to pull double-duty as a luxurious backpacking tent or a comfortable car-camping tent makes it a versatile option that’s worth the high price tag. Those looking for lightweight livability in a convenient design will find that the NEMO Dagger OSMO 2 is among the best of the best.

Full Review: NEMO Dagger OSMO 2

MSR FreeLite 2

Good Balance of Weight & Livability for Solo Hikers

Weight: 2 lb. 5 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 84 x 50 x 39 in.

• Rainfly gutter prevents drippy entry
• Tight for two

The MSR FreeLite 2 is a great option for those looking to go lighter without sacrificing the convenience of a double-wall tent. It has two large doors/vestibules, a smart rainfly design that prevents drippy entry in the rain, and a lower weight than many similarly designed tents.

We view the FreeLite as more comfortable for solo hikers since the interior headroom can feel a little cramped when spending any extended amount of time inside. But for pairs that value saving weight over having more interior space, the FreeLite has the dimensions to accommodate two people.

The rainbow shape of the FreeLite is effective at shedding precipitation, and the unique rainfly gutters direct water away from the zippered entry to prevent it from pooling up and pouring onto the floor while moving in or out of the tent in wet weather. 

Solo backpackers wanting the best mix of weight, livability, and weather protection will love the FreeLite, and pairs who would opt to save weight and don’t mind tight quarters will find that this tent delivers excellent performance.

Full Review: MSR FreeLite 2

REI Trailmade 2

Most Affordable Crossover Tent for Backpacking & Car Camping

Price: $199

Weight: 5 lb. 7 oz. (including footprint)

Dimensions (LxWxH): 88 x 52 x 40 in.

• Durable (strong zippers & thick material)
• Lack of ridge pole limits headroom a bit

The affordable REI Trailmade 2 is a great tent for backpackers on a tight budget or those wanting to save money on a crossover tent that works for both car camping and backpacking. 

Though none of the Trailmade’s specs (other than price) are really standouts, the tried-and-true dome design holds up well in bad weather. The quality materials and construction of the Trailmade (strong zippers and thicker material) ensure this tent will remain reliable through many seasons of use. And the symmetrical free-standing design is quick and easy to pitch, so this is a great starter tent for beginners.

What holds the Trailmade back from ranking higher on our list is the lack of a ridge pole across the top. Most backpacking tents nowadays include this pole to pull out the sides of the tent and increase headroom – significantly increasing livability without much added weight. Since the Trailmade omits this pole, it feels a bit narrow inside across the spine – especially when the space is split between two hikers.

While we consider the Trailmade a bit heavy for backpacking, the weight and bulk aren’t too bad when split between two hikers. You can also save about 8 ounces by leaving the included footprint at home.

The budget-friendly Trailmade is an excellent investment for beginners and those wanting to get into the backcountry without spending a fortune. We would recommend trying to stretch your budget a bit for one of the more comfortable options on this list if you plan to backpack often, but you won’t be disappointed by the Trailmade if you really just need to keep costs down.

Full Review: REI Trailmade 2

Six Moon Designs Lunar Duo

Affordable & Spacious Ultralight Backpacking Tent

Price: $395

Weight: 2 lb. 13 oz. (no stakes or poles)

Dimensions (LxWxH): 90 x 54 x 45 in.

Size: 1-Person , 2-Person

• Small packed size
• Seam sealing costs extra

The Six Moon Designs Lunar Duo is one of the best value backpacking tents on our list due to its excellent blend of space, weight, and durability. CleverHiker Gear Tester, Heather Eldridge, has put the Lunar Duo through the wringer on multiple thru-hikes covering thousands of miles, and it continues to hold up like a champ.

The Lunar Duo is a bit heavier than many other ultralight non-freestanding tents, like the Zpacks Duplex above, but we find the weight tradeoff is worth the significant monetary savings for hikers on a budget. One thing that makes the Lunar Duo unique among non-freestanding tents is the arched brow poles over the doors. These poles maximize headroom along the entire length of the tent and give the Lunar Duo the most luxuriously spacious interior of any model in its class. 

The large vestibules are designed to open completely without disturbing the structure of the tent so you get the same ventilation and view benefits as a double-wall tent. On top of that, the floating canopy and peak vents work together to create ample airflow in the Lunar Duo – cutting down significantly on interior condensation. 

If you’re looking for a roomy ultralight shelter at an exceptionally affordable price, few tents come close to the Lunar Duo. 

Solo hikers wanting to cut down on weight even more, should check out the Lunar Solo . It’s one of our top 1-person tent picks because it’s very spacious for one hiker and their gear, it’s easy to set up, and it’s incredibly affordable for the specs. 

Full Reviews: Six Moon Designs Lunar Duo & Six Moon Designs Lunar Solo

MSR Hubba Hubba 2

Great Balance of Weather Protection & Weight

Weight: 3 lb. 4 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 84 x 50 x 40 in.

• Great weather protection
• Lightweight for the weather-worthiness
• Lack of headroom makes interior feel a bit tight

The long-time crowd favorite MSR Hubba Hubba 2 is a standout on the backpacking tent market for its durability and weather protection. The rainbow shape of this tent leaves very little surface area along the spine to catch gusts of wind, and there aren’t any flat surfaces on the fly for water to pool. 

One of our favorite details of the Hubba Hubba is the gutter on the vestibule doors. This little feature directs water down a groove behind the rainfly closure providing a drip-free entry in wet weather.

The Hubba Hubba’s symmetrical freestanding design makes it quick and easy to set up and provides just enough space to squeeze two wide pads inside. However, we find that the pole structure causes the walls to slope inward – limiting interior headroom. 

That said, if you tend to be hard on gear or you often backpack in places with temperamental weather, the Hubba Hubba is still a top choice for its high-quality build at a relatively low weight.

Full Review: MSR Hubba Hubba 2

Durston X-Mid 2

Best Affordable Ultralight Backpacking Tent for One Person

Price: $280

Weight: 2 lb. 2.4 oz.

Dimensions (LxWxH): 92 x 52 x 48 in.

• Easy to pack
• Excellent Protection in wet weather
• Excellent vestibule design
• Spacious interior
• High pockets creat less sag
• Interior shape makes usable space less convenient
• Shape makes it tough to get a perfect pitch
• Large footprint & non-freestanding design can make campsite selection difficult
• 90-degree zippers aren’t everyone’s favorite

The Durston X-Mid 2 is a nice non-freestanding shelter for one person. We appreciate the near-vertical side walls, which create a roomy interior at shoulder height for comfortable sitting and changing. The interior pockets are situated higher up in the canopy than most other tents. Though it’s a slightly longer reach, it does prevent the walls from sagging in when there’s a heavy object tucked away. The footprint is also a rhombus which creates extra space to store gear at the head and foot.

We’ve weathered dozens of storms in the X-Mid and it has proven to be durable in the long run. Its 20D polyester fabric and robust zippers withstand the rigors of backcountry travel and the two vents at the top with kickstands do a solid job of releasing condensation. This tent has saved us more than once in rainstorms because the inner portion can be pitched after the fly has been set up, keeping the inside dry. This fly-first design also makes it possible to leave the tent at home if you are inclined to go ultra-ultralight.

One of the biggest drawbacks of this model is that it is challenging to set up on uneven ground. It’s also not as stable as dedicated-pole freestanding models. However, its low-profile maximizes wind resistance, and the fully seam-taped bathtub floor and double-wall construction keep moisture out.

Weighing in at just over two pounds, the X-Mid is a featherweight champion in the world of backpacking shelters. Its minimalist design and efficient use of lightweight materials make it a top choice for ounce-counting thru-hikers and ultralight enthusiasts. Though its pitched footprint is arguably too large for tighter campsites, its compact packed size, it easily fits into the crevices of a pack. We also don’t love the offset geometry of the interior for two people – one person gets a nice high ceiling and the other gets a face full of tent.

The the 90-degree zippers are not the most user-friendly, but this shelter is a lightweight, roomy and cost-effective option for one person.

Product Comparison Table

How we test & methodology.

We assessed each backpacking tent based on five criteria: comfort, weight and packability, weather resistance, ease of setup, and durability. We have spent a minimum of 20 nights (but in some cases, over 100) in each of these models in a range of hiking conditions, from the hot, dry deserts of the southwest to the coldest, wettest reaches of northern New England.

Comfort spans a wide range of characteristics. We pay careful attention to things like floor dimensions, including maximum dimensions and any head-to-foot taper; peak height (as well as interior volume and shoulder space); number and style of doors; zipper pulls and door tie-backs; number, size, and placement of storage pockets; and any special features that make the experience of living in the tent more enjoyable. We get an extremely good sense of each of these characteristics by sleeping, eating, and living side-by-side with our hiking partners.

WEIGHT & PACKED SIZE

Manufacturers often list multiple weights, which include different combinations of tent components . We consider the packaged weight – the tent body, fly, poles, and included stakes) – as well as the packed size of each model, testing out how easy it is to stuff each one into a pack and around other gear, noting any especially streamlined or chunky hardware that takes up space.

WEATHER RESISTANCE

We look at weather resistance inside and out. Our assessment includes the rain, hail, and snow resistance of the fly, including both water penetration/dripping through the fly, as well as splashback from underneath the fly, and any sagging from saturation. In addition to precipitation, we consider the wind resistance which entails assessing the quality and stability of stakes; number and location of guypoints; and vestibule geometry. Lastly, we analyze interior condensation, paying attention to the number, size, and location of vent points, as well as, obviously, the amount of moisture on the underside of the fly when we wake up each morning.

EASE OF SETUP

Most of these tents are fairly easy to set up but some go a little faster than others. Here, we measure how long it takes on average to set up each model. The differences come down to whether or not the tent is symmetrical (thus providing two correct orientations for a tent and fly instead of just one); the pole-to-tent connection system; the fly-to-tent connection system; the quality and bite of the included stakes, as well as whether or not there are enough of them; and any tensioning systems that make it easier to get a good taut pitch.

Durability includes both on trail wear and tear as well as longevity season after season. We set up each model on a variety of surfaces, from soft soil to sandy, gravely clearings. Pinholes in the floor, micro-fissures at the ends of poles, and zipper snags are all top-of-mind. In addition, our experience has taught us that certain materials and waterproof coatings are more resilient than others so we assess fabric type, thickness, and chemical treatments, also noting if a model provides a repair kit (e.g. pole sleeve or adhesive patches) for fixes in the field.

Why You Should Trust Us

We’ve spent over 1,000 nights in these backpacking tents and covered over 20,000 miles with them on our backs. Senior Gear Analyst and lead tester, Casey Handley , has pitched and slept in these shelters along her many thru-hikes of the Arizona Trail, Appalachian Trail, Colorado Trail, Long Trail, and more. She has weathered nights through high-alpine storms in frigid temperatures on trail and poured over all of the specs at basecamp. Her previous experience at REI also gives her unique data-driven insight into the features and functionality that backpackers, including herself, are most often looking for.

Analysis & Results

We rank tents based on five different metrics including comfort, weight and packed size, weather resistance, ease of setup, and durability. Our comparative results below outline the top performers in each metric.

Good, lightweight backpacking tents are expensive, but that doesn’t mean some of them aren’t a great value. When we do our testing, we are careful to note products that outperform what they cost. This could mean both low-priced items that get the job done just as well if not better than the more expensive competition, as well as pricier tents that are just smashing it out of the park.

The REI Half Dome SL 2+ is one of the highest-value backpacking tents around. Its spacious floor dimensions and headroom make it one of the more comfortable options while also logging reliable weather resistance and sporting thick, durable fabrics. The REI Trailmade 2 is on the heavier side, but the price is right and it’s super easy to set up.

Overall top performers like the Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 and Big Agnes Tiger Wall Solution Dye are pricier for sure but their combination of light weight and space makes them some of the best options available for longer treks.

The REI Half Dome SL 2+ has comfort features that make it a great option for two people who want to spread out on a long weekend adventure. Its generous 56-inch width means that you don’t have to worry about rubbing shoulders with your hiking partner if you both want to sit up at the same time. The impressive peak height and large double doors also add to the livability of this model.

Not far behind, the NEMO Hornet OSMO 3 is another great option for the space-needy backpacker. Though it tapers from head to foot, it is wide enough all around that two people will have plenty of space. Its white mesh is also a nice feature that adds a little bit of privacy at camp, even if the fly is off or tied back, and the large storage pocket at the head means that you can store even large items off the floor but keep them close at hand.

In the next tier, the SlingFin Portal 2 , NEMO Dagger OSMO 2 , Sea to Summit Telos TR2 , and Six Moon Designs Lunar Duo all have their unique redeeming comfort features that make them stand out. Though the Slingfin doesn’t have exceptional length, it does have an especially high peak height for its weight and size. The two curved side doors are easy to open and close and there are plenty of storage pockets all around for small items. Though the Dagger OSMO 2 has two zippers on each door, which makes it a little clunkier to open, it has larger dimension than the Portal and the extra length is much appreciated for taller sleepers. The Telos TR2 is a little clunkier to enter and exit, but its unique tension ridge pole across. the top creates tons of space at shoulder height for sitting up and playing cards with your hiking partner. And though the Lunar Duo is non-freestanding, it has massive dimensions relative to its weight.

With no stakes or poles, the Zpacks Duplex takes the top spot in this metric. Since it’s non-freestanding, it uses a standard pair of trekking poles that you are likely already carrying to create the structure it requires to pitch. (And even including the weight of a pair of typical poles, it is still a lighter package than almost all of the freestanding tents). The two other non-freestanding options – the Six Moon Designs Lunar Duo and Durston X-Mid – are both quite a bit heavier (though much less expensive), but are still a very comfortable two-ish pounds.

The Big Agnes Tiger Wall Solution Dye makes this list precisely because it is the best balance between the comfort and structure of a double-wall tent while weighing in at a scant two and a half pounds. For there size, the Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 and NEMO Hornet OSMO 3 are both exceptionally light and are well worth the investment for those who want the best of both worlds.

The SlingFin Portal 2 is designed for inclement weather. We love the guylines inside the tent that let us tension it properly for added wind resistance. It also comes with ample stakes and additional external guylines. The fly runs low to the ground and the kickstand vents at the doors are reasonably effective at dispersing condensation.

The REI Half Dome SL 2+ also has effective fly vents. It earns its stripes in this metric for its high bathtub floor, which limits splashback in heavy rain, and its 30D fly and large vestibules, which keep gear protected. Though its more basic pole structure makes it slightly less stable than the Half Dome, the REI Trailmade 2 otherwise benefits from the same features.

The NEMO Dagger OSMO 2 has a unique trapezoidal vestibule geometry that significantly limits how much it can flap in the wind and also increases the usable storage pace. Though the higher cut at the ends of the fly leaves the main tent body exposed a little more than other models, we never experienced problematic seepage. The proprietary fabric also sags less than its other nylon counterparts, which is a huge upgrade.

Most freestanding tents are pretty straightforward to pitch. This is especially true for the REI Trailmade 2 . It has a very basic X-pole design, with two long poles that cross at the apex and secure easily into grommets at the corners. The fly attaches with buckles at the corners and because it’s symmetrical, it doesn’t require any color coding – it goes on correctly multiple ways as long as you have the doors lined up. The REI Half Dome SL 2+ is similar – the primary difference is that it has a long brow pole and is slightly larger so it takes just a fraction longer to setup.

The hubbed pole designs of the Slingfin Portal 2 , NEMO Dagger OSMO 2 , and Sea to Summit Telos TR2 make it a breeze to shake the pole segments into place in a matter of seconds. We also appreciate the color-coded poles and segments of the Dagger OSMO 2 and Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2 , which makes it easy to orient everything correctly.

The burly fabric of the REI Half Dome SL 2+ makes it stand out among the competition for its durability. The 40D ripstop nylon floor stands up to rough ground and it comes with a footprint for even more protection. The pre-bent poles also help reduce the tension in key segments so they are less likely to crack.

The Slingfin Portal 2 has thinner 20D ripstop nylon floor fabric but one longevity feature we love is the pre-installed backup zippers on the tent door. This common failure point often renders an otherwise good tent much less practical but the extra set of pulls provides peace of mind.

How to Choose a Backpacking Tent

You shouldn’t have to spend a fortune to get a great backpacking tent. That’s why this list contains an array of solid options at a variety of price points. If you backpack a lot, it probably makes sense to spend more for a quality product that will get many years of use. If you’re on a limited budget, you may want to check out our budget backpacking tent recommendations , but they do tend to be much heavier. 

CHOOSING A SIZE

The reality with tent sizes is that a lot of manufacturers exaggerate how many people can sleep comfortably in them. For example, many two-person backpacking tents are a tight fit for two average-sized people. If you plan on sleeping two people in your tent and want more space, you may find a three-person tent to be more comfortable. Extra space will add weight, so you’ll probably want to choose a lightweight tent to keep your backpack light. Check out our Tent Size Guide for more info on finding the right fit for you.

PACKAGED WEIGHT VS. MINIMUM TRAIL WEIGHT

When researching tents, you’ll likely notice a few different specs listed for weight and it can get a little confusing. Some manufacturers may even exaggerate how light a tent is to make it seem more appealing. Unfortunately, there is no required set standard for measuring backpacking tent weights across the industry, but here are some tips to help you decipher all the numbers:

Packaged Weight

This spec refers to the weight of all parts of the tent plus any accessories it comes with when you buy it. This is usually the most accurate measurement to consider, and it’s the spec we’ve listed with all the tents on this list. After all, you’re going to be using tent stakes with your tent, right?

Minimum Trail Weight

This one gets a little hairy. Since there’s no required industry standard for calculating this, some manufacturers exclude more items than others. Minimum trail weight is generally accepted to mean just the essential components to keep you dry. It will always include the tent body, the rainfly, and the poles. This measurement usually excludes tent stakes (unless your tent is semi-freestanding), guy lines, and stuff sacks.

DO YOU NEED A FOOTPRINT?

Almost every backpacking tent on this list comes with the option to buy a footprint that will help extend the life of your tent floor. Footprints are not necessary, though, and many choose not to use them. It’s totally a personal choice, but a footprint will ensure that your tent floor lasts as long as possible. If you need help deciding if a footprint is right for you, check out our post Do You Really Need a Footprint for Your Tent .

A backpacking tent that doesn’t protect against the elements is worse than worthless, it’s dangerous. So be careful about extreme budget tents you’ll find elsewhere. Every tent on this list will provide excellent storm protection to keep you safe, dry, and warm.

INTERIOR SPACE

Backpacking tents keep weight to a minimum by limiting interior space (and thus, use less material). One-person tents are great for dedicated solo hikers looking to travel fast and light. Two-person tents tend to be the most popular, because they strike a good balance between weight and interior space. Most two-person tents have just enough room for two sleepers and a few stuff sacks , with backpacks and extra gear stored in the vestibules. If you want more interior space for camping comfort, you may want to bump up one size in tents (for example, buy a three-person tent to fit two hikers). Just remember, interior tent space is a tradeoff between comfort and weight. Check out our Tent Size Guide for more information on choosing which model to go with.

SEASON RATING

Three-season shelters are the most popular backpacking tents and the style we’re focusing on in this guide. They’re built for spring, summer, and fall trips where you’ll need to keep bad weather out while promoting ventilation, which helps keep interior condensation to a minimum. Three-season tents can usually handle a little snow, but they’re not made for heavy snow and harsh winter conditions. If you’re looking for a winter worthy tent, make sure to check out our list of the Best 4-Season Tents .

Freestanding tents are generally preferable because they’re easier to use and quicker to pitch. They come with a fixed pole system that can be set up almost anywhere – even on solid rock. Non-freestanding tents use stakes , guylines, and trekking poles for pitching. They save weight by cutting out tent poles, but require more time/space to pitch and will take more practice to master.

DOORS & VESTIBULES

If you plan on sleeping two people in your tent, it’s more comfortable to have two doors and two vestibules. Having separate entrances will ensure that you’re not climbing over a tentmate and two sets of gear every time you want to get in or out of your tent. That’s a huge benefit, and it’s why almost all of our backpacking tent recommendations have two doors and vestibules.

WALL CONSTRUCTION

Double-wall tents come with two separate parts – a mesh tent body and a rainfly. The mesh inner-tent acts as a barrier from condensation that forms on the inside of the rainfly. Single-wall tents reduce weight by attaching the fly sheet directly to the mesh inner-tent, but that leaves hikers vulnerable to interior condensation in wet/cold conditions. Rubbing up against a wet tent interior is the pits, so we mostly recommend double-wall tents unless you usually backpack in arid, dry climates. For ultralight hikers open to the idea of single-wall shelters, have a look at our Best Ultralight Tents list.

The main trade-off with lightweight backpacking tents is that they’re built using thinner materials, which tend to be less durable than heavy-duty shelters. That said, ultralight tents will literally last for thousands of miles if treated with care . It’s also important to remember that a sharp stick or rock will puncture just about any kind of tent fabric. If you’re tough on gear and don’t want to deal with lightweight materials, we recommend choosing one of our heavier recommendations built for durability or adding a footprint to to increase the durability of your tent floor. For our personal use, we think lightweight tents are well worth the tradeoff.

Honorable Mentions

The following backpacking tents didn’t make our final list, but they’ve still got a lot of good things going for them. You never know, one of these tents might be perfect for you:

REI Flash 2

REI has made some of our favorite tents over the years, but few have been as impressive as the Flash 2. This tent was a new offering from REI in 2023, but it’s currently out of stock for the foreseeable future. It’ll be back at some point down the line, which is why we felt it still deserved an Honorable mention on our list.

This freestanding tent has a weight and interior volume that rivals some of the most popular backpacking tents, but it costs far less than anything in its class. With its unique pole architecture, the Flash 2 manages to feel more spacious than tents with the same dimensions – like the Big Agnes Copper Spur 2. The headwall of the Flash 2 stands vertically and is supported by an arch pole that pulls the sidewalls out. As a result, you end up with more headroom where you need it most.

We’re eagerly looking forward to the return of the REI Flash 2.

REI Trail Hut 2

The affordable REI Trail Hut 2 is almost identical to the REI Trailmade 2 on our main list. The biggest difference is that the Trail Hut has a ridge pole at the peak that creates more headroom than the Trailmade has. The other key difference is that the Trail Hut has more opaque nylon on the walls for privacy, while the Trailmade includes more mesh on the walls for airflow.If you’re after a crossover tent that you’ll mostly be using for car camping and only backpacking with it occasionally, you’ll probably find this tent more comfortable. If you’ll mostly be using your crossover tent for backpacking, we recommend saving the money and going with the lighter Trailmade 2.

NEMO Dragonfly OSMO 2

This tent feels a little tight for two, but it’s a roomy option for solo hikers. This tent is very similar in design to our top pick – the Big Agnes Copper Spur HV UL2.  We prefer the ridge pole design on the Copper Spur since it pulls the headroom out more and creates more interior volume at the peak where you really want it.

The Dragonfly is very light for a freestanding tent and has a tiny packed size, so it’s a good choice for hikers looking to shave weight and bulk from their packs. 

The proprietary OSMO fabric on the Dragonfly makes it a great choice for hikers who frequently go out in foul weather. OSMO sags less than sil-nylon when wet, doesn’t absorb water, and stays waterproof for longer than standard coated fabrics.

There are a lot of big and small differences between backpacking tents but investing the time to find the right one is worth it. Whether you are counting – and minimizing – ounces, or don’t mind the extra weight if it means you get to spread out at the end of a long day, we hope out guide has you pitching your perfect tent this backpacking season. Happy trails!

Why trust us?

We understand how tough it is to find trustworthy gear advice, and that’s one of the main reasons we built CleverHiker. We live for outdoor adventure, and we take these guides very seriously.

• Our recommendations are completely independent and based on hands-on experience.
• We test outdoor gear for a living – we’ve logged over 20,000 trail miles and 1,000 nights in the wilderness.
• Our team has thru-hiked some of the most iconic long trails, including the Continental Divide Trail, Pacific Crest Trail, Appalachian Trail, Colorado Trail, Long Trail, Oregon Coast Trail, Arizona Trail, Pinhoti Trail, Superior Hiking Trail, as well as extensive peak bagging, and international treks.
• We field test every product we recommend, which is sadly not the norm.
• We travel to industry trade shows to stay up-to-date on product innovations.
• We continuously update our guides throughout the year and when new products launch.
• We treat recommendations to our readers as if they were for our family and friends.
• We’re lifelong learners and we’re always open to feedback. If you think we’ve missed a worthy product or got something wrong, we’d love to know about it.

Need More Backpacking Advice?

10 Best Camping Tents of 2024

7 Best Budget Backpacking Tents of 2024

10 Best Ultralight Tents of 2024

Best 4-Season Tents of 2024

Backpacking & Camping Tent Size Guide

10 Best Backpacking & Camping Pillows of 2024

10 Best Hammocks for Backpacking & Camping in 2024

10 Best Backpacking Chairs of 2024

10 Best Backpacking Quilts of 2024

10 Best Backpacking Sleeping Bags of 2024

10 Best Backpacking Sleeping Pads of 2024

10 Best Backpacking Stoves of 2024

Get the best content from cleverhiker & around the backpacking world.

Social media is great, but our bi-weekly newsletter is a much better way to stay in the know.

Sign up to get our curated emails with the best content from CleverHiker and around the backpacking world. You’ll be turned on to new videos, trip reports, gear reviews, inspiring outdoor stories and much more. So get in the mix!

The ridgy-didge outdoor & adventure blog!

Best 4WD & Touring Tents for 2023

The highlighter’s out of ink, the spreadsheets are scrawled with aggressive pen markings, and our cups are out of coffee – but we’ve done it. We’ve got the list. We can finally reveal the top 10 best-selling 4WD and touring tents for 2023.

Touring tents are often selected for rugged outback adventures and 4WD road trips due to their durability and easy of setup. In light of that, every tent that made the list was held to three stipulations:

1. Freestanding and standalone 2. Canvas or a tough synthetic construction, to withstand the rigours of the outback 3. Featuring (in part) a quick-pitch design for easy setup and pack down

Many of these tents are also used for general camping – but if you’re after a model that caters for both a weekend away and an extended outback jaunt, both styles of adventure can be covered with the options below.

Let’s work back from number 10!

10. Rooftop Tents

Popular in the past year has been the 23Zero Dakota 2200 Rooftop Tent with LST.

Built for blissful outback slumbers, Snowys’ range of rooftop tents stretches further than daylight at dawn. Popular in the past year has been the Dakota 2200 Rooftop Tent with LST by 23Zero .

This tent uses 23ZERO’s Light Suppression Technology (LST) – a dark coating on the inner that keeps your shelter dark during the dazzling mornings, meanwhile ensuring a cool inside temperature on warmer days. Constructed from a rugged 280gsm polycotton tear-check canvas, its fine PVC-coated insect mesh also allows airflow and protection from pests. From sunshiny haze to stargazing, zip down the sky roof or 180-degree windows for air circulation through the tent’s side vents. Collapsing into a 600gsm PVC transit cover with D-ring compression straps, pack-down is easy and efficient ahead of your next destination. 

Camp in rooftop royalty, owed to the wide range of rooftop tent designs available at Snowys for elevating every road trip. Additional annexes also serve as wind and rain protection in unideal weather, from drizzle to downpour.

9. Oztent RX-5

The Oztent RX-5 is tough, weatherproof and easy to pitch.

For the families who love adventure, the Oztent RX-5 is tough, weatherproof, and easy to pitch.

When first released, the RX tent was available in two sizes: the RX-4 and the RX-5 . Oztent then decided to focus this range on the larger model, which continues to gain interest and momentum as a touring tent.

This tent is an all-in-one made from ModCan canvas material, offering a protected sleeping area at the rear. Including a removable panel system that attaches under the awning and a floor, it allows the option to create an additional weatherproof room too. In fine weather, the front wall and floor can be left off, leaving only the awning for shade. When attached, the wall and floor create a protected space that extends the living area of your tent.

Complete with a flysheet, doors, windows, and even a skylight – stay comfortable in any climate. The Oztent RX-5 is perfect as an all-in-one ‘ducks-nuts’ solution for outback touring and family camping.

8. Oztent SV-5 Max

The SV-5 Max continues to gain a loyal fanbase.

A true-blue head-turner, the SV-5 Max continues to gain a loyal fanbase. Its backstory will tug at the heartstrings – named in honour of Oztent’s late owner Shane Viglione – but that’s only part of why it’s made the top ten.

The SV-5 endures all the seasons and comfortably sleeps four people. If you took all the best features from the RX-5 and full RV range, then added a few more, this is the result . Its 8oz Ripstop canvas construction also features a 5-metre wide polyester zip-in tarp extension, plus a silver-coated polyester fly. Complete with everything you need – from the heat-sealed PVC tub floor, to the SkyMesh Skylight – there’s also the option to create another enclosed space using the separately available side and front panels that attach to the awning.

Spacious, tough, and just as easy to set up as the original 30-second tent – the SV-5 Max is one of the leading spacious and ultra livable tents in the 4WD and touring range.

7. BlackWolf Turbo and Turbo Plus

A canvas Turbo tent offers excellent durability. BlackWolf Turbo 300

The Black Wolf Turbo tent range is ideal for campers after a balance of simplicity, livability, and durability. There are two series in the range (differentiated by their fabric), and while the canvas series has maintained a strong foothold it is often trumped by its lightweight cousin. This is most likely on account of its additional weight and higher cost.

A canvas Turbo tent offers excellent durability. Known for their easy setup and hard-wearing canvas construction, the Turbo range offers a fuss- and stress-free camping experience. With tape-sealed seams where the wall meets the floor, PVC storm flaps, and reinforcing along the roof poles for weather protection and stability – the Turbo is built for tough Aussie conditions.

If you can afford both the extra dollars and grams, the benefit is a quick-pitch and livable touring tent year after year. There are also many add-on accessories available for a more customised setup.

The Turbo Plus is perfect for families who require extra living space on tour. BlackWolf Turbo Plus 240

The Turbo Plus is a hardwearing and quick-pitch design, perfect for families who require extra living space on tour.

Carrying over the tape-sealed seams, PVC storm flaps, and reinforcing along the roof poles for sturdiness, the Turbo Plus also features a fly with wider corners to guard against water leakage. For easy setup and pack down, the siliconised polyester floor is easy to roll. Plus – extend your living space with the three-pole awning, or section it off using the optional panels to create an enclosed screen room.

The timelessly designed Turbo Plus is ideal for bigger groups on the move, boasting durability, space, and efficiency in the outdoors.

6. Darche Safari

The Safari is a single skin tent with a basic pole structure and a zip-on front awning. Pictured: Darche Safari 350

They may be one place below their last ranking, but the Darche Safari tents continue to deliver. Available in two sizes – the  260  and  350  – they’re best described as simplistic and durable, with a few bells and whistles.

The Safari is a single skin tent with a basic pole structure and a zip-on front awning. Optional side  walls  are also available to extend the sheltered space in and around your tent.

This model is perfect for tourers seeking simplicity, but with more than one set-up option.

5. BlackWolf Turbo 240 X-Lite LF

The Turbo 240 X-Lite LF still has the durability to see you through many kilometres of outback touring.

On this list, the  240 X-Lite LF  is nestled in at the lightweight end of the touring tents – but based on customer feedback, we reckon it still has the durability to see you through many kilometres of outback touring.

Setup is pretty much the same as regular Black Wolf Turbo tents. Its smaller vestibule still provides standing space, while the roof poles are made from a flexible composite material reducing both weight and packed size.

This tent is ideal for weight-conscious individuals, or couples on outback adventures.

4. BlackWolf Turbo Lite Cabin & Turbo Lite Twin

The Turbo Lites boast a lightweight, Ripstop polyester construction. BlackWolf Turbo Lite Cabin 450

Turbo Lite Cabin

Unlike the canvas series, the Turbo Lites boast a lightweight, Ripstop polyester construction.

For the families who love each other’s company, but still like their own privacy – the Black Wolf Turbo Lite Cabin provides that space. With familiar features including tape-sealed seams where the wall meets the floor, PVC storm flaps for weather protection, and reinforcing along the roof poles for stability, the Turbo Lite Cabin has a 6-way hub for additional headroom and a centre zip allowing either two side-by-side sanctuaries, or one large space.

The Turbo Lite Twin offers an added level of luxury. Pictured: BlackWolf Turbo Lite Twin 300

Turbo Lite Twin

The Turbo Lite Twin offers a similar level comfort and space, with an added layer of luxury. With the features of the Cabin, the Lite Twin also has a central room with two each side that can be either closed off for privacy or left open to allow a larger living space throughout the tent. The back door can also can be expanded as a basic, two-pole awning, or closed for privacy.

3. BlackWolf Turbo Lite and Turbo Lite Plus

The ‘Lite’ version of the Black Wolf Turbo Tents straddle the balance between general camping and outback touring. Pictured: BlackWolf Turbo Lite 240

Almost unbeatable as an all-round family camping and 4WD touring tent, the ‘Lite’ or synthetic version of the  Black Wolf Turbo Tents  straddle the balance between general camping and outback touring like a bird on a wire!

These tents boast the same durable aluminium frame as their canvas counterparts, only 23mm instead of 25mm. Their 150D Ripstop synthetic fabric construction also offers excellent durability, meanwhile shaving about 25% off the weight.

The ‘ Lite ’ versions of the Turbo tents are also available in a larger range of sizes and configurations than the canvas models – plus, compatible with a host of optional accessories for a more personalised campsite setup.

The Turbo Lite series are almost unbeatable as an all-round family camping and 4WD touring tent. Pictured: BlackWolf Turbo Lite Plus 240

Turbo Lite Plus

Ideal for shorter getaways, the Lite and Lite Plus versions of the Turbo tent range blend pared-back portability with adequate space, versatility, and durability built for outback conditions. Where the Lite features a three-pole awning to extend the living area, the Lite Plus includes a curtain divider to either split the space into two rooms or detach for a larger living area.

The Turbo Lite and Lite Plus tents offer fuss-free camping from the short weekends away to the more extended getaways.

2. Oztent RV Plus: 3 and 5

Oztent have elevated the RV range with their RV Plus tents. Pictured: Oztent RV-5 Plus

Sure, there’s the RV – but then there’s the RV Plus , of which the RV-3 and RV-5 ranked highly over the past year.

Keeping all the original, familiar features including the 30-second setup, quality 8oz Ripstop polycotton canvas, large attached awning, and modular design – Oztent have elevated the RV with a SkyMesh Skylight built into the roof, including easy, internal open and closing for stargazing and adequate airflow. A 210T silver-coated Ripstop polyester fly allows increased ventilation and reduces condensation, while the awning zips have been redesigned to allow attaching of accessories (such as walls) for wet weather protection.

Mirroring the above too, the RV-5 Plus boasts a heat-sealed tub floor made from heavy-duty 510g PVC, plus a strong aluminium frame capable of effortless, 30-second assembling and disassembling by a single camper!

The RV-3 and RV-5 Plus tents are reflection of Oztent’s success in keeping what works and adding what exceeds every outdoor adventurer’s expectations.

1. Oztent RV: 3, 4, and 5

The original Oztent RV Tents have earned the top spot for another year in review. Pictured: Oztent RV-4

Well, this is awkward.

The truth is, the original Oztent RV Tents have earned the top spot for another year in review. These tents are consistently our best-selling touring tents by far, maintaining the number one position.

On account of both their ease of use and reliability in rugged outback conditions, the Oztent RV range goes hand-in-hand with 4WD and outback touring. Their simple yet robust design with easy-to-set-up frame leaves most of our customers wondering why they didn’t snag one sooner. Constructed with a trusted, 8oz Ripstop canvas, RV tents boast a strong, aluminium frame and heavy-duty PVC floor for ultimate outdoor durability.

With optional accessories such as front panels , side panels , and custom mesh floor savers sized for each model – plus a whole host more – you can create the setup style best suited to your campsite.

We’ve got to mention these…

While they tend to lack the same level of durability as the touring tents listed above, the Coleman Instant Up and OZtrail Fast Frame series are lightweight and quick-pitch family camping alternatives.

Blocking invasive haze on a weekend away is straight-up simple. Pictured: Coleman Instant Up 6P Lighted Northstar Darkroom

Coleman Instant Up

Blocking invasive haze on a weekend away is straight-up simple with the Instant Up Lighted Northstar Darkroom tent. Owing to the coating on the rainfly, 95% of light is blocked out while internal heat is reduced by up to 5 degrees. A polyoxford PVC floor offers durability, a 3000mm waterhead rated fly defies the drizzle, and Coleman’s Circle Ventilation system of ultrafine mesh maintains a comfortable climate. Setting up is easy too, while the interior features a flexible silicone LED lighting strip for convenient illumination at the flick of a switch. 

The Fast Frame BlockOut also adopts technology designed to both reduce heat and block sunlight. Pictured: OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut 4P

OZtrail Fast Frame

There’s more where that came from, showcased by the Fast Frame BlockOut by OZtrail. Available in 4P, 6P, and 10P, this model also adopts technology designed to both reduce heat and block sunlight from permeating your tent via its BlockOut coating on the 3000mm waterhead rated fly.

Its front vestibule features an awning for stretching out in your outback hangout, while a heavy-duty hub ensures stability when setup. A zippered access port allows a light or fan cable to feed through – plus, embrace the breeze through the No-See-Um mesh across large side windows and both the front and rear doors, enhanced by the ClimaTech vents.

What’s the most you’ve ever put your touring tent through?

Trekker, surfer, climber, mountain biker, runner, camper. Participator in most things… master of none.

Leave a comment: Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Hi, I honestly cannot see how the Oztent gets top billing with you people. Is it to do with numbers sold, as I am sure it is not camping experience related! Has anyone there had any real camping experience??? I doubt it! I have been camping with numerous tents (absolutely no trailer or caravan) for over 60 years. For around the last 12 years, my wife and I have used a Blackwolf 2.4 lite plus. In my honest opinion it has been miles away the BEST tent we have ever had. Sure, a little more expensive than most other tents but far and away the best tent out there. My daughter lived in Mackay Qld for years and my 3rd son lived in Darwin for 10 years. Our Blackwolf has been around and through the block 7 times with a minimum of 30 setups each trip. These days the floor near the poles is starting to tear, but that’s it. We have a routine when we stop, I put the tent up while my wife inflates the air bed and gets the bedding ready. In under 10 minutes we are setup in a very well designed and spacious tent. I do not have any involvement with Blackwolf whatsoever, only, over 60 years experience camping in tents.

So cheap compared to prices in New Zealand man are we getting ripped off in mark up

I looked at the RV5 today and can’t understand why they are so good when you can only stand up in the doorway the back end is low as or was it not set up properly?

Hi there Bruce, thanks for your message! It’s really down to personal preference – RVs are well-known for their quick set-up and durability, though there are certainly better options if you’re after more living space.

The Best tents are Diamantina safari tents

Will you guys be planning to do a video on the Darche Safari range? They seem neat but not a heap of information online.

I would also give a big thumbs up for the Oztent Eyre II ,which is my go-to tent for longer camping trips, it is a good size and a bit lighter than RV-5, making it a bit easier to lug around. It’s only minor weakness is the thin tent floor

As Graeme pointed out, the Eyre series was great value for money, it is disappointing that Oztent have deleted the range. I have been looking for a second-hand one for my son and they don’t seem to turn up

I don’t want to be seen to be jumping on the band wagon, but if I could only buy one tent , an Oztrail Tourer would be the one for me. We brought one for my son for Christmas holidays at Merimbula. Now I regret telling him he could have it. It can comfortably handle a truckload of rain , and 60kmh winds in an exposed position. Easy to put up, and very well made. Love it!

Nothin’ wrong with jumping on that band-wagon, Robgee! The Tourer is like that comfy pair of jeans that sees you through the years 😉

You mention the oztent tagalong, and the picture has it attached to a 4WD awning, however my understanding (from your answers on the product page: https://www.snowys.com.au/tagalong-tents ), was that the tagalong tents could NOT be connected to existing awnings, even with the Oztent awning connector ( https://www.snowys.com.au/rv-caravan-connectors ).

Is this still the case? Or, can the tagalong tent be free standing with the additional of some extra poles??

Hi Duncan, We need to change that image, the Tagalong can’t be attached as shown as the zippers run in the wrong direction in order for the caravan connector to be used. We are hoping to create a video one day soon on the Tagalong tents as the information from Oztent is limited, and despite that picture (which we will change out soon) coming from them it isn’t a combination that will work.

Ive had the oztrail tourer 9 plus for many years..so quick to put up and super durable….camped everywhere in it. I once camped in a depression woke up after heavy rain with that waterbed feeling underneath the tent looked outside and had water up to just below the door zipper… and it didn’t let any in all night…thats when i truly fell in love with it!!

We have the oztent RX5 its great. On overnight stops we use it as what I call the RV5 configaration and on long stays the RX5 configaration works perfectly well for us quick set up we just love it. Would not leave town without it. By the way I have used a lot of driffent tents in my long life for me this is perfect for us but in sayig that there some great tents out there and its what you are comfortable with this one suites us down to a tee. And we are going to give it a good work out in western Qld in the middle of the year I cant wait.

My number one is the Kodiak canvas flexbow tent. Simple, strong, great build quality and plenty of room.

I can’t believe the Tourer 9 tents are still up there, I purchased mine in 2003 maybe 2004 we have been all over the east coast and from Darwin to Melbourne and back again. Its been used on the beach, in the bush and just in the back yard for the kids.

Ours is the Tourer 9 Plus and she is about to get another work-out in the Simpson next month for 30 days.

The only issue we have ever had was the bag that the tent comes in has deteriorated pretty badly, other than that, it’s still dry when raining and has always been easy to set up.

The oztent Eyre range is the most under rated touring tent. The Eyre 2 is the same size as RV5 but almost half the price. I prefer the ripstop 300D material over the canvas RV’s. It is lighter and better IMO. The 210D floor material is slightly thin but I always use a good ground mat. Paid $950 for tent and complete delux front panels. Can’t get better than that.

Thanks for your feedback, Graeme. We don’t currently carry the Oztrail Eyre tent so we can’t comment first hand on its performance or value for money. No doubt, being an Oztent product, it’s well made though and there are obvious benefits to having a lighter tent on any camping trip. ~ Ben

Newsletter Sign Up

MSR Hubba Tour 2 Tent Review

The new MSR Hubba Tour 2 is a lightweight tent designed for longer-term adventure touring  — think epic bikepacking or motorcycle touring trips that cover varied terrain ranging in duration from a week to a year.

The MSR Hubba Tour Tent isn’t exactly an ultralight backpacking tent and it’s definitely not a typical camping tent — it’s a specialized hybrid tent. It’s based upon the popular MSR Hubba Hubba NX tent but it includes a massive built-in vestibule and a design that lets you pitch the tent in the rain without getting the inside wet while you’re doing it.

To get us a closer look at this interesting new design, MSR sent Man Makes Fire a review unit. Here is what we learned:

MSR Hubba Tour Tent Review: Initial Impressions

While the MSR Hubba Tour 2 Tent is relatively lightweight, hardcore backpackers might scoff at the weight, which is about 4 lbs 14 oz for the trail weight in the 2-person Hubba Tour. To put this in perspective, this is the approximate trail weight of a standard entry-level-to-midrange backpacking tent. Lots of backpackers take 4-plus pound tents backpacking because they’re affordable, durable, free-standing and easy to use — but the Hubba Tour 2 does it with a massive vestibule.

When the weather is great, we hardly think about vestibules, but what happens when the weather turns bad for a couple of days in a row? Suddenly the vestibule coverage area takes on a whole new meaning.

The point is, the MSR Hubba Tour could work well for backpackers with a dog or for extended trips where a bit more protection from the elements would be handy for gear storage — or even letting your socks or shorts dry without stringing it all up inside your sleeping area. You could use an ultralight tarp with or without trekking poles, of course, but adventure touring when you’re covering vast distances means you might need to choose a campsite without trees — and you certainly don’t need trekking poles if you’re on a bike.

MSR Hubba Tour Tent Review: Made for Roads, Trails and Waterways

MSR says the Hubba Tour is designed directly for the growing adventure touring community. It’s built for bikepackers or cycle tourers riding ultra, backroads, fat bikes or expedition bikes, as well as canoeing tourers and cross-country tourers who cover roads, trails and waterways for weeks at a time. Obviously these are great uses for the MSR Hubba Tour lineup, but it’s also light enough for the occasional backpacking trip and durable enough for the occasional car camping trip: I’m not saying it’s the best backpacking tent or the best camping tent , but it does have a versatile cross-purpose design.

The best two features of the Hubba Tour is the exoskeleton pole system that lets you pitch the tent in the rain without getting the interior wet — and, of course, the gear-covering vestibule.

Speaking of this vestibule, touring adventurers often spend weeks away from most people but occasionally they cross paths with more populated, shared camping areas . . . sometimes you want to tuck your gear out of sight when you leave the immediate vicinity of your tent, and the vestibule gives you plenty of space for this.

MSR Hubba Tour Tent Review: Design and Setup

The primary tent pole system is all shock-corded together. This means you pull it out and start fitting the high-quality ultralight aluminum poles together to form the basic shape — and you can’t get it wrong. Each corner of the sleeping area of the tent has a grommet for the end of a leg pole, and the main pole arcs over the top. Next, you clip the tent onto the poles, raising the tent and giving it volume. The Hubba Tour does not have a traditionally separate rain fly, but the main sleeping area has its own ceiling body, which has a DWR coating. It hangs down through removable support connections from the rain fly.

The vestibule requires a separate-but-simple pole system that creates a half-circle. This vestibule material is connected to the main sleeping area of the tent and the half-circle pole system gives the end of the vestibule shape. In order to keep it standing upright, you do have to stake it down. So, technically, this isn’t exactly freestanding but it’s darn close.

There is a large door to the vestibule and then another door to enter the main tent. The other side of the tent includes its own door and small vestibule so you can enter and exit the tent from either side. This is great for calls of nature in the middle of the night — and it’s great if your vestibule turns into a full-on gear garage.

MSR includes two vents, which will help with air flow during bad weather or hot weather. Either way, you’ll likely want to prop these vents fully open. For additional air flow and ventilation, you can open the two exterior doors all the way, leave them partially unzipped or just partially unzipped near the tops. This will give you cross-breeze ventilation and help moisture escape — the two doors to the main body of the tent have triangular mesh vents, too.

Personally, I would like to see a bit more mesh on the interior doors — I’d even take a slight weight hit to have fully meshed doors that could also zip closed and remain mostly waterproof.

MSR Hubba Tour Tent: Plenty of Pockets and Gear Loops

Part of the value of the Hubba Tour 2 Tent is in the gear storage thought that went into the design. You get a couple of loops for hanging light gear in the vestibule, as well as a partial groundsheet to keep your gear off the ground. There are several mesh pockets inside the tent, which will let you store your smartphone, headlamps and odds and ends.

The main sleeping area of the Hubba Tour 2 is 88″ x 52″ . . . and it’s a full rectangle. A lot of two-person tents taper together at the feet, and since I like foot room, sticking with a real rectangle is nice. In addition, if you like to use a wider lightweight sleeping pad , two such pads will easily fit side-by-side in the Hubba Tour 2.

MSR Hubba Tour Tents: MSR’s New Coating

The Hubba Tour series of tents use an MSR-exclusive “Xtreme Shield” waterproofing coating on the breathable 20D rainfly and 30D floor. MSR says this coating is more durable and will last three times longer than standard coatings.

Will this coating truly last longer than other waterproofing systems? Hard to say, but MSR seems pretty proud of its Xtreme Shield . . . and in my experience, MSR hasn’t been the kind of company that has had trouble with hyperbole — all of MSR’s gear is usually excellent and durable.

All-in-all, the MSR Hubba Tour 2 is the sort of tent that makes you want to start planning an epic ride or combo trip — whatever the weather. If you get thoroughly soaked on a ride, you can set up the tent and remove your wet clothes under the cover of the vestibule without introducing a bunch of water to your sleeping area. You even have room for motorcycle boots, helmets, jackets and pants. The overall construction is durable. Everything fits together exactly as it should. It’s easy to pitch and easy to tighten through the built-in straps and guylines. Fit and finish is impeccable. For the right kind of adventurer who can really use a roomy vestibule, the MSR Hubba Tour could be the perfect new hybrid tent. Highly recommended.

Get the Gear:

MSR Hubba Tour 1

Check shipping/pricing: Amazon | AvidMax | CampSaver | Moosejaw

MSR Hubba Tour 2

Check shipping/pricing: Amazon | AvidMax | CampSaver | EMS | Moosejaw

MSR Hubba Tour 3

Check shipping/pricing: Amazon | CampSaver | Moosejaw

One note: If you already have an MSR Hubba or Elixir backpacking tent, MSR offers an add-on “gear shed” that connects to the side of the Hubba or Elixir 1, 2 and 3-person Hubba and Elixir tents. Aptly called the MSR Gear Shed , it will create a 26.5-square-foot covered vestibule and add about 1 lbs 13 oz to your tent trail weight. Any downsides? Setup is not nearly as simple and you’re far more likely to get the interior of your tent wet if you have to set it up during a rainstorm, especially if you’re already cold and tired. With the 2-person Hubba Hubba NX , you’ll have a similar overall weight if you add the Gear Shed — but you’ll be quite a bit heavier with an Elixir (which is a heavier tent to start with). On the plus side, you can save about $90 by ordering the MSR Gear Shed with a Hubba Hubba NX 2  instead of the dedicated Hubba Tour 2 . . . and you’ll still get the massive vestibule option for adventure touring . . . plus end up with an MSR fan-favorite all-around backpacking tent in the Hubba Hubba NX 2. Something to think about if you lean more toward backpacking but still want plenty of gear space.

Best Camping Tents of 2024

For your home away from home in the outdoors, we break down the year’s top tents for camping from premium to budget.

Switchback Travel ( Jason Hummel )

We use affiliate links and may receive a small commission on purchases. Read more about us . 

Spacious, user-friendly, and feature-rich camping tents are made to facilitate a relatively luxurious experience in the outdoors. Many of these behemoths offer enough room to set up cots or even chairs and a table for card games on a rainy day. For car campers who take a couple trips each year during the summer months, even the cheapest tents on this list will get the job done. For tougher conditions or more frequent use, it's worth spending up for better materials and interior space. For going on a decade, the Switchback Travel team has been camping all over the country to bring you the latest and greatest options, and below we break down our 19 favorites for 2024. For more background information, see our comparison table and buying advice below the picks.

Editor’s note: We updated this guide on May 24, 2024, to swap the six-person Cabela's Alaskan Guide (currently out of stock) to the larger eight-person capacity. We also scanned the guide to ensure all prices, colorways, and product write-ups are current at the time of publishing.  

Our Team's Camping Tent Picks

• Best Overall Camping Tent: The North Face Wawona 6
• A Close Second (With a Simpler Setup Process): Nemo Aurora Highrise 6P
• Best Budget Camping Tent: Coleman Skydome 6P
• Best Reliability in Rough Weather:  REI Co-op Base Camp 6
• Best Crossover Camping/Backpacking Tent: Marmot Tungsten 4P

Best Overall Camping Tent

1. the north face wawona 6 ($500).

The North Face can be hit or miss in the camping market, but they have a winner in their Wawona collection. Updated fairly recently, the biggest shift was to a hybrid double-wall construction (the prior generation used a less breathable single-wall build), and they also retooled the pole structure to make setup easier. Offered in four- and six-person capacities, the tunnel-like design is reminiscent of REI’s Wonderland 6 below and provides a generous amount of interior space, including around 3 more square feet of floor area for $50 less. And we love the massive front vestibule (44.7 sq. ft.) that easily doubles as a seating area—to achieve the same versatility with the Wonderland, you’ll have to purchase the Mud Room add-on ($125) separately. Added up, the Wawona is an impressively livable design and an excellent all-around value. 

That said, despite the updated pole structure, we still found the Wawona to be considerably time-consuming and tedious to set up. The vestibule, in particular, must be guyed out tightly to stay upright, and the unique pole structure took some time to get taut and secure. The upside is that the hybrid double-wall design vents considerably better than a single-wall tent, and it’s also less prone to collecting moisture in humid or rainy weather. Final nitpicks include the rainfly, which doesn’t cover the lower portion of the tent (this section is still waterproof), and the all-mesh door can be a source of heat loss and drafts in the cold. But no tent is perfect, and the Wawona’s mesh-heavy build, expansive interior, and reasonable cost earn it our top billing for 2024. It’s also sold in a  smaller four-person capacity ($400) if you don't need as much space.  See The North Face Wawona 6  

A Close Second (With a Simpler Setup Process)

2. nemo aurora highrise 6p ($500).

New Hampshire-based Nemo introduced the Aurora collection a few years ago, adding a competitor to crossover options like the Marmot Tungsten and Mountain Hardwear Mineral King below. The latest Highrise variation, however, takes aim at the premium and luxurious end of the market with a standing-height interior, steep sidewalls, and massive footprint that rival the livability of competitors like the top-rated Wawona and REI Wonderland below. As we’ve come to expect from Nemo, the Aurora Highrise is thoughtfully built with windows at each side that make it easy to air things out and remain protected from rain when open, two large doors and vestibules, a rainfly that can be staked out as an awning (poles sold separately), and high-quality materials throughout—including robust aluminum poles and a thick 150-denier floor that’s outfitted with a fun checkered pattern.

We put the Aurora through a summer of testing in the Pacific Northwest and came away thoroughly impressed. The tent is surprisingly fast and intuitive to set up (it took around 5 minutes with two people and can easily be done solo), and all of the components have a very hard-wearing and confidence-inspiring feel. We also love the massive, oval-shaped main door that makes entry and exit a breeze, although we wish the second door shared the same design (it’s around half the size). The dome shape also sacrifices some headroom at the sides—REI’s tunnel-like Wonderland does a better job at maximizing the peak height—and you can get more vestibule space for big and bulky items with the Wawona above. But the advantages in usability and build quality are hard to beat, making the Aurora a quick favorite among our staff... Read in-depth review See the Nemo Aurora Highrise 6P at REI  

Best Budget Camping Tent

3. coleman skydome 6p ($150).

Coleman is practically synonymous with affordably priced camping gear, so it comes as little surprise that their Skydome 6 slots in as our top budget pick this season. What is surprising to us, however, is how modern this tent looks and feels. In stark contrast to Coleman’s fairly dated and cheap-feeling Sundome below, the Skydome is far more weather-worthy with a full-coverage rainfly (most of the sides are exposed on the Sundome fly) and uses pre-bent poles and more vertical walls that open up the interior in a big way. We also love that the poles are pre-attached to make setup a breeze, and the wide door and generously sized vestibule really help boost overall convenience.

Diving deeper into the differences between the two Coleman models, the Skydome boasts 15 fewer square feet of floor area, but the aforementioned pole structure and vertical walls go a long way toward maximizing livability. In terms of value, the Skydome retails for $20 more than the Sundome (you can typically score both tents at a sizable discount on Amazon), but those who get out even just a few weekends each year will likely appreciate the modernized build. It’s true that the Skydome has only one door and uses cheaper materials than the more premium options on our list—including fiberglass poles that aren’t as hardwearing as aluminum—but the quick setup and roomy interior are a winning combination. A final budget-friendly design to consider is REI’s new Campwell , although the Coleman wins out in spaciousness and ease of use for a considerable $100 less.  See the Coleman Skydome 6P

Best Reliability in Rough Weather

4. rei co-op base camp 6 ($549).

Sitting near the top of REI's camping lineup for 2024 is their Base Camp 6, which takes cues from mountaineering designs for a sizable boost in weather-worthiness. The dome shape and overlapping five-pole system mean the walls aren’t as vertical as the Wawona's above, but it’s still very easy to move around inside, and the reward is far better resistance against strong gusts. And the rest of the design is equally up to snuff with an excellent mix of quality materials and design features, including four roof vents and a low side vent, functional organization, and even reflective detailing to help you see the tent in the dark. It's true that more specialized models like Cabela’s Alaskan Guide below are better suited for true four-season conditions, but the Base Camp will get the job done in most inclement three-season weather—which is realistically all most campers need.

It’s worth noting that the Base Camp is the third-priciest option in REI’s camping tent collection (right behind the Wonderland 6 and Wonderland X tents below). It’s far and away the most weather-ready option of the bunch, but it uses less mesh than both the Wonderland and Skyward below, which has a notable impact on ventilation. Additionally, despite a similarly sized floor area, the Base Camp feels noticeably less roomy due to the lack of vertical walls. In the end, we’d break it down as follows: The Skyward is the value leader and offers plenty of tent for most family campers, the Base Camp is best for those who plan to take their tent into relatively rough and rowdy weather, and the Wonderland is the most luxurious, fully featured option for those looking for the ultimate home-in-the-woods experience... Read in-depth review See the REI Co-op Base Camp 6  

Best Crossover Camping/Backpacking Tent

5. marmot tungsten 4p ($399).

Most of the tents on this list are strictly of the car-camping variety, meaning they’re heavy enough that you won’t be carrying them more than a few steps from your vehicle. However, there are a handful of crossover options that can pull double duty should you want to venture into the backcountry. Marmot’s Tungsten 4P is case in point: For car camping, the Tungsten can accommodate multiple sleeping pads side-by-side and has a peak height of 53 inches, which is enough for sitting up, changing, or playing a game of cards. Moreover, the pole design does a nice job of stretching the walls to be nearly vertical at the bottom, giving the interior a relatively open feel. At just over 9 pounds, the Tungsten isn’t a featherweight by any means (and we’re sad to see that weight jumped by a considerable 12.8 oz. recently), but it's perfectly serviceable for camping and short backpacking trips, especially if you can divvy up the carrying responsibilities.

However, as with nearly all crossover tents, the Marmot Tungsten has its fair share of compromises. For those who strictly car camp, a dedicated camping tent is far superior in terms of livable space and durability: The Tungsten uses thinner materials to cut weight, and Marmot dropped 5.6 square feet off the tent’s footprint with their most recent update (floor area went from 58.3 to 52.7 sq. ft.). On the other end of the spectrum, those who are more serious about backpacking may want a lighter and more compressible design like Big Agnes’ Copper Spur HV UL (the 4P model shaves off around 3.5 lb. and packs down much better than the Tungsten, although it costs a whopping $800). For smaller families or couples, Marmot also makes this tent in two- and three-person versions, which bring the weight down considerably, or a one-person version if your flying solo. See the Marmot Tungsten 4P

Best of the Rest

6. rei co-op wonderland 6 ($550).

The North Face’s Wawona 6 above hits a better balance of price and roominess, but REI’s Wonderland 6 (which replaced the extremely popular Kingdom a couple seasons back) wins out in terms of features. Like the Kingdom, this luxurious tent is highlighted by near-vertical walls, lots of mesh for ventilation and stargazing (including well-placed triangular windows), and a tunnel-like shape that delivers fantastic livability. For families and larger groups, the six-person variation is excellent: There’s plenty of room to stand up and spread out, color-coded components to make setup quick and easy, and a center divider allows you to separate sleeping from daytime areas. It’s true the Wonderland is expensive at $550, but it’s not far off from competitors like the Marmot Limestone ($529) and or MSR Habiscape ($600) below, and being an REI Co-op member ($30 for a lifetime membership) gets you 10% back if you purchase the tent at full price.

What did REI change when replacing the Kingdom with the Wonderland? Despite an identical floor area and peak height, the Wonderland now features narrow awnings above each door that offer little in the way of protection. REI does sell a separate Mud Room attachment for $125 to cover the entryway and increase storage space, but it tacks on another 100 inches to the tent’s already-substantial footprint. The scalloped rainfly also leaves a good portion of the sides exposed to moisture, although REI did drop the top roof vents, which were a source of vulnerability on the Kingdom. Finally, the Wonderland has a less functional storage layout and trades the handy backpack-style stuff sack for a smaller and more basic design. But the standout livability and high-quality construction remain, making the Wonderland very appealing for families and large groups. For those camping in the sunniest of climes, REI also sells the Wonderland 6 Titanium for an extra $100, which features a UV-enhanced rainfly...  Read in-depth review See the REI Co-op Wonderland 6

7. Kelty Wireless 6 ($280)

Many of the tents on this list cost well over $300, but budget-oriented Kelty always seems to do a nice job at mixing quality and value. Their Wireless is case in point: It’s relatively affordable at $280 for the six-person version but includes a number of upgrades compared to cheaper tents like the Coleman Skydome above and Sundome below. Namely, you get two doors and two vestibules (both Colemans only have one), along with a full-coverage rainfly for wet and windy conditions (the Sundome’s covers just the top). Kelty also uses more mesh in the construction, making it easier to keep cool in the summer heat. Throw in a decently roomy interior with a center ridgepole that stretches the walls up and away (again, both Colemans lack this), and you have one heckuva value.

What do you sacrifice with the Kelty Wireless? First, the floor material and mesh are thinner than the more expensive options on this list. This does help keep weight reasonable, but it means that the tent will be less durable over time. Second, the fiberglass poles won’t hold up as well as aluminum in rough weather. Finally, the Wireless is a very popular budget option, and you may have a hard time getting your hands on one—we’ve seen the tent go in and out of stock several times over the past year, although it’s widely available at the time of publishing. These issues aside, the Wireless is a great camping tent for those who don’t want to break the bank. And for another good value from Kelty with a similar shape and floor area for a little less weight, see their $240 Tallboy 6 . See the Kelty Wireless 6

8. Marmot Limestone 6P ($529)

The livability of the TNF Wawona and REI Wonderland above are tough to beat, but Marmot offers another quality setup in the Limestone. This camping tent includes ample sleeping space for six (or four if you like to spread out), is easy to pitch, and is reasonably waterproof thanks to a full-coverage rainfly and taut DAC pole design. And in addition to its tall 76-inch peak height (the exact same peak height as the Wawona and just two inches shorter than the Wonderland), the Marmot’s poles also effectively stretch the walls outwards to create an even roomier-feeling interior. It’s true that the Limestone is on the pricier end at $529, but it’s a little cheaper than the Wonderland and lighter-weight and more packable, too.

For those who camp only on warm summer days, the Limestone is ideal: Its mesh-heavy design, vents, and near-vertical walls make it comfortable even with the fly on. That said, it can't match the burlier pole layout of the Aurora above, and the upright shape is susceptible to bowing in moderate gusts (the Aurora is more dome-like by comparison). Marmot’s own Halo is a more weather-ready option with a beefed-up pole structure and less mesh in the tent body, although it’s a substantial $150 pricier (for the 6P version) and makes sacrifices in weight and ventilation. In the end, the Limestone doesn't stand out in any particular category—price, interior space, or weather protection—but it's a solid all-rounder from a well-respected brand. See the Marmot Limestone 6P

9. Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 ($375)

Mountain Hardwear typically focuses their efforts at the technical end of the spectrum—their four-season Trango is a common sight at high-altitude basecamps around the world—but their camping tent lineup is gaining similar traction among the less extreme outdoors crowd. We especially like their Mineral King 3, which goes head-to-head with Marmot’s Tungsten above as a viable crossover camping and backpacking option. Comparing the three-person models (Mountain Hardwear unfortunately doesn’t offer a 4P version), the Mineral King is around $75 pricier than the Marmot but offers a nice boost in livability with a 1.9-inch-taller peak height and an additional 1.6 square feet of floor area. The details are equally well sorted, including hardwearing and pre-bent DAC poles, plenty of mesh for stargazing, a full-coverage rainfly, two large doors and vestibules, and five pockets lining the interior—all for just over 7 pounds.

As we touched on above, there are some inherent downsides to using one tent for both car camping and backpacking. For starters, the three-person Mineral King is the smallest option on our list and far less comfortable to spend time in than most options here, including the 52.7-square-foot Marmot Tungsten 4P above. The materials are also on the thinner end, and for trips into the backcountry, you can go much lighter with a targeted backpacking option like the aforementioned Big Agnes Copper Spur (alternatively, smaller groups can save with the $325 Mineral King 2 , which clocks in at 5 lb. 13.4 oz.). But for couples and small groups, the three-person model offers a really effective balance of livability, durability, and weight—especially if you only get into the backcountry occasionally. See the Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3

10. REI Co-op Skyward 6 ($449)

REI’s Skyward was a new addition to their camping tent collection for 2022 and replaced the popular Grand Hut, which previously held the top spot in our rankings. Importantly, they took some key cues from the Grand Hut’s design, including a standing-height interior with a peak height of 78 inches, reasonably low weight, near-vertical walls that maximize roominess, and an easy-to-pitch freestanding design. Floor area and durability also stack up competitively, with the same thick materials along the floor (150D) and fly (75D) and a massive 83-square-foot footprint (the Grand Hut 6 was 83.3 sq. ft.). Taken together, it’s another well-made and highly livable option from our favorite outdoor co-op.

What are the downsides with REI’s new Skyward 6? While we like the large awning for hanging out on sunny days (it can also be rolled up partway in mild conditions), it doesn’t provide much vestibule space when zipped shut. For reference, the Grand Hut had two vestibules that totaled 38 square feet, while the Skyward’s single vestibule provides just 19.5 square feet of covered storage. The Skyward also only has one door, which is pretty big but makes it far less convenient for multiple campers to enter and exit. Final drawbacks include poor wind resistance due to the tall and upright shape and a small stuff sack that requires diligent packing to accommodate all of the components. These complaints are enough to push the Skyward to a mid-pack finish, but it’s nevertheless another spacious and well-built design from REI (and a solid value at 30% off at the time of publishing)... Read in-depth review See the REI Co-op Skyward 6

11. Gazelle T4 Hub ($400)

Popular among the overlanding community, Gazelle’s pop-up Hub tents offer the ultimate in convenience for those looking to minimize setup time. With the poles pre-attached to the tent body, it’s as easy as removing the tent from its bag and pulling the sides into place, which is a stark contrast to complex designs like the Wawona above and Snow Peak Alpha Breeze below. The rest of the design is equally up to snuff with six large mesh windows for ventilation, functional storage (including a removable gear loft), quality YKK zippers, and thick materials that stand up well to long-term use. 

While undeniably appealing from a convenience standpoint, the Gazelle T4 Hub does have a few noteworthy shortcomings. First is the lack of weather protection: The rainfly offers very limited coverage (plus no vestibule space), and the tent’s upright shape makes it prone to bowing in blustery weather. You do get taped seams and the ability to zip the windows shut in inclement weather, but it’s still a noticeable step down from many of the options above. And we’re not big fans of the triangular doors, which are positioned at the corners and result in an awkward lip that’s easy to trip over. Finally, like most pop-up designs, the T4 is decidedly bulky and will take up a sizable chunk of space in your vehicle. But we certainly understand wanting to cut down on setup time, and the T4 excels at that with a solid reputation to boot. For another quick-pitch option, the popular  Caddis Rapid 6 is both cheaper and bigger but falls short in overall build quality. See the Gazelle T4 Hub

12. Springbar Highline 6 ($649)

Classic canvas tents are making a bit of a comeback, and Utah-based Springbar has been a major name in the space for decades. Compared to the nylon and mesh designs above and below, canvas is known for being both super long-lasting and reliable in inclement weather: The Highline can withstand heavy winds (the steel frame helps), serious precipitation, and rough handling. Further, it does a good job of both trapping warmth when it’s cold and breathing when it’s warm. Canvas tents are also extremely livable: The Springbar’s unique pole design, 100-square-foot footprint, and tall peak height (78 in.) make it feel almost more like a small cabin than a camping tent (some offerings from Springbar are even wood stove-compatible).

There are, however, a few notable downsides to canvas. First and foremost, this six-person tent weighs a whopping 75 pounds and takes up a ton of space in your car, so you’ll want to make sure you can park close to your campsite (and have enough space to store it at home). Compared to more traditional designs, canvas models also include a lot more—and heavier—parts, which translates to a longer and more involved setup process (advantages are excellent stability and wind resistance). Given these drawbacks, the Springbar certainly isn’t for everyone. But considering its roomy interior and weather-ready design, it’s an intriguing option for families, big groups, and basecampers spending considerable time in one place. See the Springbar Highline 6

13. Snow Peak Alpha Breeze ($500)

Japan-based Snow Peak is making a big push in the U.S. market with a clear focus on minimalist designs that look good and perform well. Their Alpha Breeze tent is a nice reflection of the brand’s innovative approach: In contrast to the more traditional models above, the Snow Peak has a unique A-frame-inspired shape that does a great job at maximizing livability and headroom at the front and middle of the tent. For reference, at 77.4 square feet, it’s one of the largest four-person tents on the market (it's possible to squeeze a fifth in there if needed, especially a child), and the 73-inch peak height rivals many of the six-person designs here. Other notable features include an extendable vestibule that converts into an awning and four doors for convenient access from all sides. Finally, build quality is top-notch, including a UV-resistant finish on the rainfly and ultra-thick (300D) floor that eliminates the need for a footprint.

However, while we love the generous dimensions and clear attention to detail, the Snow Peak Alpha Breeze falls short in a few areas. In addition to being heavier and pricier than most options here (while also smaller), the tent’s slanted rear detracts considerably from usable space. Setup is also fairly involved given the unique pole structure, although many will find this to be a worthwhile trade-off for the convertible vestibule and all-around solid structure. In the end, the Alpha Breeze isn’t the most convenient or livable option here, but the combination of build quality, toughness, and sleek looks nevertheless stands out in the market.  See the Snow Peak Alpha Breeze

14. REI Co-op Wonderland X ($1,249)

REI’s Wonderland above stands out for its very livable and well-ventilated interior, and the Wonderland X takes that design to the next level with customizable spaces for sleeping, cooking, and socializing. It’s essentially two tents in one: The rainfly can be pitched on its own as a shade structure or camp kitchen, while the clip-in inner tent offers space for up to four adults to sleep comfortably. And REI clearly put a lot of thought into the palatial build, including two oversized doors (they're big enough that you can back a standard wagon or SUV underneath) and four side panels along the fly that can be rolled up for extra airflow or staked out as awnings (poles sold separately). As expected, storage also abounds with ample pockets for stashing the essentials, and the tent is reasonably weather-ready with a silicone-treated DWR finish and coatings along the fly to fend off mildew and fading from UV rays. Taken together, the Wonderland X is the epitome of glamping and leaves little to be desired for avid car campers.

However, if it isn’t abundantly clear from the $1,249 price tag, the Wonderland X is decidedly overkill for most. Like the standard Wonderland tent above, the Wonderland X is unapologetically large, and you’ll need a big campsite to accommodate the massive footprint (the four-person inner tent measures 100 x 100 in., and the vestibule adds another 38.3 sq. ft.). It’s also heavy at just over 35 pounds and bulky when packed down, although the duffel-style carrying bag makes it easy to divvy things up with separate stuff sacks for the rainfly, inner tent, and smaller components like poles and stakes. Finally, given the complexity of the structure, it can take some time and finesse to set up, although most of the pieces are color-coded to help streamline the process. If you can justify the price, the Wonderland X stands out as one of the most uncompromised and customizable options on the market, making it a great pick for larger groups planning to basecamp for extended periods. See the REI Co-op Wonderland X

15. MSR Habiscape 6 ($600)

MSR is best known for their premium backpacking and four-season tents, but their Habiscape takes aim at premium camping options like the REI Wonderland and Marmot Limestone above. Similar to those tents, the MSR is a great pick for families thanks to a standing-height interior, generous floor space, and full feature set. Compared to the tunnel-like Wonderland, the MSR is much quicker and easier to set up thanks to its symmetrical design and intuitive pole layout, and storage abounds with 10 pockets that are well distributed for divvying things up (the stuff sack also transforms into an additional hanging pocket). Unlike the REI and Marmot tents, the Habiscape also features a convertible rainfly that can be rolled back out of the way, secured to one side for partial protection, or used as a shade structure with MSR’s 8-foot Adjustable Poles (sold separately). This tent is slightly less durable and expansive than the Wonderland (plus $50 pricier), but the fast setup and well-appointed build make for a competitive alternative.

We previously had MSR’s own Habitude 6 ranked here, which is the Habiscape’s predecessor and bears a very strong resemblance to the newer model. In parsing out the differences, the Habitude was slightly sturdier and more wind-resistant with a stronger pole structure and thicker canopy fabric (68D vs. 40D for the Habiscape) but cost $100 more, only came with one door (the Habiscape has two), and had a more streamlined storage layout. Both designs come with a full-coverage rainfly—something the Wonderland lacks—and polyurethane coatings along the floor and fly for added assurance in inclement weather, which should be ample for most campers. All in all, both are excellent options for families, and a final decision will come down to how you prioritize price, weather protection, and features. For those who want even more exterior storage, MSR’s latest Habiscape Lounge features a larger (36 sq. ft.) customizable vestibule similar to the TNF Wawona above. See the MSR Habiscape 6

16.  Cabela’s Alaskan Guide Model 8-Person ($600)

For camping in rough weather, Cabela’s Alaskan Guide Model is a proven winner. With a strong seven-pole hexagonal design, a full-coverage rainfly, thick polyurethane floor and fly coatings, and tough fabrics, the tent is capable of handling brutal wind, rain, and even snow. Importantly, it’s also comfortable in mild temperatures and rich in features. Mesh vents and windows can be opened to encourage airflow, the front vestibule is generously sized, and you get enough pockets along the interior to keep gear organized. The Wawona above has better organization and more mesh for warm weather, but the Alaskan Guide is the better option for hunkering down in a storm.

What are the downsides of Cabela’s Alaskan Guide tent? First, its hexagonal floor design doesn’t use space as efficiently as many models here, including the tunnel-like Wawona and REI's Wonderland above (the single door doesn't help). Further, at this price point, we’d prefer to see it offered with aluminum poles rather than fiberglass. The tent’s burly construction should limit durability issues, but fiberglass is more prone to breaking under stress than aluminum (it’s worth noting that Cabela’s does also sell replacement poles if you need them). The Alaskan Guide also is very heavy at 41 pounds 8 ounces for the eight-person capacity, but it’s a reasonable trade-off if you need a weather-worthy build for four-season group camping adventures. Note: We previously had the smaller and lighter six-person model listed here, which is currently out of stock. For those who don’t need the added space of the eight-person version, Cabela’s Instinct Alaskan Guide 6-Person  is pricier at $750 but offers improvements in strength, weight, and interior space. See the Cabela's Alaskan Guide Model 8P

17. Coleman Montana 8P ($169)

New York-based Eureka has been in the outdoor gear game for over a century (including wagon covers for horse-drawn carriages in the late 1890s). From their current lineup, we like the Space Camp 6, which combines a livable interior with reliable weather protection and durability. Storage and ventilation are two other hallmarks, including 10 total pockets and Eureka’s Air Exchange System that allows you to tweak airflow at the top and bottom of the tent depending on conditions. The Space Camp does cost a little more than REI’s similarly built Skyward 6 above while falling a little short in both peak height and overall build quality, but it’s a decent value for what you get.

It's worth noting that we had Eureka’s Copper Canyon LX 6  ranked here previously, which undercuts the Space Camp in price ($330 for the 6P model) and boasts more generous dimensions, including a 100-square-foot interior and taller 84-inch peak height. However, the Space Camp wins out in weather-worthiness with a full-coverage rainfly (the Copper Canyon’s only covers the mesh roof) and lower-profile design that’s more stable in blustery conditions. You also get an additional door with the Space Camp, which we appreciate for maximizing convenience. Both models offer a nice balance of price and quality, and a final decision will come down to how you prioritize outright spaciousness (the Copper Canyon wins out) versus protection and reliability (the Space Camp gets the nod). Note: Eureka's parent company recently announced they will stop selling Eureka products by the end of the year. While that's a loss to the camping industry, it also means it's a good time to keep an eye out for steep discounts. See the Eureka Space Camp 6

19. Coleman Sundome 6 ($130)

Camping Tent Buying Advice 

Camping tent types, peak height and pole structure, capacity: how many people actually fit in these tents, number of doors, storage space: pockets, vestibules, and garages, weather resistance, ventilation, build quality and durability, setup and take down, ground dimensions, weight and packed size.

• The Rest of Your Camping Kit  

The camping tent market generally falls largely into two categories: premium designs that utilize high-end materials and prioritize livability and comfort, and more affordable models that stick to the basics and typically cost less than $250. Below we detail the pros and cons of each type, as well as breaking down additional options like crossover camping/backpacking models and canvas tents. Premium Camping Tents Premium camping tents sit at the top of the heap pricewise but have all the trimmings we’d expect of a home away from home. To start, options in the mid- and high-end category (usually $350 and up for a six-person model) make the most of their livable space: Near-vertical walls, dividers, and spacious vestibules are a few examples. Liberal use of mesh in the tent body ventilates well in warm or muggy weather, and built-in vents in the rainfly help keep moisture from collecting inside. In addition, most of these tents can withstand the elements far better than budget options. Nearly all premium models have a full-coverage rainfly (or at least the option) and strong, aluminum pole designs. It’s true that some can be prohibitively expensive (for example, the REI Wonderland 6 costs $550), but for the family or group that heads out a number of times a year, even in bad weather, the long-term investment may be worth it.  

Budget Camping Tents In theory, camping is a way to simplify life and just disconnect for a while. In that spirit, budget camping tents are basic but fully functional options for fair-weather campers. There isn’t a clear line where a tent goes from mid-range to budget, but we’ve found for six-person options, it happens around $250. Typical budget tents use heavier fabrics, which make them bulky and adds weight to the bottom line, but they’re also durable and resist moisture. Weather protection is their downfall. When a storm blows through the campsite, more often than not, the budget tents are the ones with soaked interiors or are in a heap of broken poles. If camping is a new thing or you keep it casual in the summer, a budget tent will serve your needs just fine. Just don’t expect anything heroic if the weather turns sour.  

Crossover Camping and Backpacking Tents Even tents in the budget category can be a significant investment, so for those who plan on both car camping and backpacking with the family, it may be worth considering a crossover model. Although much less spacious than a dedicated camping tent, designs like the Marmot Tungsten 4P can fit four 20-inch-wide pads side-by-side, and the same goes for Mountain Hardwear’s Mineral King 3 with three pads. Both tents are small and light enough to manage on an overnight backpacking trip (especially when divvyed up among group members) but still have enough space to make most campers happy. That said, keep in mind that these models are built with less durable fabrics to make them easier to pack down, and they’re not the most comfortable for spending considerable time in. But if you need something to pull double duty, a crossover option can be a good compromise.  

Canvas Tents In some ways, canvas tents are as classic as it gets: The Springbar Highline, for example, hasn’t changed for decades—and for good reason. These burly designs can last for years, breathe decently well and regulate temperature in the summer, retain heat in the winter, stand up to the gnarliest storms, and maximize livable space. Plus, many options are compatible with wood stoves for keeping warm in exceptionally cold weather. If you’re a dedicated camper spending days or weeks out at a time, a canvas tent might be the ideal choice. If you’re a weekend warrior just getting out for a day or two, however, the bulk and additional setup requirements might not be worth the reward. As a general rule, the biggest downsides of canvas tents are their price, weight and packed size, and the time it takes to set them up. For reference, the Springbar Highline 6 above is a “budget” offering at $649, but the brand’s premium models can run over $2,000. Other brands worth looking into in the canvas space include White Duck and Kodiak, just to name a couple.  

Nearly every tent on the market will provide information about floor dimensions (or floor area), which is a key indicator of overall livability. In general, tents with similar sleeping capacities will have similar total floor areas (80 to 90 square feet for a six-person model). For example, the REI Wonderland 6 boasts 83.3 square feet of floor area, the Marmot Limestone 6P has 82.9 square feet, and Nemo’s Aurora Highrise 6P has 83.3 square feet. Coleman's Sundome 6 is technically bigger at 100 square feet, but the dome-style shape makes it harder to move around inside. In other words, floor area is an important spec to consider, but it doesn’t tell the whole story and should be looked at in conjunction with peak height and pole structure (outlined below) to determine overall spaciousness.  

In addition to floor area, peak height and pole structure make a big impact on overall livability. Peak height in particular is an indication of whether or not you’ll be able to stand upright, and most car camping-style tents have a peak height of around 72 inches. However, this number is just part of the equation, and it’s important to also look at the slope of the walls and pole design. Dome tents with simple, X-shaped pole structures only allow you to enjoy that peak height at the middle of the tent. On the other hand, a tent with a more advanced pole system can create nearly vertical walls for walking around. This is one of the main reasons we love the REI Wonderland and Marmot Limestone: Both ends of the tents have vertical walls, and the pole designs truly opens up the interior. The cabin-style The North Face Wawona  and REI Skyward are other standouts in maximizing interior space  

The tents above are given a “_ person” capacity, which typically ranges from four to eight people. This listing is based on the number of standard adult sleeping pads that can be laid (usually side-by-side) inside the tent. For example, the six-person REI Co-op Skyward is 120 inches long, so six standard pads (20-inches wide) technically will fit. But this doesn’t mean you necessarily want to max out your tent.

If you use wide, 25-inch+ sleeping pads or air mattresses , or just want a little space to move around, we highly recommend sizing up. From our experiences, nobody wants to sleep in a tent that is jammed to capacity, so it’s best to order a slightly larger size than the actual number of people you have in your party. For example, a group of four should sleep comfortably in a six-person tent, leaving enough living space for playing cards, waiting out a storm, and spreading out while sleeping. And many couples and those with pets prefer a four-person model, which gives you plenty of room to stretch out.  

For a large-capacity camping tent, we unabashedly prefer two doors. The additional access is convenient if you have a full house, and zipping it open is another way to encourage airflow in summer heat. A single-door build is one of the notable downsides of budget models like the Coleman Skydome and Sundome, and even some higher-end options like the REI Skyward 6 only have a single entryway. Put simply, stumbling and crawling over your tent mates in the middle of the night isn’t the best way to keep everyone happy. The very large openings on these tents do alleviate a little of the annoyance, but it’s still a compromise that’s worth considering when looking at an inexpensive tent. And for unparalleled access, REI’s unique Wonderland X structure has two oversized doors and four panels along the rainfly, while Snow Peak’s Alpha Breeze boasts four doors for easy entry and exit on all sides.  

Storage is a crucial consideration for many campers, starting with interior pockets. As expected, premium options like the REI Wonderland and MSR Habiscape include ample space for stowing items like headlamps, maps, books, and other items inside your tent, while budget offerings generally are more barebones. As far as exterior storage goes, a full-coverage rainfly that protects the door(s) of a tent creates a space in front of those doors, referred to as a vestibule. We’ve found a wide range of uses for a vestibule, but a few highlights include a spot to store gear away from rain and putting on/taking off shoes. If you don’t have a car close by to store your stuff, a vestibule should be on your must-have list. And note that vestibules most often come with mid-range and premium camping tents (budget tents with partial rainflies go without).  

Taking the concept of a vestibule to the extreme is REI’s Wonderland Mud Room . The palatial, pole-supported structure extends out for an additional 56 square feet of space, enough for a card table or area to store bikes. Also, you can zip up the entry door and roll up the sides to create an open and airy shelter from the sun or light rain. On extended camping trips or in large groups, this is a valuable add-on. And it’s worth noting that The North Face’s Wawona 6 above boasts a similar design that comes included with the tent, which adds a healthy 44.7 square feet at the front for stowing gear or use as an additional seating area. A final design worth calling out is REI's Wonderland X, which is essentially two tents in one: The outer rainfly can be pitched on its own for use as a shade structure or camp kitchen (with plenty of room in the vestibule for setting up chairs and a small table), while the inner tent functions as a dual sleeping/hangout space for up to four adults.  

As we touched on in the section above, a weather-worthy tent is one of the main reasons to upgrade to a premium camping model. In most cases, the pole materials (aluminum is better than fiberglass) and designs are more robust, seam sealing and waterproof fabrics improve in quality, and the inclusion of full-coverage rainflies helps keep out blowing rain. It's good to keep in mind that the weather can still get plenty rowdy in the summer, particularly in the mountains (and some national parks).  

Two of the strongest tents on the list are the REI Co-op Base Camp and Cabela's Alaskan Guide Model, which utilize advanced pole designs that are inspired by mountaineering tents. The Cabela's can even be used for snow camping in less extreme conditions (for designs meant to withstand serious winter weather, check out our article on the best four-season tents ). Springbar's Highline 6 is another standout with a weather-ready canvas build and sturdy pole structure. For most three-season trips, any premium tent should do the trick, as long as it’s been properly staked out (and if the wind picks up, take the time to align the tent and guylines to brace against the wind).

Many campers head out in the warm summer months, which means a tent’s ventilation design is a key consideration. And in general, performance is closely tied to price tag. Many premium models utilize a double-wall construction (the outer rainfly is separate from the inner tent body) and lots of mesh, which help keep things reasonably cool and limit moisture build-up. In addition, deployable vents are often incorporated into the rainfly as a way to encourage more airflow, and some tents like REI’s Skyward 6 have adaptable rainflies that can be rolled up partway in mild conditions.  

On the cheap end of the spectrum, you get less mesh and fewer options to get air flowing without opening up doors or windows (thereby compromising weather protection). In addition, some entry-level designs like Coleman’s Sundome include single-wall panels (this means there’s just one layer of fabric to protect you from the elements), which can lead to a muggy interior on warm days and more condensation at night. In the end, many campers are willing to compromise in ventilation given the large price gap between designs, but it’s undoubtedly another feather in the premium tent market’s cap.  

Simply put, the differences in build quality are noticeable between budget and premium camping tents. Spending more gets you higher-quality materials that are stronger relative to their weight and, in theory, should have a longer lifespan. If you only make it out once or twice a year (and mostly in good weather), you absolutely can get away with a budget model like the Coleman Sundome. That said, if you camp a lot, are looking for a long-term investment for multiple seasons, or simply prefer quality gear, we recommend splurging for a higher-end camping tent. Upgraded features like a full-coverage rainfly, large vestibules and lots of interior pockets for gear storage, and strong aluminum poles increase a tent’s functionality and weather resistance.  

Another factor to consider in gauging a tent’s lifespan is durability, and big factors include the thickness of the canopy, floor, and rainfly fabrics. Floor thickness is particularly important, as it will have direct contact with rocks, roots, and other potentially sharp objects at camp. In comparing the models above, the difference can be significant: The crossover Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 , for instance, shaves weight by using lighter materials throughout, including a 68-denier (D) floor. This isn’t thin by ultralight standards (targeted backpacking designs go down to around 10 or 15D), but dedicated camping designs like REI’s Skyward and Wonderland (both 150D) use much more robust fabrics, which boost weight considerably but will stand up much better to long-term use. Many camping tents fall somewhere in the middle and are decently hardwearing, but if you’re typically tough on your gear, make sure to factor this into your buying decision.  

Canvas tents like the Springbar Highline 6 are in a league of their own when it comes to durability. While the typical tent may last several seasons of rough use, a canvas tent can last decades. Their thick fabrics and bulky poles are designed to weather even the worst of storms. In this sense, their higher price tag may make sense for folks who spend a lot of time camping each year. They do require extra care, though: Canvas tents can develop mold and mildew if improperly dried. If you go this route, be extra careful to thoroughly dry your tent before storage.  

Given their large dimensions and multiple parts (tent body, rainfly, poles, and stakes), it shouldn’t come as a surprise that camping tents can be a bear to set up. It’s always best to do a test run at home to figure out the process; this also gives you a chance to verify you have all the necessary pieces. In general, we recommend setting up a car camping tent with a partner (some smaller four-person models can be done fairly easily by a single person), and you can expect it to take 10 minutes or more to fully deploy (tear down often is a bit faster). One exception to this rule is “instant” tents like the Gazelle T4 Hub , which streamline the process by having the poles permanently connected to the tent body. This design does add some weight and bulk, but some campers will find the trade-off in convenience worth it.  

When choosing between tent models, it’s a good idea to take the total footprint or ground size of the tent into account—some of the six and eight-person models are absolutely massive. Factoring in some of the large vestibules or “garages” that can be tacked on to the end of a tent, there’s a strong likelihood that it will extend beyond the size of the raised pads at some national parks or campgrounds. If you come from a backpacking background, keep in mind that many car camping tents require a much larger swath of space.  

The packed size of a tent typically will align with its weight. Crossover backpacking and camping tents pack down the smallest (the aforementioned Tungsten measures 8.3 x 24.8 in. when packed), while a tent like the Gazelle T4 Hub (8 x 67.5 in.) will fill up an extra-large duffel bag and take up a good portion of a car trunk. Again, if you have the space to store it and haul it around, this isn’t a big downside. But if either are at a premium, we recommend a more compact crossover design.  

While not a requirement, it's often a good idea to use some type of footprint or ground cloth when camping. The extra layer makes it easier to clean up if you're camping on dirt or mud and protects the tent’s floor from damage (thus extending the tent’s overall lifespan). But do you need to spend the big bucks and get the one specifically made for the tent? Oftentimes those are upwards of $50, which feels like a lot for a single sheet of fabric and some webbing. The advantage of using the footprint specifically designed for the tent is that it’s precut to the proper dimensions, and the grommets will attach to the tent poles directly. It’s an integrated system that you don’t need to worry about. 

Alternatively, a decent tarp can suffice for ground protection as long as there’s still space to store it in your vehicle. They are typically quite large, and if you don’t want to cut them up, you’ll need to layer or stuff the excess material under the tent floor, creating some uncomfortable lumps. Another popular choice for making a generic ground cloth is picking up bulk Tyvek. This relatively thin and packable material is cheap and offers sufficient protection. No matter your choice, if you decide to trim the ground cloth, make sure to measure in a few inches in all dimensions to guarantee you don’t have fabric hanging out the sides of the tent floor. This extra material sticking out can collect and pool rainwater and compromise your waterproof shelter.

What About Rooftop Tents?

We didn’t include any rooftop tents on our list above due to their notably different designs, but they’re nevertheless an up-and-coming category in the car camping world and worth a mention here. The concept is fairly simple: A folded tent attaches directly to the roof rack system on top of your vehicle or pickup bed, and when you arrive at your destination, you simply unfold it, climb the ladder, and go to sleep. Compared to standard camping tents, rooftop designs get you off uneven ground, make it easier to set up camp just about anywhere, and often include a cushy built-in mattress. That said, these models are very expensive (often $1,000 or much more, not including a rack system), extremely heavy, and storage can be an issue. The Roofnest Condor 2 XL , for example, weighs 180 pounds and has a footprint that’s comparable in size to a king-size mattress. But for those who prioritize convenience and don’t mind the added cost, rooftop tents have a lot of appeal. For a full list of our favorite options, see our round-up of the best rooftop tents .  

The Rest of Your Camping Kit

Since you’re essentially setting up a home away from home, camping can be heavy on gear. Tents are typically your biggest purchase—both in price and size—followed by items like camping pads or mattresses and sleeping bags . Depending on where you’ll be camping and for how long, other essentials include a gas-burning stove , cooler , and camping chairs . The beauty in all of this is that the same principles that apply to camping tents transfer to the rest of your gear. You can go cheap and still have a great time, but you’ll rarely regret spending extra for added comfort, performance, and longevity. Back to Our Top Camping Tent Picks   Back to Our Camping Tent Comparison Table

Learn More About Outdoor Gear

Camping Gear Reviews

REI Co-op Wonderland Tent Review

Nemo Aurora Highrise 6P Tent Review

Best Rooftop Tents of 2024

REI Co-op Skyward 4 Tent Review

Best Camping Stoves of 2024

Camping Checklist for 2023

Best Tent Brands of 2024

Best Camping Mattresses of 2024

Mobile Menu

Megamenu - desktop hamburger menu.

• Hiking Gear
• Backpacking Gear
• Biking Gear
• Camping Gear
• Footwear Reviews
• Climbing Gear
• Skiing Gear
• Winter Gear Reviews
• In-Depth Gear Reviews
• Hiking Shoes
• Hiking Boots
• Trail Running Shoes
• Mountain Bike Shoes
• Approach Shoes
• Climbing Shoes
• Beginner Climbing Shoes
• Mountaineering Boots
• Winter Boots
• Rain Jackets
• Down Jackets
• Synthetic Jackets
• Fleece Jackets
• Hardshell Jackets
• Softshell Jackets
• Windbreaker Jackets
• Ski Jackets
• Winter Jackets
• Hiking Pants
• Hiking Socks
• Trekking Poles
• Baby Carriers
• Running Vests
• Backpacking Tents
• Backpacking Packs
• Backpacking Sleeping Bags
• Backpacking Sleeping Pads
• Backpacking Stoves
• Backpacking Food
• Water Filters
• Altimeter Watches
• Handheld GPS
• Mountain Bike Helmets
• Mountain Bikes
• Mountain Bikes Under $1,000
• Mountain Bikes Under $2,000
• Gravel Bikes
• Bike Brands
• Kids' Bikes
• Hitch Bike Racks
• Camping Tents
• Rooftop Tents
• Camping Sleeping Bags
• Camping Mattresses
• Camping Chairs
• Camping Stoves
• Duffel Bags
• Rock Climbing Shoes
• Climbing Helmets
• Climbing Harnesses
• Climbing Quickdraws
• Belay Devices
• Climbing Ropes
• Climbing Backpacks
• Winter Gloves
• 4-Season Tents
• Ski Helmets
• Ski Goggles
• Ski Backpacks
• All-Mountain Skis
• Ski Bindings
• Backcountry Skis
• Backcountry Ski Boots
• Skis for Beginners
• Hardpack Skis
• Mirrorless Cameras
• Full-Frame Cameras
• DSLR Cameras
• Point-and-Shoot Cameras
• Travel Cameras
• DSLR Lenses
• Mirrorless Lenses
• Lofoten Islands
• Lofoten Hiking
• Hardangervidda
• Jotunheimen
• 10 Great Norway Hikes
• Public Huts
• Torres del Paine
• Chalten and Glaciares
• Lake District
• Patagonia National Park
• Milford Sound
• Abel Tasman
• Marlborough
• Great Walks
• Adventure Towns

Add adventure to your inbox

• Privacy Policy
• Terms of Service

© 2024 Switchback Travel. All Rights Reserved. No part of this site may be reproduced without our written permission.

3 Best, Light Backpacking Tents for the Tour du Mont Blanc

The best lightweight backpacking tents for the tour du mont blanc camping adventure.

If you’re planning to camp the Tour du Mont Blanc (TMB) and need a two-person tent, this guide is for you. This guide reviews three tents that I own, love, and have used on the Tour du Mont Blanc.

These tents are ideal for summer hiking adventures in the Alps. There are also good choices for general three season camping in the Alps and elsewhere.

Even better, these tents all vary in price. So, at least one will surely suit your budget.

Guide to Camping on the Tour du Mont Blanc

Camping on the TMB is a thrilling experience. Sure, staying in gites, refuges, or hostels is a lot of fun, too. However, camping Tour du Mont Blanc or wild camping on this classic long distance hiking route is an experience like no other.

After you’ve found your tent, it’s time to start planning your Tour du Mont Blanc camping sites or thinking about where you might camp for free on the TMB route. Be sure to read or bookmark Where Can You Camp on the Tour du Mont Blanc .

1. The Best Tour du Mont Blanc Tent – MSR Hubba Hubba

Without a doubt, my favorite lightweight tent for hiking the TMB, is the MSR Hubba Hubba NX 2 Person Lightweight Tent . It’s so light and fits two people well. Attach it to your backpack and your good to hike! MSR makes quality gear. And I’ve never been let down.

I’ve not the only one who thinks this tent is awesome. I recently saw athlete and sky runner, Skyrunning Girl , mentioned it on her blog as a great tent choice.

Pro Features of the MSR Hubba Hubba NX 2 Person :

• 3 season backpacking tent, fits 2-person
• lightweight freestanding design
• ripstop nylon floor fabric
• Xtreme Shield so you stay dry
• tent geometry maximizes space
• 3.5 lbs, packs down to 18×6 inches

2. The Best Budget Ultralight Tent for the Tour du Mont Blanc – NatureHike Cloud

Not going to lie… I was skeptical about this tent when I bought it. I wondered if it could really handle the rugged French Alps during a late summer camping trip given the budget price.

However, this NatureHike tent has to be one of the best values for an ultralight, 2 person, backpacking tent. Don’t let the low price (compared to other ultra lightweight tents) scare you away.

Pro Features of the Naturehike Cloud Up 2 Person Backpacking Tent

• Free standing 2 person backpacking tent
• Y shaped structure
• ultralight, double layer
• ripstop and coated nylon
• easy to set up and take down
• 3.85 pounds / 1750 grams
• different colors available

3. The Best Overall Value Tent for the Tour du Mont Blanc – Decathlon Forclaz Trek 900 2 Personnes Tent

You’ll probably have to go into a Decathlon store (France / Europe) to find this designed in the French Alps tent, but be warned. Though, maybe you can get lucky and find one online. They sell out quickly! A great, overall lightweight 2-person backpacking tent.

Pro Features of the Decathlon Forclaz Trek 900 Tent

• 3 season, 2- person tent
• Comfort and space, with a double Y dome shape
• Ultra lightweight and compact
• Pockets, 2 doors, and vestibule to keep your backpack covered
• Designed in the Alps

Follow Me on Social

I love to post about my adventures in the French Alps and travel lifestyle. Come follow me and let’s connect.

Follow Julie on Social Media ! 😉

Related Posts You May LOVE

Where to Park Your Car When You Hike the Tour du Mont Blanc

Hiking the Tour du Mont Blanc with Children

Top Rainy Day Activities in Chamonix, France

Subscribe to the Wanderschool Newletter. Get the latest travel news delivered right to your inbox.

Leave a Comment Cancel Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Join the Wanderschool Community. Get Updates Delivered to Your Inbox.

Privacy Overview

Advertisement

The Best Camping Tents

By Claire Wilcox , Kit Dillon and Kalee Thompson

Whether you’re thinking of hitting the road or staying close to home for your next car-camping adventure, you and your loved ones will need a comfortable place to sleep.

After researching nearly 100 tents, talking to tent designers and tent-pole manufacturers, and sleeping in a total of 51 tents on 12 weekend camping trips over seven years, we’ve concluded that the Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 Tent is the best car-camping tent for two people, and the Kelty Wireless 6  is the best choice for most families.

Everything we recommend

Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 Tent

The best camping tent for two.

Easy to set up and pack away, the Mineral King 3 is a lightweight, two-door tent with a generous footprint and a sturdy dome shape. It’s the perfect choice for three-season multipurpose camping.

Buying Options

With free Elevated Rewards membership, use promo code MHWGEAR

Kelty Wireless 6 Tent

The best camping tent for families.

Spacious and easy to pitch, this dome tent also has other features most families need: two large doors, roomy vestibules, and an affordable price. The tradeoffs: bulky fiberglass poles and flimsy stakes.

May be out of stock

Marmot Tungsten 4-Person Tent

Higher price, more space for two.

With nearly 60 square feet of floor space plus two large vestibules, the Tungsten 4 is roomier than our top-pick tent for couples. It also costs more, though, and is less forgiving of a careless set-up.

Budget pick

Coleman Sundome 6-Person Tent

A cheap but reliable tent for couples and families.

Great for backyard overnights, this simple dome-style tent is for anyone who doesn't want to spend more than $150 on a tent but also doesn't want to buy another one next year. It has a partial rain fly, but only one door and no vestibule.

Upgrade pick

The North Face Wawona 6 Tent (2023)

A family tent with a spare room.

This dome-style tent has nearly vertical walls, high ceilings, and a single vestibule the size of an actual mudroom. It’s also straightforward to set up, and it is made with sturdy, light materials. It’s expensive, but you get value for your money.

REI Co-op Base Camp 4 Tent

A hardier tent for two people.

A full rain cover, two vestibules, and an extra-sturdy pole structure make this the best choice for couples who want to get outside in any weather. It’s pricey, though, and unless the other couples’ tents we recommend, it doesn’t include a footprint.

REI Co-op Base Camp 6 Tent

A hardier tent for families.

A full rain cover, two vestibules, and an extra-sturdy pole structure make this the best choice for families who want to get outside in any weather. It's the most expensive of our picks, though.

The Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 Tent is the best car-camping tent choice for couples. It has everything you need for three-season camping, with the bonus of being light enough to double as an occasional backpacking tent. Although it’s designed to accommodate three people—hence the “3” in its name—we found that at 42.5 square feet, the tent is more comfortable for two, plus gear and maybe a medium-size dog.

A classic polyester dome tent, the Mineral King 3 uses two high-quality pre-bent aluminum poles, which maximize head and shoulder space, making this tent feel less cramped than other dome tents we tested. Two large doors provide easy entry and exit, and a vestibule—that’s camping speak for “mudroom”—outside each door adds significant sheltered storage. The Mineral King 3 has a full rain fly, which you can roll up halfway or completely remove for epic stargazing. It also comes with a groundsheet (aka footprint) to protect the tent floor.

The Kelty Wireless 6 is a spacious tent that is easy to pitch, and it offers solid weather protection and durability for a reasonable price. Like the Mineral King 3, it has a simple, dome-style design that maximizes livability and minimize headaches. With 87 square feet of interior space, plus 28 square feet of vestibule space, the polyester tent fits four adults comfortably, or two adults with two or three children, with plenty of room to store gear and muddy boots. (As its name indicates, it’s meant to house six people, but we wouldn’t recommend that.) The Wireless 6 has two large doors and a full rain fly.

Like most tents we saw in its price range, the Wireless 6 uses cheaper materials: Its poles (two, plus a “brow” pole that supports the two vestibules) are fiberglass, and its stakes are too light for their size (two bent during testing). Unlike the competition, this tent is functional, durable, and a joy to inhabit in most weather conditions. (We did notice that the fly took longer to dry than others we tested; don’t put it away while it’s still damp, or it’ll mildew.) It packs into a duffle with a handy shoulder strap and weighs about 17 pounds—manageable for most people across short distances. As with most six-person tents we’ve seen, this tent’s footprint is sold separately.

Though the Marmot Tungsten 4-Person Tent lacks the Mineral King 3’s adaptable fly, which makes access and protection from the elements such a breeze, the Tungsten 4 provides more living space and equal protection against the elements. A full rain fly with easy-attach color-coded clips covers the tent body and adds two large vestibules. Like the Mineral King 3, the Tungsten has aluminum poles that are connected at the top (for lightning-quick pitching) and pre-bent, which increases the dome tent’s headroom. With pentagonal doors and a fly scaffolded by two brow poles—as opposed to the Mineral King 3’s single one—this tent provides excellent shielding from multidirectional wind and rain, providing you follow the setup instructions faithfully.

The Tungsten 4’s poles are bent at a more acute angle and closer to the ground, which, we discovered, can cause the tent to collapse in windy conditions if you don’t attach the poles to the fly using the Velcro tabs running under the seams. You can also set up the tent without the fly while retaining some privacy, since the tent body has a high polyester wall on one side. Like the Mineral King 3, this tent comes with a footprint.

The best-selling Coleman Sundome 6-Person Tent has a footprint larger (100 square feet) than that of our top-pick tent for families, but it felt smaller because it has a lower ceiling, no vestibule, and only one door. Nevertheless, it still comfortably accommodates four people, and it’s a roomy choice for two. This no-nonsense tent is intuitive to set up, has mesh on the top halves of two walls, includes a partial rain fly that’s easy to put on and stake out, and feels cheery inside and out. (We don’t recommend the smaller version of this tent for couples who might actually take it on the road; it was just too flimsy in our tests.) Also note that this tent does not come with its own groundsheet. Coleman says that the tent doesn’t need one, probably because its floor is a crinkly (though tough) tarp-like polyethylene, not a taped-seam polyester as in our other picks.

The North Face Wawona 6 costs $200 more than the Wireless 6, but if you can swing the price, the tent offers a superior combination of livable space, smart design, and durable, high-quality materials (aluminum and heavy-duty polyester and mesh). Its fly extends into a huge front vestibule that can store large items like bikes, or even accommodate a table and chairs. Adults over 6 feet tall will be able to walk upright inside this tent—which has almost-vertical walls that can easily accommodate beds, cribs, and cots—as well as in the vestibule.

We also appreciated the tent’s construction, which combines good ventilation (the upper part of the canopy walls are mesh) with campsite privacy (those mesh bits are covered by the fly, which reaches only halfway down the tent on the back and sides). And this tent is easy to set up and pack down, especially considering its size. (It comes with a carrying bag equipped with duffle-style handles.) You’re unlikely to find a similar-sized tent that matches the Wawona’s quality and features for less money—most comparable tents we tested cost much more. As with most six-person tents, the Wawona 6’s footprint is sold separately.

Car campers who plan to brave miserable weather will appreciate the extra strength and protection of the REI Co-op Base Camp 4 Tent . The main bodies of our other picks are structured with two main poles with added support from smaller brow poles. The Base Camp, by contrast, has four full-size aluminum struts woven throughout it, somewhat like a basket, plus an additional brow pole that frames the front entrance and supports the larger of the two vestibules. The Base Camp also offers more privacy compared with our other picks—with or without the rain fly. Our other favorite features are the tent’s two wide doors, which you can open halfway from either direction or open fully (you can tuck the doors into “roof pockets” to keep them out of the way), turning the tent into a useful beach tent or sun shade.

Families who regularly pitch their tent in rainy locales need a wind-fighting tent with a good-size vestibule for storing wet shoes and gear, as well as a full rain fly for added weather protection. With almost 45 feet of vestibule space and four stability-enhancing criss-crossing poles, the next size up of REI’s Base Camp, the Base Camp 6 Tent , offers the best combination of space and features among the six tents we tested that fit those criteria. A footprint for each model is sold separately.

The research

Why you should trust us, who this is for, how we picked, how (and where) we tested, best camping tent for two people: mountain hardwear mineral king 3 tent, best camping tent for families: kelty wireless 6 person tent, runner-up tent for two people: marmot tungsten 4-person tent, best budget tent: coleman sundome 6-person tent, upgrade tent for families: north face wawona 6 tent, also great for unpredictable weather: rei co-op base camp 4 tent and base camp 6 tent, other good tents, what to look forward to, the competition, care, use, and maintenance.

An avid hiker, camper, and long-haul road-tripper, Claire Wilcox has slept in (and occasionally improvised) tents in 11 states. She covers outdoor gear for Wirecutter and worked on the most recent update of this guide, testing couples’ tents and family tents. She lives on Oahu, Hawaii.

A senior staff writer at Wirecutter, Kit Dillon has written about everything from backpacks and cooking gear to luggage and road-tripping . When he was younger, he worked for five years on oil rigs as an NDT (non-destructive testing) inspector, testing metal and welds for signs of corrosion, rust, and whatever other breakdowns and chaos might happen to the steel in the ocean. It is oddly relevant work for testing aluminum tent poles.

This guide also builds on the work of Kalee Thompson, a senior editor at Wirecutter.

For this guide, we focused on tents that suit the most common terrains you’re likely to encounter when car-camping—grassy lawns or clearings, beaches, dirt campsites, and basic platforms—in spring, summer, and fall. We’re not looking at tents designed for such specialized activities as mountaineering, backpacking, or winter camping, though some of our recommendations have cross-over potential.

Even if you’re not seeking any extreme-weather adventures, you’ll still need something that can withstand whatever the elements throw your way. The tents we discuss here are designed to keep you comfortable in wind, rain, and even light snow. (If you find yourself in a lightning storm, it’s best to seek shelter in your car or abandon the adventure for a motel, especially if you’re camping in an exposed area.)

Finding a small, light tent is the logical approach when you’re backpacking. But with car camping—the industry term for what most people consider just camping—you’ll likely be parking next to your campsite and unloading. If you won’t be carrying your tent more than a couple hundred feet, more space means more comfort (as well as more room for your stuff).

After putting in about 40 hours studying online reviews and company websites, as well as spending time consulting with frequent campers (both with and without kids) and considering our own diverse car-camping experiences, we evaluated the options (about 100, in the course of the past seven years) according to the following criteria:

The right capacity: Tent makers measure tent capacity by how many people can fit in them sardine-style, lying inside mummy bags. That means you can fit six adults in a six-person tent—but you probably wouldn’t want to do that, because those adults would be sleeping hip to hip, with little spare room for gear.

We concluded that the best option for two people is actually a large three-person, or smaller four-person, tent that’s 40 to 60 square feet in size. For families with three to five members, we concluded that the best option is a tent rated for six people that’s between 80 and 100 square feet. Also, the height should be at least six feet, which allows most adults to comfortably stand upright inside. “When you camp with kids, you camp with a lot of gear,” Helen Olsson , author of The Down and Dirty Guide to Camping with Kids , told us. Olsson has three kids, a dog, and a six-foot-two husband. Bigger is better when it comes to car camping, she said: “Look for a base-camp-style tent that is meant for when you pull up in your car and pitch your tent right there.” All of the tents we considered fall into that category.

A dome shape: Usually designed around two- or three-pole arches, dome-style tents tend to be stronger than cabin-style designs, which maximize ceiling height by sacrificing some structural integrity. The dome shape does reduce overall livable space, but it’s better at deflecting winds and shedding rain, something you’re likely to appreciate if an unexpected storm hits. Our picks are all dome-style tents.

Adequate weatherproofing and durability: A good dome-style tent should be able to withstand high winds and driving rain without pitching or collapsing. We assumed that most car campers would likely not be camping in snow, so we focused on three-season models instead. Most of the tents we looked at could handle an unexpected flurry or a coating of frost, but we wouldn’t intentionally take them on a winter-camping trip.

Tent makers generally treat the fabrics with a water-repellent coating described in millimeters; 1,200 mm to 3,000 mm is the typical range found on family tents. That number does not refer to the thickness of the coating or the fabric; instead, it measures a specific test of water pressure , namely, how many millimeters of water can sit on top of the material before water starts leaking through. (As a Coleman product manager told us, “Nothing’s waterproof, not even submarines. Given the right conditions anything will leak.”) A higher number means better water resistance, but such stronger coatings aren’t always necessary: As this MSR blog post explains , “the more coating you add, the heavier and more rigid the fabric becomes, and—after a point—the more susceptible to tearing.” A typical umbrella has a rating of only 420 mm, the company’s experts point out, and it does just fine at keeping you dry.

It’s natural to focus on the quality of a tent’s rain fly—you need that piece to work when the skies open up. But according to our experts, the durability of the floor of your tent is actually more important.  Tent designer Bob Howe, who has developed models for nearly every major tent maker, including Easton, Marmot, The North Face, REI, and Sierra Designs, said that when it comes to a tent floor, two lightweight layers are often stronger than one heavy layer; he suggested using a groundsheet or footprint, even with a high-quality tent floor. If the tent you buy doesn’t come with a footprint (two of our recommended tents, the Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 and the Marmot Tungsten 4 , do), we recommend purchasing a companion footprint , if one is available. A footprint doesn’t take up much space, is relatively inexpensive, and is much easier to repair or replace than a tent bottom if it tears. A basic tarp can do in a pinch.

The right materials for the job: On most tents, the walls and flies are made of either nylon or polyester . Nylon weighs less but more susceptible to UV damage, which makes it better for backpacking, when a tent spends most of its daylight hours packed up. Car campers generally leave their tents up for much longer periods of time, increasing the material’s UV exposure. As polyester is stiffer and heavier than nylon but not as susceptible to UV damage, Howe told us, and it doesn’t absorb water like nylon does, it’s generally better for car camping. It’s also less expensive.

To compare tent fabrics, you also need to know their overall rip strength. For most fabrics, rip strength is expressed as a measurement of the diameter of the fibers in their thread, or a denier—the higher the denier, the stronger the fabric. We found 40 denier up to 150 denier to be typical for car-camping tents; you can read more about these measurements in gear manufacturer MSR’s blog post and in this Outside article .

As for poles, Howe explained to us that each material has its advantages and drawbacks: Aluminum poles are far lighter and slide together more easily but cost more, while fiberglass-and-steel poles are often trickier to fit together and can leave splinters in your palms. They can, however, be stronger in high winds.

Ease of setup: We looked for dummy-proof tents that were intuitive to set up and that a lone person could erect fairly quickly. If you’ve ever arrived at a campsite after dark with two small kids who have been stewing in the backseat for hours, you know that dealing with a tent is often a one-person job. We’ve also found that a car-camping tent is the kind of item your friends may want to borrow from time to time. Those friends may well be novice campers, so we wanted something that the uninitiated but reasonably intelligent could erect, even if the original instructions had disappeared long ago. (You’re going to lose the instructions. Everyone loses the instructions.)

We also wanted self-standing tents, which can stay up on their own. Even so, you should, ideally, stake down each corner securely; in some crowded campgrounds, however, finding a flat spot with soil soft enough to do that can be difficult. A tent that requires staking to stand up—especially a larger, six-person tent—is unwieldy, and it’ll be impossible to set up on a hard surface such as blacktop or on raised wooden tent decks.

It is also important to consider the way in which the tent poles attach to the tent. Many of our picks use grommet attachments, which are more secure and simple to repair than key attachments if anything should break.

Some of our tent picks also have guy-line systems that secure their outer rain fly—although most people probably won’t need to use those often. Guy-line systems are somewhat unique to each tent, with every model boasting its own specific rope bites and tie-downs. (Kit scoured YouTube tutorials and found this video to be the most informative tutorial on guy lines. With this video and a little practice, you’ll soon be pitching tents like a pro.)

Affordability: Car-camping tents should be relatively inexpensive. They don’t need to be the top of the line or made of the lightest possible materials or the most advanced fabrics (something you’d likely look for in a pure backpacking tent). We decided that the tents for this guide should not be precious items—but they shouldn’t be disposable, either. When we researched couples’ tents in 2022, we found no tents below $150 worth considering; our cap was $400. For our 2023 family tent testing, after completing our research we realized that $500 was now the average price for a good-quality tent. Below this amount, the flaws and tradeoffs started to mount. Still, we felt that $500 was a lot to pay for a family tent, so we looked for options that were more affordable and didn’t sacrifice too much.

Extra features: Stake design, pole strength and arrangements, rain-fly tie-downs, door construction, zipper strength, and gear-loft placements all play a role in the overall comfort and enjoyment of your tent. We also considered privacy, vestibules, extra headroom, and any other bonuses.

Once we had our criteria nailed down, we scoured Amazon reviews of four- and six-person tents, as well as owner reviews on retailer sites such as Backcountry , Cabela’s , Campmor , Dick’s Sporting Goods , Eastern Mountain Sports , L.L.Bean , and REI , plus professional reviews from GearJunkie and GearLab . We perused the lines of outdoor companies like Big Agnes, Marmot, and The North Face. And we studied the offerings of big-box stores including Costco, Sears, Target, and Walmart. We then requested test samples of the models that met our criteria and also had a consistent record of positive reviews.

For earlier incarnations of this guide, we tested tents in Arizona (alongside Lake Mead and just south of the Hualapai reservation , near the Grand Canyon) and southern California (near Joshua Tree National Park; at the Mountain Oak Campground , an hour or so east of Los Angeles; and at Wheeler Gorge Campground , outside Ojai, California).

After our longtime top-pick tent for two people ran into some stock issues in 2021, we researched new models and redesigns, and we assembled a batch of small tents for testing in March 2022, on Oahu. Over two blustery March weekends, we pitched eight tents in an exposed ocean-fronting yard on the northwestern coast of the island by Kaena Point State Park, leaving the tents up for 48 hours to face the salt air, the wind, and the rain while we tested. During this period, winds rose up to 35 to 40 knots, and we experienced passing showers as well as direct sunlight and 80-degree temperatures. To mimic heavier rain and to test the tent’s ability to withstand soggy ground conditions, we also soaked our tents with a garden hose. A few weeks later, we brought the front-runners to a platform in an area that had higher elevation, near the Waianae Mountain Range, and camped out overnight in intermittent but consistent rainfall.

In 2022–2023, we tested 15 six-person tents on Oahu, pitching them once again in both coastal and higher mountain locations, where they encountered the full range of Hawaii’s mercurial winter weather patterns, including winds ranging from 10 to 40 mph, passing squalls, direct sun, and good old fashioned buckets of rain. Temperatures ranged from the 50s at night to the 80s during the day.

To test the tents, we first opened them, splayed out their parts, and tried to put them together without consulting the instructions. We assembled and disassembled the tents on all of our testing sites multiple times. We tried the rain fly for each tent as well, one time rushing to get several of them up during an unexpected rainstorm at night. When heavy trade winds buffeted our Oahu-coast testing site, we pitched each tent in full face of the blast. We then rotated the tents looking for structural weaknesses, and we tested their guy lines and tabs to see which tents had the best and most intuitive design for withstanding wind.

Throughout all our testing, we wanted to know how it felt to be inside the tents for long periods of time. Did we feel claustrophobic or rejuvenated? If we had to spend a day in the tent during a storm, would it be comfortable? After first removing the models that failed the structural tests, we slept, watched the stars, and ate our meals in all of the tents, as well as planned hikes from them.

The Mountain Hardwear Mineral King 3 Tent was the favorite tent of testers at our Oahu coastal and mountain locations. Through rainy nights and soggy mornings, on windy afternoons, and under an intense midday sun, this tent’s primarily polyester mesh body, two large doors, and adaptable polyester fly kept us dry, well ventilated, and in good spirits.

We were surprised at first to see the Mineral King 3 come out on top because it was the smallest tent in our test group. But all our testers, including our tallest panelists, gravitated toward this tent.

What sets the Mineral King 3 apart is its combination of easy setup, solid weather resistance, and livability in variable conditions. It comes with its own footprint, and is made of high-quality materials that are easy to handle. Simply put, it was the most effective, user-friendly tent in any situation we encountered. It also delivered a little something extra: Not only did the Mineral King 3 keep us sheltered in shifting weather, but key design features—such as a barely-there mesh canopy, generous vestibule space, and a well-placed toggle on top of the rain fly—kept us connected to the environment.

One night during testing, for example, clouds loomed in the distance with clear skies overhead. After we pitched the tent, the Mineral King 3’s adaptable fly let us leave half the mesh dome uncovered. We watched as night fell and the first stars appeared. At the first sign of rain, it took only a few seconds—and a quick hand stuck outside the tent—to unfurl the fly and secure it for a dry night’s sleep. When we awoke, we could roll back one part of the vestibule, make coffee, and watch the sky lighten even though it was still raining.

Despite having the smallest capacity of the tents we tested—42.5 square feet—the Mineral King 3 easily fits two people with a full-size mattress, or two sleeping pads, and gear. Two large vestibules add nearly 40 square feet combined—that is, 18.75 square feet on either side.

Setting up this tent is simple: You stake out the four corners, extend the tent’s two pre-connected poles, and dock them into grommets. The tent’s body attaches to the poles via plastic clips, and a third pole (the “brow”) fits into two grommets sewn into a seam above the tent’s two doors. These now-common clip-style setups are generally intuitive and can be accomplished in minutes. Certainly this was true of the Mineral King 3. Under good conditions one person pitched the tent in under five minutes. In high winds, it took us 10 minutes to pitch and fully secure the tent fly with extra lines and stakes.

All three poles—two main poles and the shorter brow pole—are made of strong, lightweight aluminum and come pre-bent and pre-connected. The bend in the poles has a subtle yet significant affect on the tent’s structure and interior feel: As you clip the tent fabric to the poles to create the dome, bends pull the mesh outward in the head and shoulder area. Where traditional dome tents often feel cramped, the Mineral King 3 offers a little extra space. Only one other couples’ tent we tested had this feature—our runner-up, the Marmot Tungsten 4—and we found it made both tents more livable.

We also appreciated the shepherd’s hook stakes that come with the tent. Most of the tents we tested came with basic L-shaped stakes, which tended to spin around in the soil and slip a line. The shepherd’s hook design, in contrast, held lines secure.

Underneath the fly, the Mineral King 3 has a full mesh dome with a waterproof, tape-seamed bathtub-style polyester floor. The overall feeling inside the tent is airy and comfortable. The tent doors are nearly wall-sized, and after you unzip them, you simply stuff them into pockets, rather than having to roll and toggle-tie the fabric. Another two hanging pockets plus loops for a ceiling hammock provide simple yet effective interior storage.

The Mineral King 3’s fly attaches intuitively with plastic buckles and has well-placed guy tabs. You can secure the fly to the poles with Velcro ties underneath the fly, so that the extra lines anchored the whole tent, not just the thin protective fabric, but we only needed to do so in very windy conditions. When the fly is fully deployed, the tent has two vestibules, which provide additional gear storage and also help ventilate the tent in inclement weather. And in a stroke of design brilliance, a small loop sewn into the top of the fly makes it possible to roll up one half of the fly, exposing the full mesh canopy while still providing shade and privacy.

When the weather permits, it’s fun to omit the fly entirely, but a word to the wise for those planning a fly-less night: Besides providing protection from rain, the fly also helps manage condensation. Though condensation (video) occurs in all conditions, it’s worse when your surroundings are wet and humid, and anytime you have a large temperature difference between the inside and outside of a tent. But if your tent has a breathable inner layer, like the mesh walls of the Mineral King 3, condensation will gather on the fly instead of on the interior of the tent itself.

At $350, the Mineral King 3 isn’t cheap. But it’s one of the least expensive tents we found that had no significant drawbacks and will truly cover your bases for three-season camping. The tent also comes with its own footprint, a groundsheet that protects the tent from abrasion, which we recommend that you have.

Weighing just 7 pounds, the tent is light enough to double for backpacking trips, especially if you divide the pieces among hikers.

Note: The Mineral King 3 was the only tent in our test group free of fire-retardant chemicals. That means it’s less likely to contain potentially hazardous materials, but it is also less fireproof than tents coated in flame retardants. As always, it’s a good idea to pitch your tent far away from any open fires.

Flaws but not dealbreakers

Our only quibble with the Mineral King 3 is that it comes with only six stakes. (Our runner-up pick comes with eight.) Six is enough to secure the tent and fly but not to fully secure the tent’s extra lines in very windy conditions. This shouldn’t be an issue in most situations, but if you’re headed into a particularly windy place or simply want some backup, we suggest picking up four extra tent stakes at your local outdoor shop or online. These inexpensive stakes are comparable to the ones that accompany the Mineral King 3; these slightly more expensive stakes will serve you well in any car-camping terrain.

Claimed weight (including fly, tent poles, and carry bag): 7 pounds 1.2 ounces

Claimed packed size: 25 by 7 inches

Number of doors: two

Number of vestibules: two

Maximum interior height: 48 inches

Tent floor area: 42.5 square feet

Footprint included: yes

After researching 30 six-person tents and testing 15 side by side on a total of five trips, we chose the Kelty Wireless 6 as the best entry-level camping tent for most families. It’s spacious, easy to set up, has weather protection, and is durable, all at an affordable price. The Wireless 6 lacks some of the premium materials found in pricier tents, but it features solid workmanship and should provide dependable, comfortable shelter in most three-season camping situations.

Like our couples’ tent pick , the Wireless 6 is a dome-shaped tent with a tried and true two-pole design. It has an interior footprint of 87 square feet, which sleeps four adults on single pads, or two adults and two or three children, and can accommodate a crib. It has two large doors, and a peak height of 6-foot-3. That wasn’t the tallest we encountered—the Eureka Copper Canyon LX 6 and the Alps Mountaineering Camp Creek 6 each topped out at 7 feet—but it’s enough space for most adults to maneuver standing up. The tent comes with a full rain fly that adds two vestibules for storage (each 14 square feet), totaling 115 square feet of livable space—which is fairly generous yet still practical for most campsites.

The Wireless 6 goes up easily, using the same kind of intuitive pole and clip method as our couples’ pick. The fly is equally simple to attach and orient with color-coded clips. A single person can pitch the tent in 10 to 15 minutes. (Users under 5-foot-5 may need some help fastening the highest clip. At 5-foot-3, Claire managed with a little hop.) Instead of grommets or keys, reinforced fabric sleeves hold the tent-pole ends, a particularly thoughtful feature that suits the tent’s budget fiberglass-and-steel poles. This type of pole tends to be less flexible and bulkier than pricier aluminum, and it can be a pain to handle.

Like most dome-style tents, the Wireless 6 withstands wind like a champ—it fared noticeably better than the Camp Creek 6 in 15-mph gusts. The continuous curve of the dome shape allows for wind to pass over and around it. You can also get a nice cross breeze going by leaving the vestibules open. On sunny days and clear nights, take off the fly and enjoy the sky through the tent’s clear mesh canopy. Some testers, though, thought the tent was stuffy when the fly was fully closed and the sun was out.

The Wireless 6 kept us dry in everything from scattered showers to serious downpours. As always, the vestibule is useful in rain: It gives you extra breathing room and a place to store boots—or tired feet still wearing boots.

The Wireless 6’s drawbacks have mainly to do with material quality. First, it uses fiberglass poles. These can be as strong, or even more so, than aluminum poles (especially cheap ones), but they’re always bulkier, heavier, and not as nice to handle. However, the Wireless 6’s poles were the best fiberglass ones we tested—they left no splinters, unlike those on the Camp Creek 6 or the Copper Canyon LX 6.

Though the Wireless’s fly kept water out of the tent’s interior, it took longer to fully dry once the rain stopped than some others we tested. It uses a 1200mm waterproof coating on 68 denier fabric, which didn’t seem to bead as well as higher-rated fabrics, such as those on the The North Face Wawona 6 or the REI Co-op Base Camp 6 (each of those have 1500mm coatings). If you don’t have time to let the fly dry before you pack the Wireless in its duffle, we recommend laying it out when you get home so it doesn't mildew in storage.

We were not particularly impressed by the quality of the Wireless 6’s stakes: They felt light, and two of the eight bent during our testing. The Wireless 6 also doesn’t come with a footprint, so you’ll have to purchase or make that separately. But to be fair, only one six-person tent we tested comes with a footprint, and that tent costs $950!

Claimed weight (including fly and tent poles): 17 pounds 3 ounces

Claimed packed size: 27 by 8 inches

Maximum interior height: 76 inches

Tent floor area: 86.9 square feet

Footprint included: no

If the Mineral King 3 is out of stock, or if you’d like a slightly larger tent, we recommend the Marmot Tungsten 4 . The Tungsten 4 shares many of the Mineral King 3’s best features, and provides 10 square feet of additional living space as well as excellent weather protection—as long as you set it up properly. Like our top pick, the Tungsten 4 is a sturdy, two-door dome-style tent that can be deployed in about 5 minutes. It uses high-quality materials such as aluminum poles, breathable mesh, and water-resistant polyester fabric, and it comes with a full fly and a footprint. The Tungsten 4’s larger size accounts for the higher price tag (about $40 more), but campers who would like that extra room may find the expense worthwhile.

The Mineral King 3 and the Tungsten 4 have similar shapes, and their pitching process is nearly identical, except that the Tungsten 4 uses two brow poles instead of one. Both tents feature pre-connected poles, and they use the same clipping method to attach the tent body. Marmot provides color-coded buckles to help users orient the Tungsten’s fly, a feature the Mineral King 3 lacks.

Like the Mineral King 3, the Tungsten 4 has a mesh canopy, though the opaque polyester part of its walls go higher, and provide more privacy, than the Mineral King’s. Its tape-seamed bathtub floor and fly had no problem handling rain. The Tungsten’s fly is not adaptable in the same way the Mineral King 3’s is, but it is treated for extra UV protection, which should help lengthen the tent’s lifespan.

In terms of how the two tents feel, the Marmot Tungsten 4 is more geared toward hunkering down and providing stalwart defense against wind, rain, and sun. In contrast to the Mineral King 3’s triangular vestibules, the Tungsten 4’s vestibules are trapezoidal, opening via a central door with protected areas on either side. This design does a better job shielding the tent from incoming—and sideways—wind and rain. The Tungsten’s two brow poles create an especially effective awning over the tent door, so very little water gets in when someone comes or goes.

Marmot uses color coding smartly to help you position the tent as well as set it up. Both of the doors zip open to the side that’s color-coded blue, as opposed to zipping open to opposite sides. This means the vestibules equally protect the doors, rather than providing opposite entries and exits—the latter creates a situation where, in stormy weather, one side of the tent is always more exposed to blustering wind or rain. In other words, one partner—or one partner’s gear—is always going to get a dose of weather when they head out. The Tungsten 4 design equalizes exposure and protection.

In the current version of the Marmot Tungsten 4, we did notice a weakness in the tent’s pole design absent in earlier versions of the tent: The pre-bent joints seem sensitive to the wind. Here's what we observed. Without the fly, the tent’s poles were stable in windy condition. With the added weight of the fly, the poles sometimes twisted, causing the tent to accordion inward and lose its shape wherever it was most exposed. If we Velcroed the fly directly to the poles in these areas—as the directions say to—the tent regained its structural integrity. We suspect that the bends in the current Tungsten’s poles, which are lower to the ground than in the Mineral King 3’s poles, are too acute. (Neither the Mineral King 3 nor any straight-poled dome tent we tested collapsed in this way.) Also, like the Mineral King 3, this tent is short on stakes. Ideally, Marmot would provide another six, in addition to the eight that come with it.

Like our top pick, the Tungsten 4 comes with a footprint. Unlike our top pick, the Tungsten 4 is coated with flame retardants.

Claimed minimum weight (including fly and tent poles): 7 pounds 15 ounces

Claimed packed size: 24.8 by 8.3 inches

Maximum interior height: 52 inches

Tent floor area: 52.7 square feet

The square footprint, ample windows, and functional fly of the Coleman Sundome 6-Person Tent make it a good choice for occasional or backyard campers who want an inexpensive tent that is easy to put up, and looks and feels reasonably nice to camp in.

Unlike some cheap tents we’ve tested over the years, the Coleman Sundome has a simple shape and pole design that should be easy for even inexperienced campers to figure out. The base is a square: Two identical fiberglass poles feed through sleeves on the tent roof to form an X. Pegs at the corners of the tent slip into the ends of the poles, and then the dome-shaped tent pops up (video) .

The separate fly, which covers the upper half of the tent, uses a third, shorter “brow” pole to form protective peaks over the door and the back window. In our tests, an experienced camper took only about six minutes on the first try to set up the tent body alone and stake it out. Getting the fly placed and staked properly took about five more minutes. That’s pretty fast.

Measuring 10 by 10 feet, the Sundome covers an area larger than that of our family-tent top pick though its lower roof leaves it with less headroom. (The Sundome’s center height is exactly six feet, while the Wireless 6 and The North Face Wawona 6 each reach six-foot-four.) The Sundome has only one door, which can be inconvenient, especially for someone trying to slip out of the tent without waking anyone.

Like the REI Co-op Base Camp tents , the Sundome combines high polyester walls with mesh higher up to facilitate stargazing, should you use the tent without the fly, without sacrificing privacy (two of the four walls have mesh from about thigh height up to the roof). That mesh also keeps the tent feeling airy and cool in hot climates.

The biggest material difference between the Sundome and our other picks is its crunchy, tarp-like polyethylene floor. The other tents in this guide all have bathtub-style tape-seamed polyester floors, which is the standard among high-quality tents. The Sundome’s tarp is clearly a budget material, but for what it was, we found it user-friendly. It’s easy to mop up after wet paws and spills, and it doesn’t hold moisture. It’s unlikely to be as durable, though, as the softer, stronger polyester found in our other picks.

Coleman makes no dedicated footprints for its tents—the idea being that the polyethylene is tough enough not to need one. (Still, we suggest that you buy a groundsheet.) The tent has two small, internal pockets—fewer than on any of our other picks—and a loop at the ceiling center to hang a small, lightweight light. It also comes with a little doormat. The tent weighs just 16 pounds, less than any other family tent we tested for this guide.

Although our test tent lasted through two moderate showers with no leaking, be aware that a couple of Amazon buyers have experienced leaking in rainstorms and poles breaking in high winds . When it comes to tents, you tend to get pretty close to what you pay for. If you’re likely to be camping in downpours or high winds, don’t rely on a sub-$150 tent.

Claimed weight (including fly and tent poles): 16 pounds

Claimed packed size: 23.89 by 6.22 inches

Number of doors: one

Number of vestibules: none

Maximum interior height: 72 inches

Tent floor area: 100 square feet

If you can afford to spend more on a family tent, we recommend The North Face Wawona 6 . Everyone who tested this tent loved it, and it’s not hard to understand why. With plenty of interior space, near-vertical walls, and a gigantic vestibule that could accommodate a golf cart, the Wawona feels more like a tiny home than a tent.

At $500, this modified dome-style tent isn’t cheap, but it represents substantial value. Many tents with similar profiles—such as the Big Agnes Dog House 6 —either cost more or require you buy the tent body and attachable vestibule separately. The Wawona doesn’t come with a footprint—few tents this size do—but it’s otherwise all-inclusive, and it is compact considering how much livable space you get. The price also reflects the high quality of the materials, such as the four reinforced aluminum poles, which weigh little yet result in a remarkably strong tent.

The Wawona 6 is more complex to set up than a classic dome-style tent like the Wireless 6, but not by much. We recommend doing it with two people, but one person can manage in about 15 minutes. As with any free-standing tent, with this one you stake out the four corners, and then you feed the two main tent poles through the Wawona’s fabric sleeves, which go halfway down the tent’s body. The North Face’s color-coded poles make this process easy to navigate. Orienting the fly took us a minute on our first try. (We were stubborn and didn’t look at the instructions.) Once you identify the front and back, the process is straightforward. The fly goes up and over the tent body, covering only the upper half of the mesh dome, and then forms the glorious vestibule with the aid of a third pole. Use the extra stakes and guy-lines provided to stabilize the vestibule as much as you need.

Once you set up the Wawona 6, you may not want to leave. Adults as tall as 6-foot-3 can move about this tent standing upright. With a 44-square-foot vestibule, and 86 square feet of interior living space, the tent has plenty of room to house beds, cribs, gear, pets, and camping furniture. Zippered doors can enclose the vestibule fully, so it serves as a separate room for the tent, or you can leave one or both open, so the vestibule can act like a porch or mudroom. The main tent body has a giant front door that’s oriented to make entry and exit easy for all the tent’s occupants at night, and a smaller back window that doubles as a second door.

The Wawona 6’s side-walls are high and straight, but the structure stays very stable in wind thanks to a final pole that wraps around the front and sides—and thanks to the absence of any acute angles in the poles. We were skeptical about the vestibule’s ability to handle wind, since it’s big and supported by a single pole, but it stood fast in 30 mph oceanside gusts and 15 mph hilltop winds.

The Wawona did equally well in rain. Its walls are 75-denier polyester fabric (tougher than the Wireless 6 ’s 68-denier polyester and the same as the REI Co-op Base Camp ’s) that extends about two-thirds up the tent’s sides, and then is topped with mesh. The partial fly does a great job of keeping rain out of the upper, mesh areas, and cleverly placed vents maintain airflow so it never feels too stuffy. (You can also roll up the fly on the two sides to expose the mesh and let in more light.) Thanks to the high opaque walls, users have the privacy to change standing upright and plenty of storage options to stash their gear, including ceiling pockets and a three-pocket back window organizer.

The Wawona 6 uses no flame retardants. This is great for avoiding potential exposure to hazardous chemicals, but you should pitch the tent well away from any open flames.

In terms of flaws, there aren’t much to speak of with the Wawona 6, apart from the price. The North Face offers a limited lifetime warranty on the tent, and will repair most flaws and damage at its discretion.

Some campers might find the Wawona 6’s footprint unwieldy in smaller campsites, or they might simply prefer a tent with a more straightforward design. If you want a six-person tent made with high-quality materials but a traditional profile, we recommend the similarly priced Big Agnes Spicer Peak 6, or Nemo’s Aurora Highrise 6 . MSR’s Habitude 6 is also a good tent, but it costs about $200 more. Unfortunately, you have to buy a separate groundsheet for the Wawona 6 and for most other tents its size as well.

Claimed weight (including fly and tent poles): 20 pounds 5 ounces

Claimed packed size: 32 by 10 inches

Number of vestibules: one

Tent floor area: 86.11 square feet

If you’re a more heavy-duty camper heading into an area with unpredictable weather and can afford to spend a bit more, the REI Co-op Base Camp 4 Tent (for two people) and the REI Co-op Base Camp 6 Tent (for families) are both excellent choices. After many hours of testing, we found that the Base Camps’ reinforced four-pole structure and ultra-spacious interior and vestibules made them the most sturdy, flexible, and reliable models in our test group. (Unlike with our top and runner-up picks for couples, however, you do have to purchase a footprint for your Base Camp 4 tent separately, as well as for the Base Camp 6. REI makes dedicated ones for both the Base Camp 4 and the Base Camp 6 . We recommend that you buy one to protect your tent’s floor.)

Superior vestibule space helped both the Base Camp 4 and the Base Camp 6 rise to the top of their respective test groups. On the Base Camp 4, the two vestibules (front and rear) add up to 44 square feet (the area of the tent itself is 60 square feet). That’s the most of any couples’ tents we tested. As for the Base Camp 6, the vestibule area covered by its front fly and rear fly is also 44 square feet (the interior measures 84 square feet). Only one six-person tent we tested had a larger vestibule: the Nemo Aurora Highrise 6 . (The Big Agnes Big House 6 and the REI Co-op Wonderland 6 also have large vestibules, but you must purchase them separately, for an extra $200 and $125, respectively.)

The Base Camp tents include a low side vent and multiple stuff pockets on the walls and ceiling, which are made of 75D polyester treated with 1500mm of polyurethane waterproofing. Note that these tents are strictly meant for car camping; the Base Camp 4 and the Base Camp 6 weigh 16 and 21 pounds, respectively, so you won’t want to carry either one very far. Both come with storage sacks that you sling over one shoulder.

Both Base Camp tents have two doors and lots of mesh in the main tent body. But unlike the Mineral King 3 and the Tungsten 4, the mesh on each Base Camp tent starts high on the walls—more than 4 feet from the ground. This design is a big plus for people who regularly camp in crowded campgrounds and don’t like to get naked in front of strangers. And you can unzip the front door, remove it, and neatly stash it into one of the tent’s internal pockets—a useful feature if you’re feeling sociable.

The geodesic structure of the Base Camp tents is built to withstand wind and rain. It has two main that thread through sleeves, stretching between the four corners of the tent. Generally, we like clip-on designs better, since those are easier to put together, but in the case of the Base Camp models, the sleeves add extra tension and stability throughout the tent fabric. There are also two poles that arch over each doorway and down the sides of the tent to add extra shape and support; these attach to the tent body with clips. The rain fly has an additional tent pole, too, to support the vestibule. Overall, these poles—all of them aluminum—contribute to a particularly sturdy structure, with or without the rain fly. During our testing, our Base Camp shrugged off both a rainstorm and a desert windstorm as if they were nothing. Despite losing some headroom in comparison with the Kelty Wireless 6 and The North Face Wawona 6 , both of which measure six-foot-four in height, the Base Camp 6 offers a substantial six-foot-two.

If anything happens to your Base Camp, REI’s warranty and replacement program has an impressive reputation. Kit lived in the 2013 version of the larger Base Camp 6 for seven months, and it stayed up the entire time, with the tent poles under constant tension—that is, until two of the poles snapped within a week of each other. After a short phone call, REI offered Kit a full replacement. (This was before Kit started reviewing tents for Wirecutter, so REI didn’t know who he was.)

Base Camp 4:

Claimed weight (including fly and tent poles): 16 pounds 14 ounces

Claimed packed size: 20 by 10 inches

Maximum interior height: 60 inches

Tent floor area: 59.7 square feet

Base Camp 6:

Claimed weight (including fly and tent poles): 20 pounds 10 ounces

Claimed packed size: 24 by 11 inches

Maximum interior height: 74 inches

Tent floor area: 84 square feet

Tents for couples (that is, four-person tents)

If you need to save money and don’t need two doors: Try the Kelty Grand Mesa 4 . When we first tested tents in 2016, the Grand Mesa was one of the few tents with a large mesh canopy. As this design became more common, the Kelty tent became less unusual and ultimately couldn’t compete  two-door models, which are more convenient for couples and have better ventilation. We think our top pick is a more well-rounded choice, but if you’re looking for a reasonably priced tent that’s just as easy to pitch, and you’re not fussed about having two doors, the Kelty Grand Mesa 4 is a good choice. It comes with a full rain fly but no footprint.

Tents for families (that is, six-person tents)

If the Coleman Sundome 6 is out of stock: Try the Core 6 Person Straight Wall Cabin Tent . Core Equipment is a relatively new company, popular on Amazon, whose products seem designed to compete directly with products from Coleman, an outdoor legacy brand that has been around 1900. We tested Core’s basic six-person dome-style and cabin-style tents, and each performed as well as the Coleman tent did. (The Core 6 Person Dome Tent that we tested has since been replaced by Core’s 6 Person Dome Plus Tent , which we plan to take a look at.) We can’t yet speak for the long-term durability of the tent—or the company—which is why we’re not making it our budget pick, but we’ll continue testing it.

If the Wireless 6 is out of stock or you’re camping in fair weather and prefer more indoor space: Try the Big Agnes Dog House 6 . Although technically a dome tent like the Wireless 6, the Dog House 6 has walls that are more vertical, and more head and shoulder space as well—its peak height is 80 inches, taller than any of our picks. It also was the most affordable family tent we tested to use high-quality aluminum poles. So why is it not our top pick? Well, the Dog House 6 lacks a full fly and has no vestibule space.  Instead, it comes with a pre-attached, non-removable cap fly, and short awnings that don’t do much to protect the entry. We weren’t psyched to be in this tent even in light rain or when the wind picked up significantly.

If The North Face Wawona 6 is out of stock: Try the Big Agnes Spicer Peak 6 or the Nemo Aurora Highrise 6 . Both of these tents are well-structured, dome-style tents with high-quality workmanship and design. We preferred the single huge vestibule of the Wawona 6 to the smaller front and back vestibules on these two tents, but either tent would be a good runner-up. Both contain about 83 square feet of space, but the Aurora has more of a bread-loaf shape with two big doors running lengthwise—great for kids who want to run in and out—and a peak height of six-foot-five, while the Spicer Peak has doors at the narrower ends, and a peak height of six-foot-eight.

For longer stays or families with older kids: Try the REI Co-op Wonderland 6 . This is the redesign of REI Co-op’s beloved Kingdom 6 tent, which was a favorite among many family campers, including Wirecutter’s deputy editor Christine Cyr Clisset. Like the old Kingdom, the Wonderland is a delightful wagon-shaped tent with two round doors on either end. It has a massive interior, and comes with a room divider for privacy, good for families with older kids. REI Co-op changed the Wonderland’s pole design to increase its stability in wind, a weakness of the old Kingdom. We don’t yet know how well it stands up over time, but it handled 35 mph winds on the North Shore of Oahu without a problem. The tent has a partial fly and lots of interior storage, but no vestibule—and it costs a hefty $600. You can purchase an attachable mudroom for an additional $125; this substantially increases the footprint of an already large tent if you’re headed to a campsite with limited space.

If you want something that goes up instantly: Try the Coleman 6-Person Instant Cabin , which, thanks to telescoping, pre-attached poles, goes up and comes down much faster (in less than two minutes) than any other tent we tested. It also has no standalone fly, instead relying on a solid roof, which helps make setup easier. The drawback here is that this tent offers less protection from the elements and does less to reduce condensation than models with a separate fly. Although we were impressed by the Instant Cabin’s ease of setup, we thought that it was darker and less well ventilated than the Coleman Sundome 6-Person Tent.

The North Face Wawona 4 , which we used to list in our Other Good Tents section, has been redesigned; it's now made of polyester, not nylon. We’ll take another look at it soon.

We’ve tested (and recommended) Eureka tents in past versions of this guide. In October 2023, Eureka’s parent company, Johnson Outdoors, announced that it was discontinuing the Eureka brand . The product line, including its tents, should remain available through the end of 2024.

Alps Mountaineering Meramac 4-Person : Though this tent was sturdy (its poles were much heavier and of better quality than some of the other fiberglass poles we saw), it has no vestibule, and it didn’t offer as good ventilation as our picks when fully closed.

Eureka Kohana 4 Person Tent : The poles were finicky to insert and left the tent looking decidedly off-kilter.

Sierra Designs Tabernash 4 : We had high hopes for this $150 tent, but the pole (once again, a fiberglass-and-steel design) meant to frame the Tabernash’s doorway and vestibule kept jumping out of its grommet, repeatedly collapsing the only point of entry.

Stoic Madrone 4 Tent : Although the Madrone 4 features lots of fun colors, it didn’t quite match similar tents in its price range in the overall quality of its construction and design.

Coleman 4-Person Pop-Up Tent : The Pop-Up Tent is packed into a 3-foot-wide carrying case that, when opened, shoots the tent forth like a snake-in-a-can gag gift. Presto—there’s your tent. The only problem is that it’s not a very good tent—only for backyard duty at best. Also, packing the tent back up is a nightmare.

Big Agnes Big House 4 : This is a cabin-style tent that we tested as a control; we wanted to know whether a dome-style tent was really better than a cabin-style tent for two people. Though this tent offered a little more livable space, the broad, flat walls had some trouble during high winds.

Coleman Sundome 4-Person Tent : We recommend this tent in its six-person design, but the four-person model we tested was too weak to support itself when subjected to even mild wind or rain.

We dismissed several tents because their fiberglass poles were too flimsy to offer support against anything but the lightest breeze: the Amazon Basics Outdoor 4-Person Camping Tent , the Coleman Hooligan 4-Person Backpacking Tent , and the Eureka Tetragon HD 4 (it’s since been replaced by  the Tetragon NX , which has similar fiberglass poles).

REI Co-op Skyward 6 Tent: This did perform well overall for a cabin-style tent, but like many of its brethren, it didn’t handle wind well, and we didn’t like how much we had to wrestle its poles to dock them during setup.

ALPS Mountaineering Camp Creek 6 : This spacious cabin-style tent met its downfall the same way almost every other cabin-style tent we tested did—in wind. Its fiberglass-and-steel tent poles also left splinters in our palms.

MSR Habitude 6 : This pricey tent has some of the most impeccable workmanship and nicest materials we encountered, but it has only one door. Its red and turquoise color scheme also absorbs a lot of heat and feels overly intense, at least in warmer climates, and the tent lacked options for ventilation.

Mountain Hardwear Bridger 6 : What is a $950 six-person tent like? Quite nice, unsurprisingly. The Bridger 6 is the only six-person tent we encountered that can actually house six people, it’s made of high-quality polyester, and it has powder-coated aluminum poles and endless storage options. It features a large front-facing porch-style vestibule, which can accommodate a table and multiple chairs without blocking the entry. It was also the only six-person tent we saw that came with a groundsheet. But the tent’s striking sea-foam green walls show every scuff and mark—not in the least practical for camping with kids. When we pitched the tent alongside our upgrade pick, we still gravitated to the Wawona’s more versatile vestibule. Also, $950.

Eureka Copper Canyon LX 6 Person Tent : This tent was our family-camping pick for a long time, and served Wirecutter editor Kalee Thompson’s family well during many camping trips in California. It’s a spacious, robust tent for fair-weather camping, but its windows let in wind and rain in less temperate climates.

Eureka Jade Canyon 6 Person Tent: In the severe gusts of a windstorm, one of the Jade Canyon’s aluminum poles bent badly, while a couple of other poles bent slightly but remained functional. (Eureka will replace poles for around $10 each.) We also had an issue with two of the Jade Canyon’s poles sticking together at takedown and making it impossible to get the whole tent back in the already-way-too-snug carrying bag. (The Jade Canyon 6 has since been replaced by the Jade Canyon X6 Person Tent , which has similar poles.)

Big Agnes Big House 6 : Although we liked the look and feel of this brightly colored tent, it costs $600 and the vestibule is a separate purchase ($200), making the full package significantly more pricey than our family-tent picks.

Cabela’s West Wind 6-Person Dome Tent : This tent has a more complicated design than many other six-person models. Our testers struggled for well over half an hour to get it up, eventually attracting the attention of other campers, who came to their rescue.

We found that company representatives are reluctant to estimate the lifespan of their tents. When pushed, most of the reps we talked to estimated five to 10 years, though the actual lifespan will vary widely depending on care and frequency of use (for more advice, read REI’s excellent tips ). In conducting research for this guide, we heard multiple tales of careful campers who had been using the same tent for 15 years or more.

There are several straightforward ways to make any tent last longer:

• Use a groundsheet. A footprint made by the same company that made your tent and that’s sized to match is ideal to prevent pooling water—and to avoid the wrinkles and crumply sound of a cheap, $10 tarp. That said, a cheap tarp will do the job just fine, as long as you buy it or cut it to fit. A tarp that’s too big will collect rainwater off the fly and funnel it right under the tent.
• Clean your campsite. Before you lay out your footprint and tent, make a reasonable effort to remove from the site any small stones, sticks, and briars that could puncture the tent floor.
• Set some ground rules. “Your tent is your sanctuary,” said camping expert Helen Olsson, who would always bring a “play tent” (an old, two-person backpacking tent) for her little kids to use as a daytime play space. When they were in the “real” tent, everyone followed Olsson’s “no shoes in the tent” rule.
• Zip it up. Similarly, keep your tent zipped to keep bugs and critters out, and become a pro zipper user: A thumb placed in the area forward of the direction you’re pulling the zipper will clear the fabric path and help prevent snags.
• Sweep out before packing. Tiny pebbles or sticks packed inside the tent can rub and erode the material over time. Another nice thing about tents that retain their structure without being staked is that a couple of people should be able to team up to lift the tent and shake out detritus before removing the poles and putting the tent away. You could also follow the lead of some campers and carry a small whisk broom and dustpan to keep the tent floor tidy during your trip.
• Dry before storing. “Nothing will destroy a tent faster than mildew,” tent designer Bob Howe told us. “And if it doesn’t destroy it, it just makes it unlivable.” To avoid mildew (and the accompanying stink), never, ever pack away a tent that’s still damp. Line-dry it, hang it up in your basement, or set it up in your garage until any hint of dampness is gone.

This article was edited by Eve O’Neill and Christine Ryan.

Bob Howe, tent designer , phone interview , March 10, 2016

Helen Olsson, author of The Down and Dirty Guide to Camping with Kids , phone interview , March 10, 2016

Ryan Flynn, salesperson for Johnson Outdoors, parent company of Eureka , phone interview , March 7, 2016

Campmor Tent FAQs , Campmor

MSR Tents Frequently Asked Questions , Mountain Safety Research (MSR)

Tent Fabrics Part 1: Fabric Specs , Mountain Safety Research (MSR) , November 16, 2015

Tent Fabrics Part 2: Waterproof Ratings , Mountain Safety Research (MSR) , November 22, 2015

Compare Camping Tents , GearLab

Meet your guides

Claire Wilcox

Claire Wilcox contributes outdoors coverage to Wirecutter. An avid swimmer, surfer, hiker, and camper, she currently lives on the island of Oahu in Hawaii, where she can be found, as much as possible, in water.

Kit Dillon is a senior staff writer at Wirecutter. He was previously an app developer, oil derrick inspector, public-radio archivist, and sandwich shop owner. He has written for Popular Science, The Awl, and the New York Observer, among others. When called on, he can still make a mean sandwich.

Kalee Thompson

Kalee Thompson is the senior editor heading up the team responsible for health, fitness, baby, and kid coverage at Wirecutter. She has previously been a writer on the emergency prep and outdoor beats and is the author of two non-fiction books: Deadliest Sea and The Border Within .

Further reading

Gear for Car Camping

by Kit Dillon

When the Wirecutter outdoor team goes car camping—as opposed to backpacking and carrying gear into the wilderness—this is the gear they bring.

What to Pack for Camping Trips With Kids

by Kalee Thompson

Investing in some high-quality basics can get kids excited about camping out—and help you avoid a mid-trip detour to the nearest big-box store.

The Best Canopy Tent for Camping and Picnics

The easy-to-set-up REI Co-op Screen House Shelter is our canopy tent pick, with good sun and insect protection and a bright, roomy feel.

I Hate Sleeping in a Tent. So I Turned My Car Into a Cozy Camping Haven.

by Elissa Sanci

In the last two years, I’ve fine-tuned my overlanding setup, which hinges on a car air mattress. Here’s what I use to feel close (but not too close) to nature.

This Shelter Shoulders All Seasons: MSR Access 2 Tent Review

Share this:.

• Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
• Click to email a link to a friend (Opens in new window)

With 40mph winds blasting my face, I jumped into the flapping tent, desperate to get shelter from the snow pellets hitting my forehead. As I struggled to attach the poles to the inside of the tent, I thought: there must be a better way .  

For most of my winter and spring ski trips, I’ve used a single-wall tent such as the Black Diamond First Light : simple, durable, and … cramped. Though this type of shelter is bomber and built for extreme weather conditions, it isn’t necessary much of the time, especially on spring ski traverses or early-season backpacking trips when temperatures are rising and the weather is shifting. 

This spring, instead of struggling to set up poles from the inside out, I reached for the MSR Access 2 Tent for a ski trip in the backcountry at Snoqualmie Pass, just an hour east of my home outside of Seattle. Straddling the line between 3-seasons and 4-seasons, this tent is a perfect shoulder season tent that can handle tough conditions yet remains light and comfortable while feeling more like a summer backpacking tent. 

I tested this tent at the base of Bryant Peak in the heart of the Cascade Mountains in Washington. The weather was mild, surprisingly warm for this time of year, and one of the biggest challenges I faced was staying dry from all the wet, slushy snow. I immediately loved how easy the tent was to set up, how light it was, and how versatile it felt. 

In short: I tested the MSR Access 2 where it belongs: at tree line, in the snow (or not), during shoulder season when the weather and conditions are variable and unpredictable — and it excelled. I would use this tent on a multiday ski traverse, a lightweight backpacking trip, or a mountaineering adventure in any season. It doesn’t meet the highest standards of a 4-season tent, but it is suitable for almost anything but the harshest of circumstances.

Check out GearJunkie’s Best 4-Season Tents Buyer’s Guide to see why the MSR Access 2 won our Best Shoulder Season Crossover Tent title and compare it to others on the market.

MSR Access 2

• Type Treeline ski-mountaineering
• Weight 4 lbs., 1 oz.
• Floor area 29 sq. ft.
• Vestibule area 17.5 sq. ft.
• Height 42"
• Walls Double
• Minimal pack size that rivals some backpacking tents
• Double wall and two door design bumps up livability
• Impressively sturdy for the weight
• Mostly solid interior fly holds in heat
• Studded with guy-out points
• Carbon fiber poles aren't the most durable, and need to be treated with care
• No interior room for gear, has to be stored out in vestibules

MSR Access 2 Tent: Review 

Design and purpose.

The MSR Access 2 isn’t the most storm-worthy tent the brand makes (look to the Advance Pro 2 or Remote series for that), but instead, it bridges the gap between the backpackable Hubbas and the tents you might otherwise batten down the hatches with during a true winter storm. Designed as a ski-touring shelter, the Access thrives at treeline where multi-night ski traverses most often make camp, and the tent trades some muscle for weight savings.

The peak of the Access is arched much more aggressively compared to the Hubba Hubba line, which aids in shedding snow loads. The addition of a secondary pole that runs perpendicular to the ridge pole and all the way to the ground undoubtedly bolsters that structure. Most of the mesh of the interior tent body has also been removed, making for a warmer tent in frosty conditions.

And even for all the bulking up the Access has, it still only tips the scales at 4 pounds — no featherweight shelter to thru-hike with, but entirely within reason for early-season backpacking where you might hit a lingering spring squall. Jack of all trades usually makes them a master of none, but as the link between the third and fourth seasons, the Access brings some serious value.

First Impressions on a Ski-In Overnight

At first look, in its packed-up state, the MSR Access 2 seems rather large, but when I first held the tent, it sure felt light. At 4 pounds, 1 ounce, with carbon fiber poles and a rainfly, this tent compares to the weight and functionality of other high-end 3-season tents, but with more specific features that make it suitable for all four seasons.

I’ve owned the MSR Hubba Hubba tent in the past, and while it is similar to the Access in the way it sets up, looks, and feels, those shelters are definitely more of a backpacking summer tent. The Hubba Hubba is much more breathable, and the rainfly isn’t specifically thought out for winter camping.

On the other hand, the Access 2 uses a fly that is positioned low, providing protection from blowing spindrift. It’s set with many sturdy guylines, and the steep slanted walls and ceiling help give the tent a sturdy structure and prevent snow buildup. 

Many 3-season tents focus on breathability, weight savings, and rain protection; the Access 2 checks all of these boxes. I like the fact that it has some breathable mesh woven into the two side doors, which easily roll up and clip out of the way, allowing a full breeze to come through.

Yet, most of the tent body is ripstop nylon with a DWR finish, which helps keep the interior dry. I love that this is a double-wall tent, meaning condensation is less likely to creep inside, like what happens to many single-wall 4-season tents. 

Flush With Functionality, With Some Concessions

With floor dimensions at 84” x 50”, there was plenty of room for my 6’2” frame to fit comfortably, and though I was on a solo trip, I felt that having a tent mate would be no problem in terms of space. 

The vestibules are a bit small, but I could easily store my boots and pack them outside the tent body without them sticking out from the fly. I felt that the interior pockets were lacking, something that many 3-season tents do better, though I did appreciate the small loops hanging from the tent ceiling where I could hang and dry gear. 

I felt like I could move around the tent efficiently and easily, zipping and unzipping the doors and fly without having to move much, and I love the simplicity of the tent. The MSR Access gets the job done without too much extra fluff.

SlingFin HotBox Review: Finally, a Bivy Tent That Doesn’t Suck!

We found the SlingFin HotBox addressed every issue we've had with bivy tents after a month of testing in the Indian Himalayas. Read more…

Pitching in the Snow

On a day when every step meant post-holing into deep snow, I especially appreciated being able to move the tent around and set up the tent body without moving my feet. That’s how simple and light the tent is.

One of the cruxes of camping in the snow is solidly staking the tent, and I loved how the tent fly had wide loops of cordage attached, making it easy to fit my skis and ski poles into the loops to hold the tent down effectively.

However, I was a bit disappointed with the stakes that came with the tent, which are effectively useless in soft snow, though not many stakes would have worked in the type of soft snow I encountered. Safe to say: best to ad-lib your own snow stakes on this one.

The tent fly fits close to the body, allowing it to withstand strong winds and storms. But to be a true 4-season tent, the fly would need to connect to the poles beyond just the bottom attachment points. 

The tent is as light as it is because the poles themselves are made of carbon fiber. Carbon fiber has a very high strength-to-weight ratio, but it tends to break, not bend, more easily than aluminum. Keep that in mind when out in the backcountry, as care must be taken when handling these poles, though a little precaution goes a long way. 

Room for Improvement

As with any piece of gear that tries to fit into a one size fits all category, there are going to be imperfections. This tent isn’t the largest, most durable, or best 4-season shelter, nor is it the most breathable, most ultralight, or roomiest 3-season tent. 

When you compare this tent to something like the Mountain Hardwear Trango 2 tent, which is a 9-pound shelter and has tent poles that cross and reinforce the tent well beyond the norm, it’s clear that there are more burly 4-season tents. On the other side of the spectrum, the Zpacks Plex Solo tent is a true UL tent, weighing just 13.9 ounces and made of Dyneema. Smack dab in the middle — the Access has to give up some performance on both ends.

I’d like to see more pockets in the interior, larger vestibules, and better stakes. It could stand to pack down a little smaller, and, dare I say, cost a little less for not being a true 4-season tent. 

However, for someone who is looking for a tent that will perform in almost any season, I’d still put my money on the Access 2. 

MSR Access 2: Conclusion

I would use the MSR Acce ss 2 any time of the year, in almost any condition, and in all but the worst of weather. The combination of simplicity, lighter weight, a well-thought-out tent geometry, and an effective rainfly make it highly functional and efficient. 

For this tent to be a true 3-season tent, it could stand to be a little more breathable and lighter, and for it to be a true 4-season tent, it would need slightly larger vestibules, and a more bomber exterior. When straddling the line between winter and spring, or fall and winter, this tent stands out as crossing over into both realms. 

As I was breaking down my camp at my quiet spot near a stream flowing from Source Lake, I was already planning where I could take this tent next. Mount Baker for an early-season ascent of the North Ridge ? Canoeing in the North Cascades with my young kids? A ski traverse in the Enchantments in central Washington? When you find a piece of kit that is perfect in almost any season, the possibilities for where you can take it feel endless.

The Best 4-Season Tents of 2024

Our experts tested the best 4-season tents of 2024 for every budget and use case. Top picks include Mountain Hardwear, MSR, and more. Read more…

David Gladish is a contributor to GearJunkie. David has been writing about climbing, backcountry skiing, and backpacking for 4+ years. Prior to that, David spent time at/worked at Mountain Madness, Edgeworks Climbing, and as an outdoor gear Sales Representative.  Based in Washington, David feels most at home climbing pristine granite in the Cascade Mountains.

Follow Us On

Subscribe Now

Get adventure news and gear reviews in your inbox!

Join Our GearJunkie Newsletter

Gear Top Stories Deals

Israel could have used smaller weapons against Hamas to avoid deaths in Gaza tent fire, experts say

Defense experts who've reviewed debris images from an Israeli airstrike that ignited a deadly fire in a camp for displaced Palestinians question why Israel didn't use smaller, more precise weapons when so many civilians were nearby

WASHINGTON -- Defense experts who have reviewed debris images from an Israeli airstrike that ignited a deadly fire in a camp for displaced Palestinians questioned why Israel did not use smaller, more precise weapons when so many civilians were nearby. They said the bombs used were likely U.S.-made.

The strikes, targeting Hamas operatives, killed as many as 45 people sheltering in a temporary displacement camp near the southern Gaza city of Rafah on Sunday and have drawn international condemnation.

Israel is investigating the attack but says the Hamas targets were 1.7 kilometers (1 mile) away from a declared humanitarian zone and that its review before the strike determined no expected harm to civilians.

But displaced civilians were scattered throughout the area, and Israel had not ordered evacuations. So even if the tents that burned were not inside the marked humanitarian zone, the civilians there thought it was safe.

Israel, which was attacked by Hamas on Oct. 7, 2023, has not said where the burned tents were in relation to the compound it bombed on Sunday, but has released one satellite image showing there were some known civilian shelters located about 180 meters (600 feet) away. It emphasized that while there were no tents “in the immediate vicinity,” due to “unforeseen circumstances, a fire ignited tragically taking the lives of Gazan civilians nearby.”

Footage released by the Israeli military appears to show people walking next to the targeted buildings before the blast. The footage also appears to show tents nearby.

Israel has not identified the bombs it used, but Rear Adm. Daniel Hagari, an Israel Defense Forces spokesman, has emphasized that the country chose the smallest munition its jets could carry — with 17 kilograms (37 pounds) of explosive material each — and that an unintended secondary explosion may have caused the fire.

Even the smallest jet-launched munition may be too big when civilians are near because of how they explode and can send fragments far, defense experts said.

Images posted on social media from the tent camp on Monday and verified by The Associated Press showed a CAGE code, a unique identifier assigned to U.S. government suppliers, on pieces of the exploded weapons.

Based on those images and satellite photos of the debris field, two defense experts said the bombs used were likely U.S.-made 250-pound (113-kilogram) GBU-39 small-diameter bombs.

Though they're smaller than many other weapons the U.S. has provided to Israel, these bombs can still create a wide swath of damage. The entire 250-pound shell and components are designed to spew fragments that can travel as far as 2,000 feet (600 meters).

“You essentially have two bombs they use that the fragments can travel 600 meters in a densely packed area. So that just doesn’t check out if they’re trying to limit casualties,” said Trevor Ball, a former Army explosive ordnance demolition technician.

Ball said the serial number on the pieces of the tail kit and the shell debris shown in the photographs identify the munitions as the 250-pound GBU-39. It’s unusual to describe a bomb by its explosive load — in this case, 37 pounds — instead of its total weight, according to Ball and Mark Cancian, a retired Marine Corps Reserves colonel and senior adviser to the Center for Strategic and International Studies.

The debris field in Gaza is indicative of the bombs possibly being set to detonate before impact, which would ensure their intended targets were killed but also risk unintended deaths, Ball and Cancian said. The images showed a small hole where shrapnel was found.

The GBU-39's fuse settings can be adjusted to have the bomb explode on impact, which would create a crater at the site, or set for a delayed blast if the goal is to have it more deeply penetrate a target first.

They can also be set to detonate in the air, right before impact, to ensure multiple targets are hit. But that setting also maximizes area damage, which could explain a secondary explosion even if weapons or other flammable materials were some distance away, Ball said.

Secretary of State Antony Blinken told reporters on Wednesday during a visit to Moldova that the U.S. is waiting for an investigation to show what weapons were used and how they were deployed.

Even if that confirms Israel used a small-diameter weapon, "we also see that even limited, focused, targeted attacks — designed to deal with terrorists who have killed innocent civilians that are plotting to kill more — even those kinds of operations can have terrible, horrific, unintended consequences,” Blinken said.

The defense experts said Israel had better options to turn to than the GBU-39 when civilians were nearby.

The Israelis have previously deployed drones to launch weapons that are smaller and more precise, Cancian said. These precision airstrikes used over the years have caused little damage beyond the immediate target.

Israel, for example, in this strike could have used a smaller anti-personnel weapon called the mini-Spike, which would not have created as wide an area of debris, if it was targeting specific Hamas leaders, Cancian said.

The U.S. has withheld a shipment of even larger 2,000-pound (900-kilogram) bombs from Israel out of concern they would be used in Israel's Rafah operation, where more than 1 million Palestinians crowded after Israel bombed other parts of Gaza. Now, that same number of people have escaped Rafah and are scattered across makeshift tent camps and other areas.

Sunday's strike shows that even the smaller 250-pound bombs the U.S. has continued to provide can be too large for use near densely packed refugee areas, Cancian said.

White House national security spokesman John Kirby said Wednesday that the U.S. was still trying to gather information from Israel about the deadly Rafah strike. He declined to discuss the specific munitions used by Israel but said Israel’s public comments about the munitions used “certainly indicate a desire to be more deliberate and more precise in their targeting.”

Federman reported from Jerusalem. Associated Press writers Matthew Lee in Prague, Ellen Knickmeyer and Zeke Miller in Washington and Kareem Chehayeb in Beirut, Lebanon, contributed.

Trending Reader Picks

Ukraine uses US weapons to strike inside Russia, according to a senator and a Western official

• Jun 5, 12:06 PM

Lax agency oversight put freeway at risk: Audit

• Jun 5, 7:53 PM

Biden urges Hamas to accept latest hostage deal and says militants are 'no longer capable' of another Oct 7-style attack

• May 31, 1:42 PM

Biden tells Muir he wouldn't pardon son Hunter

• Jun 6, 1:53 PM

Atlanta water system to be restored

• Jun 4, 9:14 PM

ABC News Live

24/7 coverage of breaking news and live events

The 6 Best 4-Person Tents of 2024, Tested and Reviewed

Make new memories with family, friends, and pets in one of these reliable tents

Planning a camping trip? Unless you've got an RV, a tent is essential. If it's a family excursion or you plan on bunking with friends, you'll want to find something big enough to fit everyone comfortably.

According to Bill Gamber, founder and president of Big Agnes, the capacity of a tent tells you how many people can sleep in it. "So if you put four people in a four-person tent, you should be able to fit four 20 to 25-inch-wide pads," he says. However, six-person designs are often a more comfortable choice for four people.

We tested 18 tents firsthand in outdoor settings across the country to help you find one that fits your needs. Each four-person tent was carefully evaluated for ease of setup and disassembly, user-friendliness, performance, durability, portability, design, and overall value.

Keep scrolling to check out the best four-person tents that PEOPLE tested.

Best Overall: Coleman Sundome Tent

Buy at Amazon.com

Buy at Ads.midwayusa.com

This tent has an easy one-person setup and fuss-free disassembly.

It's spacious and tall so adults can stand upright and enter easily.

It features a sturdy design with a removable wind cover.

It may not comfortably fit six adults.

The side gear pockets are somewhat small.

Our favorite four-person tent is technically a six-person tent, but the extra space makes it all the more comfortable for four people to sleep. The Coleman Sundome is very easy to assemble. It took us five minutes with two people, but you could probably do it on your own in a pinch. And the instructions are stitched into the bag, so you'll never lose them.

This tent is not only spacious but also tall. A 6-foot-2 person can stand up in the middle, and you can easily step in without having to crawl or even duck down. It has sturdy poles that hold it securely upright and a cover that blocks the wind while keeping warm air in. You can also remove the cover to let the breeze in or enjoy a skylight view.

The Sundome is also a cinch to break down, and it fits pretty effortlessly back into its carrying bag. If we could change one thing about this tent, we'd make the side pockets a little bigger so they could hold more camping accessories and personal belongings. But considering the reasonable price and spacious, easy-to-assemble design, we really can't complain.

Assembled Dimensions: 10 x 10 x 6 feet | Weight: 16.6 pounds | Capacity: 6 people

Best Overall, Runner-Up: Nemo Aurora Highrise 4 Person Camping Tent

Buy at Backcountry.com

It features a quick and intuitive setup and break-down.

This tent is roomy and surprisingly tall so adults can stand up inside.

Its sturdy design stands up to strong winds.

The printed floor may not be everyone's cup of tea.

The Nemo Aurora Highrise Tent also fared very well in our tests. Setup was quick, easy, and intuitive — it took us about 10 minutes without looking at the instructions. The roomy design is plenty big enough to sleep four adults and even tall enough for people over six feet to stand up. This tent is notably durable, with ripstop fabrics, sturdy aluminum poles, and ground stakes. We tested it under strong winds, and it had no problem standing its ground.

Breaking it down was also an intuitive process and getting it back into its bag was a cinch. Considering the generous size, it's also lightweight and easy to carry long distances. The Aurora Highrise is relatively basic in appearance, but it has a printed floor that may not be everyone's cup of tea. Still, we think the price is fair and wouldn't hesitate to recommend it to anyone looking for a family-sized tent. (It's only our Runner Up choice due to the slightly higher price tag.)

Assembled Dimensions: 8.3 x 7.5 x 6.3 feet | Packed Dimensions: 25 x 8.5 inches | Weight: 15 pounds | Capacity: 4 people

Best for Large Families: The North Face Wawona 6 Person Tent

Buy at Moosejaw.com

Buy at Publiclands.com

This tent easily fits two adults and up to four kids.

It has front and rear doors and enough clearance to stand up.

It features an extra-durable design with sturdy poles and thick fabrics.

It takes 30 minutes to assemble.

There's only a mesh door between tent and vestibule so it's not the most weather-resistant.

The North Face Wawona 6 Tent is a great option for large families. Measuring 10 feet long, 8 feet wide, and over 6 feet tall, the spacious design easily fits two adults and up to four kids, depending on their ages. Adults can stand up without hitting their heads, and the front and rear doors allow you to get in without having to crawl over other people. There's also a vestibule where you can keep shoes or stash other camping gear. One downside is that there's only a mesh door between the tent and vestibule, so this isn't the best option for wet weather or cold climates.

It took us about a half-hour to set up this tent, but it should go faster once you get the hang of it (and it only took 10 minutes to disassemble). This tent is also easy to stuff back into its duffle-size bag. With sturdy poles and thick fabric on the floor and walls, the Wawona 6 feels very strong. While it's on the pricier side for a tent, you can expect it to last several years (if not decades), and The North Face backs it with a lifetime warranty .

Assembled Dimensions: 10 x 8 x 6.3 feet | Packed Dimensions: 27 x 10 inches | Weight: 21 pounds | Capacity: 6 people

Best for Small Families: Sea to Summit Ikos TR3 Three Person Tent

Buy at Rei.com

Buy at Seatosummit.com

This tent is the perfect size for two adults and one child.

It features an intuitive setup and disassembly; it's easy to roll back into the bag.

It repels water and blocks winds while still encouraging ventilation.

It doesn't come with printed instructions.

It's not tall enough to stand up in.

We also liked the Sea to Summit Ikos TR3. It's technically a three-person tent, and while it could fit three adults, it's the perfect size for a family of three. It's not tall enough for most people to stand up in, but you can fit a full or queen-size air mattress and a mat for a kid's sleeping bag. Though it doesn't come with printed instructions, the setup is pretty intuitive, and the stakes are easy to get into the ground without a mallet.

The poles are notably strong compared to other tents, and the fabrics do an excellent job blocking winds. There's also a water-repellent cover and plenty of ventilation if you want to allow the breeze in. This tent is easy to break down and roll back into its bag. At just six pounds, it's also lightweight and easy to carry long distances. The steep price might be hard to justify, but the brand's lifetime guarantee can give you peace of mind about your purchase.

Assembled Dimensions: 7.5 x 6.5 x 4 feet | Packed Dimensions: 20 x 8 inches | Weight: 6 pounds | Capacity: 3 people

Best for Beginners: Marmot Limestone 6-person Tent

Buy at Campsaver.com

It features a quick setup and disassembly with a spacious duffle carrier.

The spacious interior can fit two couples or a family.

The screened roof offers a sky view.

It's not as fast to assemble as a pop-up tent.

If you're new to the world of camping, go with the Marmot Limestone Tent. It might not be quite as quick and easy to assemble as a pop-up tent, but the setup is a piece of cake compared to the others we tested. One person can assemble it in about 10 minutes, and breaking it down is just as fast — no instructions are needed. We also appreciate the spacious duffle-style carry bag, which allows you to pack it back up with minimal elbow grease.

The spacious interior is big enough for a queen-size air mattress and up to four kids' sleeping bags. Alternatively, it could comfortably sleep two couples with room to spare for bags and camping accessories. We also like that the ceiling is tall enough for standing. This tent has a rainfly and zippered mesh windows for ventilation, but our favorite feature is the large screened roof that gives you a stunning view of the stars at night.

Assembled Dimensions: 10 x 8.3 x 6.3 feet | Packed Dimensions: 28 x 10 inches | Weight: 16.3 pounds | Capacity: 6 people

Best Spacious: REI Co-op Wonderland 6 Tent

This tent is surprisingly spacious with a tall interior and room for standing and walking.

It comfortably fits multiple beds.

The mesh cover encourages airflow and keeps the temperature down.

It takes a half-hour or more to set up.

There are no door ties, and the material hangs loose when it's open.

At 10 feet long, over 8 feet wide, and 6 and a half feet tall, REI's Wonderland 6 Tent is among the roomiest options we tested. Unfortunately, it took us about 35 minutes to set up, but it might go faster with multiple people, including someone tall enough to reach the middle pole. The surprisingly spacious interior fits a queen-size air mattress, a twin cot, and a dog bed with room to spare for walking around. And the extra-tall ceiling is high enough for adults to stand up.

We're big fans of the mesh cover, which helps get a breeze going and keeps the interior temperature down on particularly hot days. There's also a rainfly if you're expecting precipitation. One drawback is that this tent doesn't have door ties, so the fabric just hangs loose when the zippered entrance is open. Breaking it down is easy enough, but due to the large size, it still takes about 20 minutes. Though the price is steep, we think the Wonderland 6 is worth the investment if you're in the market for an extra-roomy tent that can comfortably fit four or more adults.

Assembled Dimensions: 10 x 8.3 x 6.5 feet | Packed Dimensions: 32 x 13 inches | Weight: 23 pounds | Capacity: 6 people

Things to Consider When Buying a 4-Person Tent

Size and capacity.

When buying a tent, pay attention not only to the capacity but also to the overall dimensions. As Gamber explains, the capacity tells you how many people could sleep in it, but this doesn't necessarily mean a four-person tent is the most comfortable option for four people. In other words, a six-person tent like the Coleman Sundome Camping Tent might be a better choice, as it'll be more spacious, so everyone will have room to walk around the beds or stash belongings.

Weight and Portability

Family-size tents can weigh anywhere from six pounds (like the Sea to Summit Ikos Lightweight Tent ) to over 20 pounds (like ​​ The North Face Wawona 6 Tent ). Go with a lighter-weight option if you have to carry the tent a longer distance on foot.

A smaller stuff sack will be a bit more portable if you're backpacking. On the other hand, larger bags make it much easier to roll the tent back inside, which will save you time when packing up your camp.

Setup Requirements

Large tents that sleep four to six people can be a bit more complex to put together than smaller designs. However, there are pop-up models and beginner-friendly options like the Marmot Limestone Tent that only take a few minutes to assemble. And while you can set up some tents on your own, keep in mind most call for a two-person assembly.

Materials and Durability

The best tents are made of durable, weather-ready materials. This usually means lightweight yet sturdy aluminum poles and water-repellent, ripstop fabrics. "A 68-denier (68D) polyester fabric is very common," says Gamber, explaining that the material is relatively thick for enhanced strength.

Frequently Asked Questions

How heavy is too heavy for a tent?

A tent should weigh about two and a half pounds per person. So if it has a four-person capacity, it might weigh roughly 10 pounds, and a six-person design might be closer to 15 pounds. But the weight mostly matters when you need to carry the tent a long distance, in which case more than 10 pounds might be too heavy. If you're setting up camp near your car, a heavier design may not be an issue.

How big of a tent do you need for four people?

A tent should be at least 8 by 7.5 feet to sleep four people. Having said that, a four-person capacity might not be the best option for four people, as this only allows roughly 20 to 25 inches of space per person. A six-person tent is often a better choice for four people, as it'll allow more space to spread out and walk around the beds.

How We Tested 4-Person Tents

We researched today's best tents and selected 18 models to try firsthand in real outdoor settings across the country.

• Assembly: After traveling to our designated campsites, we started by unboxing the tents and reading through the instructions, and we timed how long it took us to set them up and noted whether any tools or special equipment was needed.
• Capacity: Next, we assessed the capacity, including how many beds could fit, whether we could stand up, if there was room to walk around, and whether there was extra space for storing bags.
• Performance: We slept in the tents and evaluated the tents' sturdiness and weather resistance, noting how well they stayed in place, blocked the wind, and kept moisture out.
• Disassembly: Finally, we broke them down and rolled them back into their bags.

Each tent was scored for ease of setup, disassembly, ease of use, performance, portability, design, durability, and value. With price, comfort, and standout features in mind, we narrowed it down to the highest-scoring options that are featured in this article.

Why Trust PEOPLE?

Theresa Holland is a commerce writer and product reviewer specializing in lifestyle, travel, and recreation. For this story, she compiled insights from our in-house testing team and pored over product specs to craft thorough, trusted recommendations for the best four-person tents. For additional expertise and tips for buying mid-size family tents, we consulted Bill Gamber, founder and president of the backpacking company Big Agnes .

Meet Our Expert

Bill Gamber is the founder and president of the backpacking company Big Agnes .

What Is PEOPLE Tested?

We created the PEOPLE Tested seal of approval to help you find the very best products for your life. We use our unique methodology to test products in three labs across the country and with our network of home testers to determine their effectiveness, durability, ease of use, and so much more. Based on the results, we rate and recommend products so you can find the right one for your needs.

But we don't stop there: We also regularly re-review the categories in which we've awarded the PEOPLE Tested seal of approval — because the best product of today might not be the best of tomorrow. And by the way, companies can never buy our recommendation: Their products must earn it, fair and square.

In short, PEOPLE Tested provides recommendations you can trust — every day, every purchase.

Related: The Best 2-Person Tents of 2024, Tested and Reviewed

For more People news, make sure to sign up for our newsletter!

Read the original article on People .

We independently evaluate all recommended products and services. If you click on links we provide, we may receive compensation.

This article may contain affiliate links that Microsoft and/or the publisher may receive a commission from if you buy a product or service through those links.

• Log in/Log out (Opens in new window)
• All content
• Rural Alaska
• Crime & Courts
• Alaska Legislature
• ADN Politics Podcast
• National Opinions
• Letters to the Editor
• Nation/World
• Film and TV
• Outdoors/Adventure
• High School Sports
• UAA Athletics
• National Sports
• Food and Drink
• Visual Stories
• Alaska Journal of Commerce (Opens in new window)
• The Arctic Sounder
• The Bristol Bay Times
• Legal Notices (Opens in new window)
• Peak 2 Peak Events (Opens in new window)
• Educator of the Year (Opens in new window)
• Celebrating Nurses (Opens in new window)
• Top 40 Under 40 (Opens in new window)
• Alaska Spelling Bee (Opens in new window)
• Alaska Craft Brew Festival
• Best of Alaska
• Spring Career Fair (Opens in new window)
• Achievement in Business
• Youth Summit Awards
• Three Barons Renaissance Fair Giveaway
• Sully's Rising Fest Giveaway
• Teacher of the Month
• 2024 Alaska Summer Camps Guide (Opens in new window)
• 2024 Graduation (Opens in new window)
• Alaska Visitors Guide 2024 (Opens in new window)
• 2023 Best of Alaska (Opens in new window)
• Alaska Health Care (Opens in new window)
• Merry Merchant Munch (Opens in new window)
• On the Move AK (Opens in new window)
• Senior Living in Alaska (Opens in new window)
• Youth Summit Awards (Opens in new window)
• Alaska Visitors Guide
• ADN Store (Opens in new window)
• Classifieds (Opens in new window)
• Jobs (Opens in new window)
• Place an Ad (Opens in new window)
• Customer Service
• Sponsored Content

New Israeli strikes kill at least 37 Palestinians, most in tents, near Rafah

Displaced Palestinians inspect their tents destroyed by Israel's bombardment, adjunct to an UNRWA facility west of Rafah city, Gaza Strip, Tuesday, May 28, 2024. (AP Photo/Jehad Alshrafi)

DEIR AL-BALAH, Gaza Strip — Israeli shelling and airstrikes killed at least 37 people, most of them sheltering in tents, outside the southern Gaza city of Rafah overnight and on Tuesday — pummeling the same area where strikes triggered a deadly fire days earlier in a camp for displaced Palestinians — according to witnesses, emergency workers and hospital officials.

The tent camp inferno has drawn widespread international outrage, including from some of Israel’s closest allies, over the military’s expanding offensive into Rafah. And in a sign of Israel’s growing isolation on the world stage, Spain, Norway and Ireland formally recognized a Palestinian state on Tuesday.

The Israeli military suggested Sunday’s blaze in the tent camp may have been caused by secondary explosions, possibly from Palestinian militants’ weapons. The results of Israel’s initial probe into the fire were issued Tuesday, with military spokesman Rear Adm. Daniel Hagari saying the cause of the fire was still under investigation but that the munitions used — targeting what the army said was a position with two senior Hamas militants — were too small to be the source.

The strike or the subsequent fire could also have ignited have ignited fuel, cooking gas canisters or other materials in the camp. The blaze killed 45 Palestinians, according to Gaza health officials’ count. Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu said the fire was the result of a “tragic mishap.”

Israel’s assault on Rafah, launched May 6, has caused more than 1 million people to flee the city, the U.N. agency helping Palestinian refugees said Tuesday. Most had already been displaced multiple times in the nearly eight-month war between Israel and Hamas. Families are now scattered across makeshift tent camps and other war-ravaged areas.

The strikes over the past few days have hit areas west of Rafah, which had not been ordered by the military to evacuate. Israeli ground troops and tanks have been operating in eastern Rafah, in central parts of the city, and along the Gaza-Egypt border.

Palestinians fleeing from the southern Gaza city of Rafah during an Israeli ground and air offensive in the city on Tuesday, May 28, 2024. (AP Photo/Jehad Alshrafi)

FILE - Palestinians displaced by the Israeli bombardment of the Gaza Strip set up a tent camp in Rafah on Dec. 6, 2023. The tent camps stretch for more than 16 kilometers (10 miles) along Gaza’s coast, filling the beach and sprawling into empty lots, fields and town streets. (AP Photo/Hatem Ali, file)

Shelling late Monday and early Tuesday hit Rafah’s western Tel al-Sultan district, killing at least 16 people, the Palestinian Civil Defense and the Palestinian Red Crescent said. Seven of the dead were in tents next to a U.N. facility about about 200 meters (yards) from the site of Sunday night’s strike and fire.

“It was a night of horror,” said Abdel-Rahman Abu Ismail, a Palestinian from Gaza City who has been sheltering in Tel al-Sultan since December. He said he heard “constant sounds” of explosions overnight and into Tuesday, with fighter jets and drones flying over the area.

He said it reminded him of the Israeli invasion of his neighborhood of Shijaiyah in Gaza City, where Israel launched a heavy bombing campaign before sending in ground forces in late 2023. “We saw this before,” he said.

The United States and other allies of Israel have warned against a full-fledged offensive in the city, with the Biden administration saying that would cross a red line and refusing to provide offensive arms for such an undertaking. On Friday, the International Court of Justice called on Israel to halt its Rafah offensive, an order it has no power to enforce.

On Tuesday afternoon, an Israeli drone strike hit tents near a field hospital by the Mediterranean coast west of Rafah, killing at least 21 people, including 13 women, the Gaza Health Ministry said.

A witness, Ahmed Nassar, said his four cousins and some of their husbands and children were killed in the strike and that a number of tents were destroyed or damaged. Most of those living there had fled from the same neighborhood in Gaza City earlier in the war.

“They have nothing to do with anything,” he said.

Netanyahu has vowed to press ahead, saying Israeli forces must enter Rafah to dismantle Hamas and return hostages taken in the Oct. 7 attack that triggered the war.

In its investigation of Sunday’s deadly strike and fire, the Israeli military released satellite photos of what it said was a Hamas rocket launch position about 40 meters (yards) from an area of sheds that was targeted. In the photo, the alleged launcher itself did not appear to have been struck.

He said Israeli warplanes used the smallest munition possible – two munitions with 17-kilogram warheads. “Our munition alone could not have ignited a fire of this size,” he said.

Hagari said that the fire was “a devastating incident which we did not expect” and said it ignited due to “unforeseen circumstances.”

Still, the strikes have triggered a flight of people from areas west of Rafah. Sayed al-Masri, a Rafah resident, said many families were heading to the crowded Muwasi area or to Khan Younis, a southern city that suffered heavy damage during months of fighting.

“The situation is worsening” in Rafah, al-Masri said.

Gaza’s Health Ministry said two medical facilities in Tel al-Sultan are out of service because of intense bombing nearby. Medical Aid for Palestinians, a charity operating throughout the territory, said the Tel al-Sultan medical center and the Indonesian Field Hospital were under lockdown, with medics, patients and displaced people trapped inside.

Most of Gaza’s hospitals are no longer functioning. Rafah’s Kuwait Hospital shut down Monday after a strike near its entrance killed two health workers.

A spokesperson for the World Health Organization said the casualties from Sunday’s strike and fire “absolutely overwhelmed” field hospitals in the area, which were already running short on supplies to treat severe burns.

“That requires intensive care, that requires electricity, that requires high-level medical services,” Dr. Margaret Harris told reporters in Geneva. “Increasingly, we are struggling to even have the high-level skilled doctors and nurses because they’ve been displaced.”

The war began when Hamas and other militants burst into southern Israel in a surprise attack on Oct. 7, killing some 1,200 civilians and abducting around 250. More than 100 were released during a weeklong cease-fire in November in exchange for Palestinians imprisoned by Israel.

Israel responded to the attack with a massive air, land and sea offensive that has killed at least 36,096 Palestinians, according to Gaza’s Health Ministry, which does not distinguish between fighters and civilians in its count. Around 80% of Gaza’s population of 2.3 million has been displaced and United Nations officials say parts of the territory are experiencing famine.

The fighting in Rafah has made it nearly impossible for humanitarian groups to import and distribute aid to southern Gaza.

The Israeli military says it has allowed hundreds of trucks to enter through the nearby Kerem Shalom crossing since the start of its operation, but aid groups say it’s extremely difficult to access that aid on the Gaza side because of the fighting.

The U.N. says it has only been able to collect aid from around 170 trucks over the past three weeks via Kerem Shalom. Smaller amounts of aid are entering through two crossings in the north and by sea through a U.S.-built floating pier, but it’s nowhere near the 600 trucks a day that aid groups say are needed.

Magdy reported from Cairo. Associated Press writer Jamey Keaten in Geneva contributed.